System Editor

Special Note! With Version 528, Insuresoft has begun the process of converting the peripheral functions to the Web. Please note the Diamond System Editor can now be accessed via the Employee Web. The functionality is the same for both Windows and Web; the UIs can be used interchangeably, if desired.

 

Note: Users must have the authority, "Access System Settings Editor," (System group) to access this function.

 

The Diamond System Editor allows you to set up different runtime parameters in Diamond. Please consult an Insuresoft business analyst for clarification for any of the settings.

AACS (Automatic Application of Credits and Surcharges)
Future Release

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

AU Renewal Reset Rate No Rpts

Auto: Resets the Rate No Rpts flag to "0" on Renewal if enabled.

0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

1 = Enable.

HO Renewal Reset Rate No Rpts

Home: Resets the Rate No Rpts flag to "0" on Renewal if enabled.

0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

1 = Enable.

Pre Process Renewal Active Date

This controls when the per-process renewal and AACS renewal functionality takes effect.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

01/01/2012

Accounting

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Agency Bill Adjustments on Prior Months

Used to determine if Adjustments on the Agency Bill Activity screen for prior months can be made or not.

False = Users will not be allowed to process adjustments on prior months.
True = False = Users will be allowed to process adjustments on prior months.

False = Users will not be allowed to process adjustments on prior months.

Allow Agency Bill Statement Adjustments

Determines if Miscellaneous Charge and Credit Adjustments can be made on the Agency Bill Activity screen.

0 = None
1 = Only Agency Bill Miscellaneous or Credit Card Adjustments can be made.
2 = Only Direct Bill Miscellaneous Credit or Charge Adjustments can be made.

3 = Both Agency and Direct Bill Miscellaneous Credit and Charge Adjustments can be made.

3 = Both Agency and Direct Bill Miscellaneous Credit and Charge Adjustments can be made.

Batch Cash Debug Traces

Used to determine if debug traces are written to the Error Log when posting Batch Cash and Lock Box payments.

False = Debug traces are not shown in the Error Log.
True = Debug traces are displayed in the Error Log when posting Batch Cash and lock Box payments.

False = Debug traces are not shown in the Error Log.

Batch Cash Report

On the Batch Cash UI, selecting the View Report button can run an on-line report after a batch has been posted that shows entries made in the batch. This is the name of the Batch Cash report to display.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Batch Cash Report

Multiple Threads
(Note: Threading may NOT be done on the business and UI tier at the same time.)

This allows the Cash Batch Entry function to process "X" amount of postings on separate threads, reducing the time it takes to post cash.

Implementation Specific.
False = Do not allow the Cash Batch Entry function to process "X" amount of postings on separate threads.
True = Allow the Cash Batch Entry function to process "X" amount of postings on separate threads.

True.

Number of Threads

This is the number of threads that run the batch posting in a multi-processor environment on the business server.

Implementation Specific.

5

**For Future Use**
Process Agency Bill Activity (Note: Used for Agency Bill Activity - Accounting.)

This is used to determine if your company wants to process agency bill commissions, policy and billing activities or not.

False = Disable. Do not process agency bill commissions.
True = Enable. Process agency bill commissions.

False = Disable.

Process Direct Bill Statements as Agency Bill

Used to determine if Direct Bill Statements are processed the same way Agency Bill Statements are processed.

False = Disable. The system will not process Direct Bill Commissions the same way as Agency Bill.
True = Enable. Direct Bill Commissions will be processed the same way as Agency Bill Commissions currently are. Activity for them will be displayed using the Agency Statement screen instead of the Agency Activity screen.

False = Disable.

 

Require Batch Total for Post

Determines if a Batch Total must be entered that equals the sum of all dollar amounts in the batch prior to using the Post function.

False = Do not require batch total.

True = Require batch total.

True = Require batch total amount.

Select Agency Payment For Check Processing

When making a commission payment through Accounting, users may now default this checkbox to send the payment to check processing.

Implementation Specific.
False = Do not default this checkbox to send the payment to check processing.
True = Default this checkbox to send the payment to check processing.

False = Disable.

Select Policy Number

On the Cash Entry Detail - Policy screen, sets the radio button lookup to "Policy Number" as the default.

False = Use Policy ID as the default.

True = Use Policy Number as the default.

True = Use Policy Number as the default.

Suspense Account

This setting determines if  Suspense Account functionality is being used in Diamond or not.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable. Suspense Account functionality is not being used.
True = Enable; Suspense Account functionality being used. This setting displays a Suspense Account menu option when the Accounting button is selected from the Diamond Main Menu. Users must have authority to access and post payments to a suspense account.

True = Enable.

Track Commission Expense

When End of Month runs, this determines if an extra line is added for each policy that receives commissions for the month that shows the written premium, the rate and the total commission expense from a premium stand point.

False = Do not add an extra line.

True = Add an extra line for each policy that receives commissions for the month that shows the written premium, the rate and the total commission expense.

False = Do not add an extra line.

Use Policy Level Agency Bill Payment Allocation

Determines whether the Agency Bill Payment Detail screen will be used or not for payment application on the Agency Bill Activity screen.

False = Disable. Agency Bill payments cannot be applied to individual policies on the Agency Bill Payment Detail screen.  
True = Enable. The Agency Bill Payment Detail screen can be used to apply agency bill payments to individual policies.

False = Disable. Agency Bill payments cannot be applied to individual policies on the Agency Bill Payment Detail screen.

Address Verification

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Automatically Verify Address on Web UI Save

This indicates whether to automatically call the address verification when the risk address is saved instead of relying on clicking the Verify button.  This only applies to the Web UI and not the Windows UI.

False = The Verify button must be selected.

True = Address Verification is automatically called.

False = The Verify button must be selected.

Continue Automatic Renewal When Address Verification Service Fails

Indicates whether to continue processing a Renewal or to error out when the address verification service fails during Automatic Renewals. Values are “True” and “False.” When set to

False = The system errors out during Automatic Renewal Processing.

True = The system continues processing a Renewal during Automatic Renewal Processing.

True = The system continues processing a Renewal during Automatic Renewal Processing.

Enabled

Enable the Address Verification button on the Address screens. Various sections within the Address UI in a policy have a Verified and Attempted button.

False = Disable Address Verification Button.

True = Enable Address Verification Button.

True = Enable Address Verification Button. When the Verified button is checked, the Vendor will verify the address. If there is no match, the Attempted button automatically defaults with a check mark.

Enable GeoCode

Determines if the GeoCode Lookup button is visible / active or hidden. The Geo Info button is located within the Address UI on a policy.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable
True = Enable. When enabled, it allows a user to perform various other lookups, such as Tax Code Lookup, Rating Territory, Distance to Water, etc. Unless an address has been verified, no Geo information can be returned on an address. If it is attempted but not verified, the Geo info should remain blank.

True = Enable.

Group 1 Effective Date

The date entered here determines which Address Verification is used for obtaining Geo Coding information. For example, if the date 05/01/2009 is entered, then transactions entered after this date will use the Group 1 Tax Code information. Any transactions prior to this date will use Proxix.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

01/01/2100

Min Address Confidence

This determines the minimum confidence percentage that has to be met for an address match to automatically replace the address being verified.  The default value is 100.

Implementation / user specific numeric value.

100

Pend Renewal on Validation

This determines whether or not to pend an Automatic Renewal if validations are received.

False = Automatic Renewals are not pended.

True = Automatic Renewals are pended when validations are received.

False = Automatic Renewals are not pended.

Pend Renewal When No Single Match Over Threshold

Determines whether or not to pend an Automatic Renewal if the address verification does not return a single match that is over the “Renewal Min Address Confidence” setting threshold.

False = An Automatic Renewal is not pended.

True = An Automatic Renewal is pended if the address verification does not return a single match that is over the “Renewal Min Address Confidence” setting threshold.

False = An Automatic Renewal is not pended.

Renewals Enabled

Used to indicate if Address Verification is enabled for Renewal Processing or not.

False = Address Verification is not enabled for Renewal Processing.

True = Address Verification is enabled for Renewal Processing.

False = Address Verification is not enabled for Renewal Processing.

Renewal Min Address Confidence

This determines the minimum confidence percentage that must be met for an address match to automatically replace the address being verified during a Renewal transaction (Both Manual and Automatic). This is an

implementation specific / user defined numeric value.

100

Vendor

Name of vendor being used for address verification.

Sagent

Sagent

Zip Verification Enabled

Enables or disables Zip Code verification. Various sections within the Address UI on a policy have a Verified and Attempted button.

False = Disable Zip Verification.

True = Enable Zip Verification. When the Verified button is checked, the Vendor will verify the zip code. If there is no match, the Attempted button automatically defaults with a check mark. The system goes through the Sagent server to verify there is a valid zip code on the billing address during a billing transaction. It does the same thing during the issuance of a policy to ensure the policy holder has a valid zip code.

True = Disable Zip Verification.

Pitney Bowes

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Live URL Name of the address where the “Live” environment is located. Implementation specific; user defined https://spectrum.pbondemand.com/soap/GeocodeUSAddress.
Live Web Service Login Name of the login to the “Live” environment. Implementation specific; user defined  InsSft9871
Live Web Service Password Password to the "Live" environment. Implementation specific; user defined 3850$is%JF
Proxy Domain Determines the Domain to be used for authentication with the Implementation specific; user defined Blank
Proxy Host Name of the Proxy Host Implementation specific; user defined Blank
Proxy Port Determines the Proxy Port Number. Implementation specific; user defined Blank
Proxy User Name Determines the user name to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation specific; user defined Blank
Proxy User Password Determines the user password to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation specific; user defined Blank
Save Transmission Used to determine if transmission data should be saved. False = The transmission data will not be saved.
True = The transmission data will be saved.  
False = The transmission data will not be saved.
Testing Determines whether or not to use the Test System Settings (instead of “Live”). False = Use the “Live” system settings.
True = Use the "Test" system setting.
False = Use the “Live” system settings.
Test URL Name of the address where the “Test” environment is located. Implementation specific; user defined https://spectrum.pbondemand.com/soap/GeocodeUSAddress.
Test Web Service Login Name of the login to the “Test” environment. Implementation specific; user defined  InsSft9871
 
Test Web Service Password Password to the "Test" environment. Implementation specific; user defined 3850$is%JF
Uses DPV Determines if the customer has DPV enabled for the Pitney Bowes Address Verification. False = DPV is not enabled.
True = DPV is enabled.
False = DPV is not enabled.
Uses LACS Link Determines if the customer has LACS Link enabled for the Pitney Bowes Address Verification. False = LACS Link is not enabled.
True = LACS Link is enabled.
False = LACS Link is not enabled.

Sagent

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Host

Machine name / server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

al-cic-com-1

Number of Retries

This setting is used if your company is using the Sagent address verification functionality. This setting is used and invoked during End of Day Processing. This is used to establish the number of times the code will retry connecting to the Sagent Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Default = 5

Port

Number used by Sagent.

4660; do not change.

4660; do not change.

Retry Delay

This setting is used if your company is using the Sagent address verification functionality. This setting is used and invoked during End of Day Processing. This sets the delay in milliseconds between retries if a connection cannot be made to Sagent.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Default = 1000

Administration

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Default Agency License Information

This determines if the system defaults the Effective and Expiration Dates to the system date, and the license state defaults to the first state in alphabetical order set up for that Company / State / LOB / Agency.

False = The system will not default any information when a new license is added.
True = The system will default the Effective and Expiration Dates to the system date, and the license state will default to the first state in alphabetical order set up for that Company / State / LOB / Agency.

False = The system will not default any information when a new license is added

User Setup

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Multiple User Types per User Determines whether or not the "Add" button is enabled when editing a user. This setting allows system administrators to add more than one (1) User Type to individual users. False = Disable. The Add button is disabled when editing an existing user.
True =The "Add" button is always enabled.
False = Disable. The Add button is disabled when editing an existing user.

Claim Restriction Access

This can be used to disable the Claim / Restriction / Access by use of the Claim ControluserRestrict Functionality in Diamond.

False = 0 - Disable the Claim / Restriction / Access

True = 1 - Enable the Claim / Restriction / Access

1 = True

Default Workflow Queues

This enable or disables defaulting all queues when new users are added.

False = Disable all queues when new users are added.

True = Enable all queues when new users are added.

True = Enable all queues when new users are added.

Require Unique Login Name This setting causes the system to require the login name to be unique regardless of the domain. False = Do not ignore the domain when determining if the specified login name is already being used.
True =Ignore the domain when determining if the specified login name is already being used.
False = Do not ignore the domain when determining if the specified login name is already being used.

Advanced Search

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Agency Status Default

Sets the agency default "With a Status Of" combo box in Advanced Lookup.

"With a Status Of:" 

Any Status
Open
Closed

Any Status

Billing Status Default

Determines how the Billing Status Default field is set. If used, the billing default is set "With A Status Of" combo box to "Any Status" on the Advanced Lookup screen.

"With a Status Of:"

Renewal Offer

Quote

Pending OOS
Pending
In-Force
History
Future

Any Status

Claim Status Default

Sets the claim default "With a Status Of" combo box in Advanced Lookup.

"With a Status Of:" 

Any Status
Open
Closed

Any Status

Initialize Search to Exact Match

This determines if a check mark automatically defaults in the Exact Match field on the Advanced Search screen. The system looks for an exact match to what was entered. If nothing is found with the exact match, then the system runs again automatically looking for non-exact matches to the search string.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Limited Web Resultset

This applies only to the Detail Search Web Service. This determines if  Diamond returns a much smaller set of search results. If a web developer uses this Web Service, and only uses the agency code, the policy holder name, the status and the last name, then limited web results are returned which makes it faster.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Max Records

Number of records returned when using the Advanced Search function.

Numeric; user defined.

100

Max Web Records

This setting sets the default value of lookup records being returned when using the Advanced Lookup feature in Diamond's Web Services.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

The default value is "100."

Minimum Character Number Warning

If the setting is set to something other than "0" (e.g., "2" or "3") and a user enters that amount of characters for the search, the system now displays a warning: "This search could take some time. Continue?" If this field is set to "0," no warning is displayed.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0 = Disable; do not display the warning.

Only Primary Agency in Group Lookup All

Used to determine if a primary agent has access to all policies quoted and written by the agency. 

0 = The system will pull back information for all agencies in the group no matter if it is the primary or not.
1 =  The Web Advanced Lookup will pull back information for all agencies in the group if the agency passed in is in a group and that agency is the primary agency. If the agency is not the primary of the group, it will only return information for that agency passed in.

0 = The system will pull back information for all agencies in the group no matter if it is the primary or not.

Policy Looking For Default

This is a text-based setting. This value can be changed to any value in the Looking For combo box on the Advanced Search screen. For example, if your Search Type is "Policy," you could have any of the following in the "Policy Looking For Default" system setting: "Agency Code," "AVS Client Code," "Driver's License Number," "Full Name," "Last Name," "Policy Number," etc.

User defined. It is based on the Search Type default and the corresponding selections listed in the Looking For combo box.

Agency Code

Policy Status Default

Sets the policy default "With a Status Of" combo box in Advanced Lookup.

"With a Status Of:"

Any Status
Written Off
Void Due to OOS Cancel
Renewal Underwriting
Renewal Offer
Reapplied
Quote
Pending OOS
Pending
Offset Due to OOS Cancel
Initial Submission
In Force
History
Future
Archived Quote

In Force

Attachments

Field Name

Value / Function

Options

Default

Assign Type

Used to determine if the Attachment Type is captured when adding an Attachment on the Web.

True = The Attachment Type is captured when adding an Attachment in the Web.

False = Attachment Type is not captured.

True = The Attachment Type is captured when adding an Attachment in the Web.

Assign User Category

Used to determine if User Category selection is available or not on the Attachments screen.

True = User category selection will be available on the Attachments screen. All attachments will be defaulted to associate with the Employee user category. When viewing Attachments in Diamond Windows and this setting is enabled, the user will only be able to see Attachments that match his or her User Category or Attachments they have created. A user with the “Edit User Category Selection” authority (Attachments group) will be able to see all Attachments and, from the Attachments list, be able to change the User Category associated with an Attachment. When adding an Attachment from Diamond Windows, all users will be able to modify the viewable User Categories of their own Attachment.
False = The view of Attachments by User Category is disabled.

False = The view of Attachments by User Category is disabled.

Attach Multiple Files

This allows users to attach multiple files simultaneously. Warning! Enabling this requires the use of an HTML5 Browser or for Silverlight to be installed on the client machine.

False = Users cannot attach multiple files simultaneously.

True = Users can attach multiple files simultaneously.

True = Users can attach multiple files simultaneously.

Attach Write Letter Automatically

This determines if the system will automatically attach the Write Letter as an Attachment. Values = True and False. True = the system will function as it always has which is to attach the Write Letter to the system right away. Then the user will need to open document make changes save and update the Attachment.

False = the system will no longer attach right away. It will open the document, the user can make changes, save and attach the document to Diamond.
True = the system will function as it always has which is to attach the Write Letter to the system right away. Then the user will need to open document make changes save and update the Attachment.

True = the system will function as it always has which is to attach the Write Letter to the system right away. Then the user will need to open document make changes save and update the Attachment.

Create Note when Attachment is Deleted

Determines if the system will create a note or not and assign it to the policy or claim when an Attachment is deleted.

False = A Note is not created.
True = A Note is created.

True = A Note is created.

Delete Policy Level Attachment on Image Delete

This determines if a policy level attachment should be deleted or assigned to a different image when performing an image delete.

False = Do not delete or assign a policy level attachment to a different image.
True = Delete or assign a policy level attachment to a different image.

True = Delete or assign a policy level attachment to a different image.

Diary Days Until Due

This is used to determines how many days until the due date of a diary item created when a file is attached.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Doc Path

Name of path where Word documents are stored. The distinction is, should the templates and documents be stored on a network share, in which case a UNC path would be appropriate, or if a drive / path combination is used, the templates and docs may be different on each workstation. (A doc or template produced on one workstation will not be visible on any other.)

User defined or C:\Apps\DiamondPaths\Data\Attachments

C:C:\Apps\DiamondPaths\Data\Attachments

Pop Up Description

For Future Release

0 = Disable.

0 = Disable.

 

Require Attachment Type on Attachment List

This determines if an Attachment Type is required or not when adding an Attachment from the Attachment List.

False = Attachment Type is not required.

True = Attachment Type is required.

True = Attachment Type is required.

Require Attachment Type on Claim Email

Requires an Attachment Type when adding a system Email at any claims level.

False = an Attachment Type is not required.
True = an Attachment Type is required.

False = an Attachment Type is not required.

Require Attachment Type on File Manager

This determines if an Attachment Type is required or not when adding an Attachment through the File Manager.

False = Attachment Type is not required.

True = Attachment Type is required.

True = Attachment Type is required.

Require Attachment Type on Policy Email

Requires an Attachment Type when adding a system Email at any policy, agency or client level.

False = an Attachment Type is not required.
True = an Attachment Type is required.

False = an Attachment Type is not required.

Sort by Date Attached Ascending

Determines how attachments are sorted; sorts attachments in the Grid View by date attached ascending (oldest to newest).

False = Sorts attachments in the Grid View by date attached descending (newest to oldest).

True = Sorts attachments in the Grid View by date attached ascending (oldest to newest).

True = Sorts attachments in the Grid View by date attached ascending (oldest to newest).

Template Path

Name of path where Word templates are stored. The distinction is, should the templates and documents be stored on a network share, in which case a UNC path would be appropriate, or if a drive / path combination is used, the templates and docs may be different on each workstation? (A doc or template produced on one workstation will not be visible on any other.)

User defined or C:\Apps\DiamondPaths\Data\Attachments

C:\Apps\DiamondPaths\Data\Attachments

Automatic Renewals

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Advanced Renewal  Processing

Allows a company to use all processing interfaces or only the original interface in Automatic Renewal Processing.

False = Disable; do not use all processing interfaces.
True = Enable; use all processing interfaces. initiating pre-processed renewals before the current automatic renewal date. This allows clients to order Third Party information and then process a renewal underwriting image. The system makes a call down to the implementation code returning "True." A renewal underwriting image is created when the Pre-Process function is run in the DiamUI Renewal program. 

False = Disable.

Consider the individual agency underwriter for task assignment

Causes the system to select the agency underwriter user (if available) for pending automatic renewal transactions.

True = the system selects the agency underwriter (if available) for “Pending” Automatic Renewal transactions.
False = No agency underwriter user is selected.

False = No agency underwriter user is selected.

Issue Renewals With Pending Quotes

This determines if the system deletes any quote images on a policy that is set to automatically renew unless the policy has a "Pending" transaction to it. If "Archive Quote on Deletion" (Transactions folder) is enabled, it will be archived; otherwise it will be deleted from the system. This is only used for the Automatic Renewal process not for Manual Renewals.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Issue Together

Determines if the system will wait to issue policies in groups defined by the company code or process Automatic Renewals normally.

False = The system will process renewals as it always has by submitting, rating and issuing them.  
True = The system will wait to issue policies in groups defined by the company code such as by client. The system will either issue all of the policies related to the client or will leave them all “Pending” if one or more cannot be issued successfully.  

False = The system will process renewals as it always has by submitting, rating and issuing them.  

Multiple Threads
(Note: Threading may NOT be done on the business and UI tier at the same time.)

Allows the Diamond Automatic Renewal Processing program to process "X" amount of renewals on separate threads, reducing the time it takes to process them.

Implementation Specific.
False = Process renewals on the business server.
True = Process renewals on the UI (User Interface) tier.

False

Number of Pre Process Threads

Used to determine the number of threads to use when running the Pre-Process Renewals function.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

1

Number of Threads

If "Multiple Threads is set to "1" (Enable), this is the number of threads that run the renewals in a multi-processor environment on the business server.

Implementation Specific; user defined number. (Note: Depending upon the machine this is running on, you can set this to a higher number, but there is a limit. If there are too many threads, this can slow the process down and make it less efficient than running on a fewer number of threads. Generally speaking, most implementations set this at a number of 2 through 5.)

0 = Number of threads running on the Business Server.

Number of Days to Leave Quotes (Note: If you are using this option, you must have the "Issue Renewals With Pending Quotes" system setting set to "1" - Enable.)

Determines if quotes attached to renewals are deleted or not when Automatic Renewals are run.

0 = Delete Quotes.
X = User-defined number of days that quotes will not be deleted when Automatic Renewals are run. When the "Issue Renewals With Pending Quotes" system setting is set to "1" (Enable), and a user defined number of days has been entered here, the system will not delete the quote and not renew the policy until either the quote has been issued or deleted by the user, or, if the number of days has passed, the quote will be deleted and the policy will renew. The system compares the current system date minus (-) the number of days from the system setting to the Transaction date of when the quote was entered into the system. This allows the quote to stay in the system to give the user time to process it. After the days have passed or the quote has been issued, the policy will renew automatically like always.

0 = Delete Quotes

Back Office

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Data Warehouse Active

Used to determine if Data Warehousing is being used.

True = Data Warehousing is turned on  and being used.
False = Data Warehousing is turned off and not being used.

False = Data Warehousing is turned off and not being used.

Data Warehouse Queue Manager

This is the name of the MQ manager that will be handling the Data Warehouse XML.  This is similar to the back office setting “BO Queue Manager.”

Implementation Specific; user defined

Blank

Data Warehouse Queue Name

This is the name of the MQ Queue where the policy image IDO XML message will be sent.  This will use the MQ Manager from the " Data Warehouse Queue Manager" setting.

Implementation Specific; user defined

Blank

ESB Queue Name

This is the name of the MQ Queue where the Back Office XML message will be sent.  This will also use the MQ Manager from the " Data Warehouse Queue Manager" setting.

Implementation Specific; user defined

Blank

Producer Interface

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Active

Determines if the system allows the user to automatically update producer information during the Back Office interface.

0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

0 = Disable.

Command

Execution command.

Implementation Specific.

Execution command.

Connection

Database to Connect To.

Implementation Specific.

Database to Connect To.

Password

Password to pass into stored procedure.

Implementation Specific.

Password to pass into stored procedure.

User ID

User ID to pass into stored procedure.

Implementation Specific.

User ID to pass into stored procedure.

Billing

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Deduction Day Changes on Pay Plans With Defined Down Payment

When a Pay Plan uses the Variable Down Payment option, this determines if the Change Installment Deduction Day Billing transaction is allowed or not.

False = When a Pay Plan is using the Variable Down Payment option, the Change Installment Deduction Day transaction is not allowed.

True =When a Pay Plan is using the Variable Down Payment option, the Change Installment Deduction Day transaction is allowed.   

False = When a Pay Plan is using the Variable Down Payment option, the Change Installment Deduction Day transaction is not allowed.

Allow Expired Pay Plans on Automatic Transactions

Used to determine if an expired Pay Plan will be allowed on Automatic Renewals / Automatic ABT Cancel Rewrites.

False = An expired Pay Plan will not be allowed on Automatic Renewals / Automatic ABT Cancel Rewrites and the Pay Plan will not be set (therefore, it will be a Pay Plan id of 0.)

True = An expired Pay Plan will be allowed on Automatic Renewals / Automatic ABT Cancel Rewrites.  

False = An expired Pay Plan will not be allowed on Automatic Renewals / Automatic ABT Cancel Rewrites and the Pay Plan will not be set (therefore, it will be a Pay Plan id of 0.)

Allow Install Bill Deduction Day Change (Note: For installment billed policies only. CANNOT be used for Credit Card or Payroll Deduction policies.)

Determines if users can change the deduction day on an installment billed policy. (Note: Users must have the authority, "Change Installment Deduction Day" in Billing.)

False = Disable. The Deduction Day button is not displayed on the Policy Control screen (Billing Info section). They cannot use the Billing transaction, "Change Installment Deduction Day," even though it is displayed in the list of transactions.
True = Enable. The Deduction Day button is displayed on the Policy Control screen. Users can edit the day; the new day is applied on a policy when it is rated and saved. Users can also issue the Billing transaction, "Change Installment Deduction Day," on issued policies providing they have the authority to do so. (Authority Needed: "Change Installment Deduction Day" in Billing group.)

True = Enable.

Allow New Business to Use Renewal Options

Determines how "New Business" policies are flat cancelled in the system regardless of whether their Pay Plans have Renewal Options 2 or 3.

False = Renewal Options 2 and 3 are not considered, and the existing functionality is used.

True = Diamond flat cancels all "New Business" policies with $0.00 paid, ignoring Renewal Options 2 and 3 if these are set in their Pay Plans.

False = Renewal Options 2 and 3 are not considered.

Allow Renewal Offer Eff Date Change Based on Check Date

This will default the Renewal Effective date to the check date when a payment is made to upgrade a Renewal Offer.

False = The system does not default the Renewal effective date to the check date when a payment is made to upgrade a Renewal Offer.
True = Default the Renewal effective date to the check date when a payment is made to upgrade a Renewal Offer.
False = The system does not default the Renewal effective date to the check date when a payment is made to upgrade a Renewal Offer.

Apply Cancel Credit to Miscellaneous and Service

When a cancellation occurs, this determines how the cancellation credit is applied.

False = Disable. Any cancellation credits will only be applied to premium.
True = Enable. When a cancellation occurs, the cancellation credit is applied to outstanding Miscellaneous Charges and Service Charges; however, it is first applied to any outstanding premium before it is applied to any of the charges.

False = Disable.

Audit Billing User Interface Changes

This is used to determine if changes made to the Edit Billing UI are tracked or not. (Special Note: The only changes that will be tracked are changes made to the following tables: Billing Acct Receivable, Billing Cash and Billing Charge Credit.)

True = Track changes made to the Edit Billing UI.
False = Do not track changes to the Edit Billing UI.

False = Do not track changes to the Edit Billing UI.

Base Renewal Offer Effective Date On Check Date

This is used to determine if the Renewal Effective date defaults to the check date when a payment is made to upgrade a Renewal Offer.

False = Disable. The system will use the Expiration Date of the new Renewal Offer Effective Date.
True = Enable. This defaults the Renewal Effective date to the check date when a payment is made to upgrade a Renewal Offer.

False = Disable.

Calculate Carry Date On Paid

This setting considers the amount of premium that is currently outstanding and outstanding in the future on a policy when calculating the carry date based on what is paid on the policy. If no premium exists, the system automatically assigns the carry date to the expiration date of the policy regardless of how it would be normally calculated.

False = Disable; do not consider the amount of premium currently outstanding and outstanding in the future on a policy. Do not automatically assign the carry date as the expiration date of the policy.
True = Enable; the system looks at the amount of premium currently outstanding and outstanding in the future. If no premium exists, the system automatically assigns the carry date to the expiration date of the policy regardless of how it is normally calculated.

False = Disable.

Cancel Option 3 to Cancel Option 1 on First Installment

Used to determine if Cancel Option 3 will act the same as Cancel Option 1.

False = No change to Cancel Option 3 is done.

True = Cancel Option 3 will act the same as Cancel Option 1 on the first installment.

False = No change to Cancel Option 3 is done.

Clear Additional Interest Bill To At Issuance

Used to determine whether the Bill To flag should be cleared at issuance or not.

False = Do not clear AI Bill To flag at issuance.True1 = Clear AI Bill To flag at issuance.

True = Clear AI Bill To flag at issuance.

Days to Extend Friday Cancel Notices

When a Legal Cancel Date falls on a Friday, this determines the number of days to add to both the Legal and Final Cancellation dates on a policy.

Implementation specific; user-defined numeric value

0 = Number of Days

Days to Extend Friday Invoice Due Dates

Determines the number of days the invoice due date will be pushed forward if the due date falls on a Friday.

Implementation Specific; user defined numeric value.

0 = Number of Days

Days to Extend Saturday Cancel Notices

When a Legal Cancel Date falls on a Saturday, this determines the number of days to add to both the Legal and Final Cancellation dates on a policy.

Implementation specific; user-defined numeric value

0 = Number of Days

Days to Extend Saturday Invoice Due Dates

Determines the number of days the invoice due date will be pushed forward if the due date falls on a Friday.

Implementation specific; user-defined numeric value

0 = Number of Days

Days to Extend Sunday Cancel Notices

When a Legal Cancel Date falls on a Sunday, this determines the number of days to add to both the Legal and Final Cancellation dates on a policy.

Implementation specific; user-defined numeric value

0 = Number of Days

 

Days to Extend Sunday Invoice Due Dates

Determines the number of days the invoice due date will be pushed forward if the due date falls on a Sunday.

Implementation specific; user-defined numeric value

0 = Number of Days

 

Non Pay Cancel For Installment 1

Used to determine if the system generates Legal / Final Notices on policies where only installment 1 has processed.

False = The system does not generate Legal / Final Notices on policies where only installment 1 has processed.
True = The system generates Legal / Final Notices on policies where only installment 1 has processed.

True = The system generates Legal / Final Notices on policies where only installment 1 has processed.

Percentage Required for Reinstatement

Used to determine when making a payment on a policy cancelled for non-pay, if the amount meets or exceeds the percentage required by the system setting, the policy will be reinstated.

Implementation specific; user defined.

0 = Any amount will reinstate.(Other Notes: This will only validate against a lump sum payment; not partial payments. For example, on a policy having a $1,000.00 balance with an 85% required to reinstate, a payment of $840.00 and a payment of $1.00 will not reinstate the policy. The required payment is $850.00)

Percentage Required For Revised Renewal Offer

This determines the percentage of a renewal balance that would have to be covered by a credit balance existing on a policy before a Revised Renewal Offer is suppressed for print.

Implementation specific; user defined. This is a numeric value.

0

Percentage Required For Revised Renewal Offer Suppression

This determines the percentage of a renewal balance that would have to be covered by a credit balance existing on a policy before a Revised Renewal Offer is suppressed for print.

Implementation specific; user defined. This is a numeric value.

100

Renewal Offer Credit Balance Diary Queue After Transactions

This will generate a diary to the specified user / queue if a credit balance exists after a policy transaction to cover a Renewal Offer. The system setting should contain the name of the queue that will get these diary items. If they should just be assigned to the person doing the transaction, it can be "Current User."

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Renewal Version Column Name

This determines if the Renewal Version column header in Billing will use the given name if a different one than Ver is needed.

Blank = If this is left blank, it will not change anything in the system. The Renewal Version column on the Billing screens will show it as "Ver."
Implementation specific; user defined =  If a new column name is given in this system setting, that name will be used instead of Ver for the name of the Renewal Version column.

Blank = If this is left blank, it will not change anything in the system. The Renewal Version column on the Billing screens will show it as "Ver."

Require Credit Card Receipt Info

Determines if users are required to enter Credit Card account information before a payment can be made.

False = Disable. Users are not required to enter Credit Card account information before a payment can be made.
True = Enable. Users are required to enter Credit Card account information before a payment can be made.

True = Enable. Users are required to enter Credit Card account information before a payment can be made.

Roll Installments With Endorsements

On policies having endorsements that are issued on the same day an installment is set to roll, this determines if the installment rolls at the time the endorsement is issued and does not occur during End of Day Processing or if the endorsement will not trigger the installment to roll. In this case, the installment will roll during End of Day Processing.

False = Disable. An endorsement will not trigger the installment to roll. The installment will roll during End of Day Processing.
True = Enable. When an endorsement is issued on the same day an installment is set to roll, the installment rolls at the time the endorsement is issued and does not occur during End of Day Processing.

True = Enable.

Roll Only Installment 1 at Term Issuance

(Note: This was formerly called: "Roll Only Installment 1 At New Business Issuance."

At Renewal, this determines if the first installment is processed only if a late Renewal is issued.

False = The first installment is not processed if a late Renewal is issued.
True = The first installment is processed only if a late Renewal is issued.

False = The first installment is not processed if a late Renewal is issued.

Save Amount Due per Due Date

Used to determine if the amount due and prior amount due will be saved in the Billing Invoice Due Date table for Cancel Option 4 policies.

False =  The amount due and prior amount due will be saved in the Billing Invoice Due Date table.
True = The amount due and prior amount due will be saved in the Billing Invoice Due Date table.

False =  The amount due and prior amount due will be saved in the Billing Invoice Due Date table.

Send Notices with Late Term Bills and Renewal Offers

Send Legal / Final Notices with late term bills when the version is set to renewal with renewal offers, and the renewal offer has not been upgraded.  

False = Do not send Legal / Final Notices. True = Send Legal / Final Notices. (Important Note: This will prevent Legal / Final Notices from being created on late term endorsements. It only works if the version tied to the policy is set up for Renewal Offers.)

True = Send Legal / Final Notices. (Important Note: This will prevent Legal / Final Notices from being created on late term endorsements. It only works if the version tied to the policy is set up for Renewal Offers.)

Set Deduction Day to Installment 2 Due Day

Determines if the Deduction Day is based on the Due Date of the second installment.

False = The deduction day is not based on the due date of installment 2.
True = This will create a schedule so the deduction day is based on the due date of installment 2.  (IMPORTANT NOTE! If this is set to "1," you must also set the "Allow Install Bill Deduction Day Change" system setting (Billing folder) to "1" (Enable).

False = The deduction day is not based on the due date of installment 2.

Set Deduction Day to Transaction Day on Late Issued Installment Plans

Determines if the deduction day is automatically set to the day of the system date for policies that are late issued (rather than the effective day of the policy).

False = The Deduction Day is not automatically set to the day of the system date for policies that are late issued.

True =The Deduction Day is automatically set to the day of the system date for policies that are late issued (rather than the effective day of the policy).

False = The Deduction Day is not automatically set to the day of the system date for policies that are late issued.

Set Renewal Installment Due Date to Installment 2 Due Day

This sets the first Renewal Installment to have the same due date as the rest. This setting is dependent on "Set Deduction Day to Installment 2 Due Day" equal to "True" for day pay plans.

False = Does not set the Renewal Installment to have the same due date as the rest.
True = Sets the first Renewal Installment to have the same due date as the rest. This setting is dependent on "Set Deduction Day to Installment 2 Due Day" being set to "True" for day pay plans.

False = Does not set the Renewal Installment to have the same due date as the rest.

Suppress Legal Notices On Reinstatement

Suppress Legal Notices for remaining balances after a Reinstatement. The Notice will roll with the next installment.

False = Disable. Legal Notices are not suppressed for remaining balances after a Reinstatement.

True = Enable. Legal Notices are suppressed for remaining balances after a Reinstatement. The Notice will roll with the next installment.

False = Disable.

Suppress Service Charge when Installment Amount Below Minimum Invoice

Determines if a Service Charge rolls when the installment amount is less than the minimum invoice amount.

False =A confirmation that printing is not being suppressed in this case since a legal and final notice will be created and an invoice will need to be sent.

True = A Service Charge will not roll when the installment amount is less than the minimum invoice amount.

True = A Service Charge will not roll when the installment amount is less than the minimum invoice amount.

Use Annual Premium for Prorated Term Calculations

Determines the type of premium that will be used for Specific Date ABT policies: Annual Premium or Full Term Premium

False = The system will use the current functionality which is Full Term Premium (FTP) for pro-rated terms on Specific Date ABT policies.
True = The system will use the annual premium for pro-rated term calculations of Specific Date ABT policies.

True = The system will use the annual premium for pro-rated term calculations of Specific Date ABT policies.

Use Endorsement Due Days for Agency Bill

For Agency Bill policies, Endorsement Due Days will be used when calculating the Due Date for Endorsements.

False = Endorsement Due Days will be not used when calculating the Due Date for Endorsements.

True = Endorsement Due Days will be used when calculating the Due Date for Endorsements.

False = Endorsement Due Days will be not used when calculating the Due Date for Endorsements.

Use Policy Commission Type

Used to indicate where to get Commission Type: Commission Contribution or Agency.

False = Paid premium commissions using monthly Account Receivable information will be based on commission type  in Agency.

True = Paid premium commissions using monthly Account Receivable information will be based on commission type in Commission Contribution not commission type in Agency.

True = Paid premium commissions using monthly Account Receivable information will be based on commission type in Commission Contribution not commission type in Agency.

Validate Major Industry Identifier on Credit Card Policies

Used to determine if a Credit Card Number will be validated to ensure the correct type of card has been selected when saving Credit Card information or making Credit Card payments.  Values are “True” (Enable) and “False” (Disable). If set to “When set to “. The default value is “False” (Disable).

False = The first digit of a Credit Card Number will not be validated.
True = The first digit of a Credit Card Number will be validated to ensure the correct type of card has been selected when saving Credit Card information or making Credit Card payments.

False = The first digit of a Credit Card Number will not be validated.

Waive Fees and Charges on Flat Cancel

Used to determine if any outstanding Miscellaneous Fees (that have been set up to automatically waive) and Service Charges will be waived or not.

False = Outstanding Miscellaneous Fees and Service Charges will be waived.
True = When a policy that is flat cancelled, any outstanding Miscellaneous Fees (that have been set up to automatically waive) and Service Charges will be waived. Special Note! No new authority has been added; however, it is imperative that if this is set to "True," in your system, any user performing a "Cancel" must have the following authorities in the Billing group: "Waive Miscellaneous Charge" and " Waive Service Charge."

False = Outstanding Miscellaneous Fees and Service Charges will be waived.

Account Bill

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Different Agencies on Policies in a Billing Account

When linking policies in a Billing Account, this determines if the system allows agencies for those policies to be different.

False = Do not allow agencies to be different.
True = Agencies are allowed to be different.

False = Do not allow agencies to be different.

Allow EFT and Non-EFT Policies to Coexist: Has Been Renamed - "Allow Recurring and Non-Recurring Policies in a Billing Account"

This determines if Credit Card / EFT Install Bill Pay Plans can or cannot exist on the same account.

False = Do not allow policies with Credit Card / EFT Install Pay Plans to exist on the same account.
True = Allow policies with Credit Card / EFT Install Pay Plans to exist on the same account

False = Do not allow policies with Credit Card / EFT Install Pay Plans to exist on the same account

Display Billed Activity at the Account Level Determines if the billed activity and future installments will display at the account level. False = Billed activity and future installments will not display at the account level.
True = Billed activity and future installments will display at the account level.
False = Billed activity and future installments will not display at the account level
Group Billing Account Payments and Adjustments in the EFT File Used to determine if Billing account payments and adjustments will be sent as one entry per billing account, per type in the EFT file. False = Billing account payments and adjustments will not be sent as one entry per billing account, per type in the EFT file.
True = Billing account payments and adjustments will be sent as one entry per billing account, per type in the EFT file.
False = Billing account payments and adjustments will not be sent as one entry per billing account, per type in the EFT file.
Process One Credit Card Transaction per Recurring Credit Card Account Payment When a recurring credit card account payment is processed, this determines if only one transaction will be submitted to the credit card processor. False = More than one transaction will be submitted.
True = Only one transaction will be submitted to the credit card processor.
False = More than one transaction will be submitted.
Set Billing Information at the Account Level Determines if the same pay plan, bill method, bill to and EFT / Credit Card information will be used for all policies linked to the billing account. False = the same pay plan, bill method, bill to and EFT / Credit Card information will not be used for all policies linked to the billing account.
True = The same pay plan, bill method, bill to and EFT / Credit Card information will be used for all policies linked to the billing account.
False = the same pay plan, bill method, bill to and EFT / Credit Card information will not be used for all policies linked to the billing account.

Spread Billing Account Overpayments Across Billing Account

Used to determine if billing account overpayments will be applied proportionally across all policies in the billing account based on the future outstanding or not.

False = Billing account overpayments are not spread.

True = Billing account overpayments will be applied proportionally across all policies in the billing account based on the future outstanding

False = Billing account overpayments are not spread.

Use LOB Directed Payment

This determines if Account Bill payments will use the LOB directed payment order according to the set up in the BillingAccountDirectedLOBPaymentOrder table.

False = The current functionality will be used.
True = Account Bill payments will use the LOB directed payment order according to the set up in the  BillingAccountDirectedLOBPaymentOrder table.

False = The current functionality will be used.

Adjustments

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Agency Bill Adjustments

Allows / disallows cash adjustments on agency bill policies using the Adjustment button on the Statement Display screen.

False = Do not allow adjustments. The system returns a validation indicating: "The system does not allow the adjustments on agency billed policies."
True = Allow cash adjustments. When selecting the Adjustment button, the system returns the Accounting Adjustment screen for cash adjustments.

False = Do not allow adjustments. The system returns a validation indicating: "The system does not allow the adjustments on agency billed policies."

Allow Blanket Waive Miscellaneous Charge On Converted Policies  

Allows users to waive outstanding miscellaneous charges on converted policies without actually selecting a miscellaneous charge on the screen.

False = Do not allow waiving of miscellaneous charges on converted policies.
True = Allow waiving of miscellaneous charges on converted policies.

False = Do not allow waiving of miscellaneous charges on converted policies.

Allow Waive Premium Greater Than Balance

Determines if users are allowed to waive paid and future premium amounts (up to the total amount of premium on the policy).

False = Disable.
True = Enable. When enabled, future waive amounts are listed on the Billing Future tab as a separate line item under the applicable installment.

False = Disable.

Display Reversal Adjustment for Credit Card Payment

This determines whether the Reversal option is offered to a user with the appropriate authority in the action column of a Credit Card payment statement activity item.

False = The Reversal option is not offered to a user.

True = The Reversal option is offered to a user with the appropriate authority in the action column of a Credit Card payment statement activity item.

True = The Reversal option is offered to a user with the appropriate authority in the action column of a Credit Card payment statement activity item.

Spread Adjustment Within Lead Days

This setting affects EFT withdrawal amounts that increase as a result of a billing adjustment. This is used to determine how an EFT payment is handled when the system date is within the lead days of the next installment and a billing adjustment is done that increases the amount of the payment. (Please Note: Amounts that decrease are not included at this time.)

False = The balance that is created as the result of the adjustment will remain on the Billing Statement screen. When the next installment rolls, then that balance will be considered together with that installment when the EFT payment is created.
True = When a billing adjustment is done on an EFT such as an NSF (and the system date is within lead days of the next installment), the system spreads the amount over the future installments but not the first one to roll since it is within lead days.

False = The balance that is created as the result of the adjustment will remain on the Billing Statement screen.

Stop Adjustments When Pending Refund Exists

When a “Pending” refund exists, this is used to determine if adjustments are prevented from being processed.

False = Adjustments are not prevented.

True = Adjustments are stopped when a “Pending” refund exists on a policy.

False = Adjustments are not prevented.

Credit Card

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Bypass Vendor Processing

Determines if a credit card payment will process without attempting to contact a vendor, such as Authorize.net.

False = The user will not bypass the credit card vendor when making a payment.

True =  The user will bypass the credit card vendor when making a payment.

False = The user will not bypass the credit card vendor when making a payment.

Disable Credit Card Deduction Day

This controls whether the Deduction Day field is enabled or disabled for Credit Card Pay Plans.

False = The Deduction Day defaults to the policy effective day. If deduction day is not the policy effective day at Renewal and the setting is disabled, the new term will have the policy effective day as the deduction day.
True = Users can adjust the Deduction Day for Credit Card Pay Plans.

False = The Deduction Day defaults to the policy effective day.

Require CVV2 Code Entry

This is used to determine if entry of the CVV2 Code is required on a Credit Card payment.

False = Users are not required to enter a CVV2 Code.
True = Users are required to enter a CVV2 Code.

False = Users are not required to enter a CVV2 Code.

Use Toke-Based Credit Card Vendor

This determines if the Authorize.NET Customer Information Manager (CIM) is used to store and manage credit card data.

False = Autorize.NET Customer Information Manager is not used to store and manage credit card data.

True = The Authorize.NET Customer Information Manager is used to store and manage credit card data. The Credit Card Control that appears under Receipt or when entering Pay Plan information will be replaced with the new CIM Credit Card Control; field names and behavior is different.

False = Autorize.NET Customer Information Manager is not used to store and manage credit card data.

Display

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Default Billing Future Tab to Combine Installments and Fees

Determines if the "Combine Installment Fees" check box on the Billing Future Tab defaults with a check mark when loading the page.

True = The "Combine Installments and Fees" check box on the Billing Future Tab will default with a check mark when loading the page.
False = The "Combine Installments and Fees" field will not have a check mark.

False = The "Combine Installments and Fees" field will not have a check mark.

Default Billing Statement To Account Level

(Note: For the Account Bill option.) If a policy is in a billing account, the Billing Statement Display screen loads automatically with the billing account detail instead of just the activity for that policy.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Disable Offset Reapply Statement Lines

Implementation Specific. This setting determines if the offset / re-apply lines are displayed on the Billing Statement Display screen. This also affects the Print XML.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Display Bill To Change Warning

This setting  determines if the system displays a message indicating the bill to is being changed on a policy being linked to an account.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Display Commission Type Validation On Agency Save

Used to determine if a validation message is displayed if the Commission Type field is not set to either "Paid" or "Written" Premium when saving an agency.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Display EFT File Line on Statement Screen

Determines if the line "EFT File Generated" will be added to the Statement screen when an EFT File is generated. 

False = No line is displayed for an EFT file on the Billing Statement screen.
True = The line "EFT File Generated" will be added to the Statement screen when an EFT File is generated.  

False = No line is displayed for an EFT file on the Billing Statement screen.

Display Future Credits Spread on EFT (Note: For Account Bill Policies)

This is used to determine if the system displays how credit will be applied if a credit balance exists on an EFT policy that is account bill.

False = No display is shown.
True = If a credit balance exists on a policy, the system displays how the credit will be applied to other policies in the account.

False = No display is shown.

Hide Cancel-Reinstate Notice Lines

Determines if the "Notice" line for Cancels and Reinstates are displayed or not on the Billing screen.

False = Policy submission lines are not hidden in the Billing UI.

True = The Billing screen and Print XML will no longer include the “Notice” lines for Cancels and Reinstates.

False = Policy submission lines are not hidden in the Billing UI.

Hide Submission Lines

This determines if the Policy Submission lines are hidden or displayed on the Billing screen.

False = The policy submission lines are displayed on the Billing screen.

True = The policy submission lines are hidden on the Billing screen.

False = The policy submission lines are displayed on the Billing screen.

Show Payments Only on Billing Summary

When using the Billing Summary, this determines if only payments are displayed.  

False = All Billing information is shown.

True = Only payments are displayed on the Billing Summary.

False = All Billing information is shown.

Show Percentage Indicator for Agency Fees

This determines if the "Fee as Percentage" check box is visible or not when using the Agency Fee functionality.

 False =  The check box is not visible.

True = The "Fee as Percentage" check box is visible when using the Agency Fee functionality.

True = The "Fee as Percentage" check box is visible when using the Agency Fee functionality.

Sort Billing Statement in Descending Order

Sorts the information on the Statement screen by descending chronological order. (i.e., the newest record displays first and the oldest record displays last).

False = Newest record displayed last / oldest displayed first.

True = Newest record displayed first / oldest last.

False = Newest record displayed last / oldest displayed first.

Use Billing Summary Tab

When the Billing Statement Display screen opens, this determines if the Summary tab is the default screen displayed or the Billing Statement (Detail) screen is displayed.

0 = False. The Billing Statement Display (Detail) is displayed by default.
True = Enable. The Summary Tab is shown by default on the Billing Statement Display screen.

False = Disable. The Billing Statement Display (Detail) is displayed by default.

Use Billing Summary Tab on Agency Web

Used to enable / disable the use of the Summary View on the Billing Statement screen for the Agency Web.

False =  The Summary View on the Billing Statement screen for the Agency Web is not available.

True = The Summary View on the Billing Statement screen for the Agency Web is available.

False =  The Summary View on the Billing Statement screen for the Agency Web is not available.

EFT

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Deduction Day Greater Than 28

Allows / disallows the entry of a deduction day greater than 28 on the Policy EFT screen.

False = Do not allow the entry of a deduction day greater than 28; system returns an error message.
True = Allows the entry of a deduction day greater than 28.

True = Allows the entry of a deduction day greater than 28.

Allow EFT Payments on Policies with Non-EFT Pay Plans

Used to determine if users will be allowed to make payments with a source of EFT against policies currently on a non-EFT Pay Plan.

False = Users will not be allowed to make payments with a source of EFT against policies currently on a non-EFT Pay Plan.

True = Users will be allowed to make payments with a source of EFT against policies that are currently on a non-EFT Pay Plan.

True = Users will be allowed to make payments with a source of EFT against policies that are currently on a non-EFT Pay Plan.

Create Agency Bill Premium EFT Records

Indicates whether to create Agency Bill Premium EFT records for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

False = Agency Bill Premium EFT records will not be created for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

True = Agency Bill Premium EFT records will be created for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

False = Agency Bill Premium EFT records will not be created for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

Disable Deduction Day

Disable / enable deduction day on the EFT screen (Policy Control screen.

False = Deduction Day field is accessible to user for change.
True = Deduction Day field is protected; user may not alter. The Deduction Day defaults to display the day of the effective day of the policy.

False = Deduction Day field is accessible to user for change.

Do Not Draft for Installment 1

Used for New Business EFT policies only. Determines if an Installment 1 rolls at End of Day and a draft does not occur for any difference between the cash on the policy and the installment amount.

False = Any difference is drafted by EFT.
True = When an Installment 1 rolls for a New Business EFT policy, the positive difference between the installment amount and the down payment amount will not be drafted.  It will be drafted when Installment 2 rolls.

False = Any difference is drafted by EFT.

Do Not Spread at Inception Except for Positive Balance

Used for New Business EFT policies only. Determines if on a New Business policy issuance the positive balance is greater than the down payment amount is spread which then takes precedence over the “Spread at Inception” system setting.

False = The Spread at Inception system setting is considered.
True = It takes precedence over the existing “Spread at Inception” system setting. On a new business EFT policy, if a positive balance occurs between the installment that rolls and the down payment amount, that amount will spread to the future installments.    

False = The Spread at Inception system setting is considered.

EFT Returns User ID

Determines if a workflow item is created for the user id specified.

False = Do not create a workflow item.

True = Create a workflow item for the user id specified.

False = Do not create a workflow item.

Enable Deduction Day At Pending New Business Renewal

Disables / enables changes to EFT Deduction Day for only New Business and Renewal images of policy.

False = Disable EFT Deduction Day.
True = Enable EFT Deduction Day.

1 = Enable EFT Deduction Day for only New Business and Renewal images of policy.

Form Name for EFT Account Changes

When the name of a form is specified in this setting, users receive a message advising them that a new form (named here) needs to be submitted when EFT information is changed on a policy.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank. If the form name is blank, users do not receive a message.

Maintain EFT Schedule on ABT Cancel Rewrite

This is used to determine if the lead days for an ABT Cancel Rewrite transaction will cause the installment due dates to stay the same or will spread any installments based on the lead days to the future.

False = The system will spread any installments based on the lead days to the future.
True = This sets the lead days to "0" (zero) for an ABT Cancel Rewrite transaction and will cause the installment dues dates to stay the same.

False = The system will spread any installments based on the lead days to the future.

Rebill Outstanding on Cancelled EFT

Determines if unearned premium will be allowed to be collected on EFT cancelled policies.

False = Outstanding amounts on EFT policies will not be billed.

True = Bill any outstanding amount on a cancelled EFT policy and create a special installment in the future, so the insured's account will be swept for the remaining amount due.

False = Outstanding amounts on EFT policies will not be billed.

Spread At Inception

This determines when an installment amount is spread on EFT "New Business" policies when the effective date of a policy precedes the date of its issuance.

False = Do not spread an installment amount; nothing is spread at new business policy issuance.
True = Spread an installment amount; an installment amount is spread over the remaining installments.

True = Spread an installment amount; an installment amount is spread over the remaining installments.  

Spread Credit on EFT Credit Card Policy Reinstatement

Determines if any credits that are left during a Reinstatement transaction will be spread across future installments or not.

False = If a credit during a Reinstatement is sufficient enough to cover any future installments that are within lead days, or installments that will roll that night, the credit will not spread so it can be applied to those installments when they do roll.

True = Any credits that are left during a Reinstatement transaction will be spread across future installments.

True = Any credits that are left during a Reinstatement transaction will be spread across future installments.

Spread Credit When Next Installment Is Within Lead Days

Used to determine if credit amounts are spread or not on EFT and Credit Card when the installment is within the lead days.

False = Lead days are not considered at all when spreading credits.

True = Only spread credit amounts on EFT or Credit Card when the installment is within lead days.

False = Lead days are not considered at all when spreading credits.

Spread Edit EFT Info Transaction

Used to determine whether or not installments roll and spread within lead days when an EFT Info transaction has been added.

False = No installments will ever roll and spread during the EFT Info transaction.
True = During an EFT Info transaction if there is an installment within lead days, it will roll and spread.

True = During an EFT Info transaction if there is an installment within lead days, it will roll and spread.

Spread With Credit at Inception and Within Lead Days

Used for: "New Business" on EFT policies only. This determines how the system spreads installments and outstanding amounts.

For example, a user enters a new business EFT policy with a 4 Pay Installment Pay Plan with a credit amount applied to the policy. It is effective ten (10) days in the future. The lead days are set to 20. The first installment is set to roll in eight (8) days.

If the system setting is disabled: Because Installment 1 is not set to roll yet (8 days) but it IS within the lead days (20), the system spreads the installment because it does not recognize there is a credit on the policy.

If the system setting is enabled: The system recognizes there is a credit and does not spread the first installment.

False = Disable. The system will spread installments and outstanding amounts at "New Business" issuance on new business EFT policies. The Billing Statement Display screen will show the credit, the "Transaction to Bill in the Future" line then shows the first installment is being spread.
True = The system avoids spreading installments and outstanding amounts at "New Business" issuance. This occurs on "New Business" EFT policies that are ahead of the roll date but are within the lead days so the installment is spread to the future. The Billing Statement Display screen displays only the credit and Installment 1 is not touched (i.e., if the credit on the "New Business" is not enough to cover the 1st installment, an amount is drafted on the roll date of the installment).  

True = Enable.

Validate Routing Number

Validate the bank routing number on the EFT screen (Policy Control screen).

False = Disable; do not validate the EFT bank routing number.
True = Enable; validate the EFT bank routing number.

False = Disable; do not validate the EFT bank routing number.

File

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Different Accounts for EFT Group Setup

This determines if, during EFT Group Setup, this allows a group to use different bank accounts or not in one file.

False = Different bank accounts cannot be used in a group.
True = Different bank accounts can be used in a group. (Special Note:Companies must have a custom EFT file for this to work.)

False = Different bank accounts cannot be used in a group.

Always Allow EFT Commission for Credit

This determines if, during EFT Group Setup, this allows a group to use different bank accounts or not in one file.

False = This does not allow EFT records to be written for commission credit to the agency for EFT File processing even when the overall total for the agency is a debt.
True = This allows EFT records to be written for commission credit to the agency for EFT File processing even when the overall total for the agency is a debt.

False = This does not allow EFT records to be written for commission credit to the agency for EFT File processing even when the overall total for the agency is a debt.

Create Agency Bill Premium EFT Records

Indicates whether or not to create EFT records for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

False = Do not create  EFT records for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

True = Create  EFT records for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

False = Do not create  EFT records for monthly agency bill premiums at end of month.

Create Pre Note ACH File

This determines if a pre notification ACH file is created for EFT Accounts when EFT files are generated.

False = No pre notification file is created.
True = an EFT Pre Note ACH file will be created at the same time a base EFT file is generated. This file can be used to verify EFT accounts that a payment has not occurred against.

False = No pre notification file is created.

Credit Company Record

Determines if an additional entry detail record crediting the company EFT account with all the debits in the EFT file should be included or not.

False = Disable. File does not contain an additional entry detail record.
True = Enable. File contains an additional entry detail record.

False = Disable. File does not contain an additional entry detail record.

Detail Record Leave Discretionary Data Blank

Determines if the EFT Detail record is blank or not when generating an EFT file for export.

False = Disable. The system does not allow the EFT Detail record to be blank.

True = Enable. The system allows the EFT Detail record to be blank.

True = Enable. The system allows the EFT Detail record to be blank.

Entry Detail Credit Records

Determines if an offset company credit record is created for every debit record.

False = Disable; do not create an True = Offset company credit record.
True = Enable; create an offset company credit record.

False = Disable.

Exclude Agency EFT Reversals from File

Determines if reversals of agency payments will be included in the EFT file or not.

False = Disable. Reversals of agency EFT payments will be included in the EFT file.
True = Enable. Reversals of agency EFT payments will not be included in the EFT file.

False = Disable. Reversals of agency EFT payments will be included in the EFT file.

Exclude E-Check Reversals from File

This determines if Reversals of E-Check payments will go or not go into the EFT file.

False = Policy EFT Payments will be allowed to go into the EFT File.

True = The E-Check Reversal payments will not go into the EFT File.

True = The E-Check Reversal payments will not go into the EFT File.

Exclude EFT Refunds from File if Reversed or Voided before Export

Determines if reversals of Agency EFT Payments will go into the EFT file or not.

False = EFT Refunds that are reversed or voided before export will go into the EFT file.
True = EFT Refunds that are reversed or voided before export will go into the EFT file.

False = EFT Refunds that are reversed or voided before export will go into the EFT file

Exclude Policy EFT Reversals from File

This determines if Reversals of Policy EFT payments will go or not into the EFT file.

False = Policy EFT Payments will be allowed to go into the EFT File.

True = The Policy EFT payments will not go into the EFT File.

True = The Policy EFT payments will not go into the EFT File.

Force ASCII Encoding

This determines if this will force the file contents to have an ASCII encoding or not.

False = The file will be in default encoding which could be any encoding that fits the contents of the file (e.g., UTF8, UTF16, and Unicode).

True = This will force the file contents to have an ASCII encoding, which will strip out any characters not present in the ASCII character set.

False = The file will be in default encoding which could be any encoding that fits the contents of the file (e.g., UTF8, UTF16, and Unicode).

Left Justify Alphanumeric Fields

Determines if the alphanumeric fields in the EFT File are left or right justified.

False = The alphanumeric fields are right justified.

True = The alphanumeric fields are left justified.

True = The alphanumeric fields are left justified.

Nine Fill

This setting allows / disallows the bank to have a blocking factor of ten (10). (Note: The file size must be a multiple of 940).

False = Disable; do not use nine fill.
True = Enable; use nine fill.

 False = Disable; do not use nine fill.

Remove Space from Company ID in Batch Control Record

Determines if the system removes the space from the company ID on the batch control record.

False = The system does not remove the space in the Company ID in the batch control record.
True = The system removes the space in the Company ID in the batch control record.

False = The system does not remove the space in the Company ID in the batch control record.

Set Batch Total to Gross Amount

Determines if the gross amount of credits and debits is displayed for an EFT.

False = Disable.

True = Enable. When set to "1," the Batch Total of the EFT file displays the gross amount of the Credits and Debits transmitted. If, for example, the setting is set to "1," and the batch has the following amounts: 100 (Credit), 200 (debit) and 300 (Debit), the Batch Total display equals "600." This is intended for use only when the "Credit Company Record" = True.

False = Disable.

Set Company Name to Bank Name

Determines if the Company Name is replaced with the Bank Name in the Immediate Origin and Company Name fields.

False = The Company Name is not replaced with the Bank Name.
True = The Company Name is replaced with the Bank Name.

True = The Company Name is replaced with the Bank Name.

Strip Spaces in Company Name

In the EFT file, this determines if the company name in the batch header will not have spaces if this is set.

False = The company name in the batch header will have spaces.
True = The company name in the batch header will not have spaces.

False = The company name in the batch header will have spaces.

Use Addenda Format

Determines if an addenda record is attached to every entry detail in the file.

False = Disable; do not attach addenda record.
True = Enable; attach addenda record.

False = Disable; do not attach addenda record.

Use Code in Name or Agency Name for Agency EFT Entry Detail.

(Formerly: Use Code in Name for Agency EFT Entry Detail)

This allows a second option for the EFT file name display for Agency EFT Payments.

0 = vEFT Agency Records Detail will pull the current policy number and last name for the Agency EFT Record.
1 = Pull the agency code, the current policy number and last name.
2 = Pull the agency name.

 

Use Six Characters for Identification Number

Determines if the system uses ABCDEF1 as the Identification Number, where ABCDEF correspond to the first six (6) characters of the Insured's Name with spaces removed. This replaces the policy number.

False = ABCDEF1 will not be used as the ID Number.
True = ABCDEF1 will be used as the ID Number.

True = ABCDEF1 will be used as the ID Number.

Use Upper Case

All characters in the EFT file are in upper case. This applies to customers using the Base EFT Format.

False = Disable.
True = Enable; all characters in upper case.

True = Enable; all characters in upper case.

End of Period

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Agency EFT Commission Debits in File

This allows balances owed to the carrier by the agent to be drafted out of the agent's Agency Commission Debit account.

False = No money will be swept.
True = True = If the this system setting is true, and an agent has a positive balance (owes commissions), then when running Create Direct Bill Commission Statement, a record will be placed into EFT records with a 27 or 37 transaction code, and go out in the nightly file. When the file is processed, the money will be swept out of the agent's Agency Commission Debit EFT account.

False = No money will be swept.

 

Apply Agency Group Adjustments to Primary Agency Commissions

Determines or not if any agency adjustments done to an agency in a group will apply to the commissions of the primary agency.

False = Agency adjustments done to an agency in a group will not apply to the commissions of the primary agency.

True = Any agency adjustments done to an agency in a group will apply to the commissions of the primary agency.

False = Agency adjustments done to an agency in a group will not apply to the commissions of the primary agency.

Automatic Waive Amount

When the Process Automatic Waives is selected in End of Day Processing, the system automatically waives off outstanding credit or debit amounts that are less than or equal to an amount that is specified in this setting. Once a policy has a credit amount waived, users may view the amount waived on the Statement Display screen. The description reads: "Automatic Waived Credit Balance" and the Balance column is equal to "0."

Implementation Specific; user defined.

5

Automatic Waive Policies With Future Installments

This is used to determine how the system automatically waives policies having future installments in End of Day Processing (Process Automatic Waives)

False = Policies with future installments are NOT included in the automatic waive group.
True = Policies with future installments are included in the group being waived (Note: This retains the existing functionality).

True = Policies with future installments are included in the group being waived (Note: This retains the existing functionality).

Billing Invoices and Legals Output File Path

The name of the path where the output file from End of Day processing containing Invoice Reminder and Legal Cancellation Notices are held.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Interfaces\BillingInvoicesLegals

Create Workflow When Collection Waive Amount Exceeds

Determines the minimum amount to trigger a workflow item so that the policy can be reviewed for outside collections.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

500 (Dollars)

Days to Keep Acct Receivable

Determines the number of days to store Billing Account Receivable information in a new table called Billing Acct Receivable Daily. This is only populated when the End of Day Processing option "Write Daily Receivable Totals" executes and the system date is rolled.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Installment Debug Traces

Used to track how much time each piece of installment processing takes.

False = Installment processing is not tracked.
True = Installment processing is tracked.

False = Installment processing is not tracked.

Only Allow Agency EFT Commission Credits in File

Determines or not if only individual Company / State / LOB credit commissions will be included in the EFT file for each agency.

False = Only EFT commission totalling a credit for all Company / State / LOBs for each agency will be included in the file.

True = Only individual Company / State / LOB credit commissions will be included in the EFT file for each agency.

False = Only EFT commission totalling a credit for all Company / State / LOBs for each agency will be included in the file.

Pay Commission On Issued Only

Allows commission to be paid on issued policies only.

False = Disable; do not pay on issued policies only.
True = Enable; pay on issued policies only.

False = Disable; do not pay on issued policies only.

Pay Commission on Overpayment for Paid Premium Commissions

Used to determine if commissions will be paid for overpayments for paid premium commissions.

False = Commissions will not be paid on overpayments for paid premium commissions.
True = Commissions are paid on overpayments for paid premium commissions.

False = Commissions will not be paid on overpayments for paid premium commissions.

Reverse Last Service Charge on Non-Pay Cancellations

This determines if the system reverses the unpaid Service Charge when a policy cancels for non-payment.

False = The Service Charge remains and is not reversed.
True = The system reverses the last unpaid Service Charge when a policy is cancelled for non-payment. When the policy is reinstated with a payment, then the Service Charge is re-assessed.

False = The Service Charge remains and is not reversed.

Use Transaction Date for Commissions

Allows commissions to be based on the Transaction Date vs. the Effective Date

False = The system uses the accounting date, which is the greater of transaction date and effective date. 

True = The system uses the Transaction Date for agency statement and commissions during EOM. (Special Note: If your company chooses s to switch methods, you will need to contact your team as there would be a conversion “catch up” month to transition to the new method.  Changing this also would affect reporting and balancing, i.e. your monthly premium totals would not match the premium reported on the agency statements. )

False = The system uses the accounting date, which is the greater of transaction date and effective date.  

Workflow Queue To Review For Outside Collections

Determines the name of the Workflow Queue that collection items should be sent to.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Hurricane Blackout

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Blackout Workflow Queue

When a hurricane blackout period ends, and a policy under that blackout period has had any catastrophic claim entered with a loss date within the blackout period, a policy diary item is created for the policy.

Implementation Specific.
The system setting assigned here represents the workflow queue id that the diary item will be assigned to. It should represent a workflow queue item in the Workflow Queue table.

2 = Underwriting Exceptions Queue

Disallow Blackout Date Before System Date

Determines if users are allowed to enter a Hurricane Blackout Effective Date if the effective date is less than the system date.

False = Disable. A hurricane blackout can be entered with an effective date before the system date.

True = Enable. When a hurricane blackout period is entered in Diamond Administration, if the effective date is less than the system date, a validation will occur on the Save not allowing the user to enter the hurricane blackout until it has been corrected.

False = Disable.

Load Update Blackout Policies Timeout Value

This is used to set the time out value in seconds for the call to the stored procedure (Admin) Load Update Blackout Policies.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

120 (seconds)

Process Blackout End Date Number of Threads

This sets the time out value in seconds for the call to the stored procedure (Admin) Update Hurricane Blackout Policies.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

120 (seconds)

Send New Legal On Blackout End

Determines when a Legal Notice of Cancellation is created after a hurricane blackout period ends and a policy fell under the hurricane blackout period.

Implementation Specific.
False = When a hurricane blackout period ends, and a policy under that blackout was in Legal Notice of Cancellation during the blackout period, no Legal Notice of Cancellation will occur, and the policy will cancel on the calculated date of: System Date + Legal Notice Days.
True  = When a hurricane blackout period ends, and a policy under that blackout was in Legal Notice of Cancellation during the blackout period, a new Legal Notice of Cancellation will be created and sent before the policy cancels.

False = When a hurricane blackout period ends, and a policy under that blackout was in Legal Notice of Cancellation during the blackout period, no Legal Notice of Cancellation will occur, and the policy will cancel on the calculated date of: System Date + Legal Notice Days.

Update Hurricane Blackout Policies Timeout Value

This is used to set the time out value in seconds for the call to the stored procedure (Admin) Update Hurricane Blackout Policies.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

120 (seconds)

Pay Plan Change

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Automatically Apply Pay Plan Changes To Renewal Underwriting

This determines if the Pay Plan in Policyimage is automatically updated when a Pay Plan Change is done on a policy that has an existing Renewal Underwriting image.

False = Disable.

True = Enable. The payplan on the renewal underwriting image will be automatically updated when a billing transaction Pay Plan Change is done if the Pay Plan selected is valid for the renewal term.

False = Disable.

 

Credit Paid Service Charges On Pay Plan Changes

This determines when paid service charges are credited when a Pay Plan transaction is done.

False = Disable. The paid service charges are not credited.
True = Enable. Credit paid service up to the amount of the service charges being billed on the current version when a Pay Plan Change is done.

False = Disable. The paid service charges are not credited.

Do Not Apply Pay Plan Changes to Paid in Full Renewal Versions

Determines if Pay Plan Changes will be applied or not to Renewal Versions that have been fully billed and paid in full.

False =  Pay Plan Changes will be applied to Renewal Versions that have been fully billed and paid in full.
True = Pay Plan Changes will not apply to Renewal Versions that have been fully billed and paid in full.

False =  Pay Plan Changes will be applied to Renewal Versions that have been fully billed and paid in full.

Freeze Due Date On Pay Plan Change

Determines if the billing invoice due date will remain the same on a Pay Plan Change transaction.

False = Disable. The billing invoice due date will change accordingly on a Pay Plan Change transaction.
True = Enable. The billing invoice due date will remain the same on a Pay Plan Change transaction. It will be the same date that was calculated before the transaction occurred.

False = Disable. The billing invoice due date will change accordingly on a Pay Plan Change transaction.

No Service Charges On Pay Plan Change If Paid

When a Pay Plan Change occurs, this determines how Service Charges will be credited from the older pay plan and billed for the new pay plan on the Renewal Version.

False = When a Pay Plan Change occurs, Service Charges will be credited from the older pay plan and billed for the new pay plan regardless of the Renewal Version's balance.
True = When a Pay Plan Change occurs, if the particular Renewal Version that is being affected has been paid off and there are no future installments, then no Service Charges will be credited from the old pay plan and no Service Charges will be billed for the new pay plan.

False = When a Pay Plan Change occurs, Service Charges will be credited from the older pay plan and billed for the new pay plan regardless of the Renewal Version's balance.

Recharge Installments With EFT Pay Plan Change

Determines how installments are scheduled when changing from an Installment Bill Pay Plan to an EFT Pay Plan.

False = Disable. Any installments that have been billed under the prior Pay Plan will not be backed off and then re-billed according to the existing EFT Pay Plan settings. For example, the existing Pay Plan on a policy is being changed from a 6 Pay - Pay Plan to an EFT Pay Plan. Installments 1, 2 and 3 have already been processed on the 6 Pay - Pay Plan.. When the change is made to an EFT Pay Plan, the deduction day is changed to a day that is later than the effective day of the policy. Installment 3 on the change to EFT could possibly be billed in the future; however, Installment 3 was already billed under the old Pay Plan. The next installment to be billed would then be Installment 4 under the EFT Pay Plan.
True =  Enable. The system will schedule installments to roll per the EFT Pay Plan settings.

True =  Enable. The system will schedule installments to roll per the EFT Pay Plan settings.

Spread Only Billed Amount on Pay Plan Changes

Determines how installments are scheduled when changing from an Installment Bill Pay Plan to an EFT Pay Plan.

False = Any outstanding balance before the pay plan change will be included in the spread for the pay plan change.
True = Any outstanding balance on the policy before the pay plan change occurred will not spread; any premium generated by the pay plan change will spread.

 

Payments

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Agency Apply Payment URL

This determines the name of the external http URL for making payments on Agency Portals. When used, Diamond Web will redirect to this URL instead of displaying the Receipt Control. The system will append a Policy Number query string parameter to the URL.', 200.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://insuresoft.com

Agency EFT Payments - Use Primary Agency of Agent User Making Payments

This determines if the Agency EFT Payments use the agency assigned to the policy OR use the primary agency of the signed on agency user making the payments.

False = Agency EFT Payments use the agency assigned to the policy. True = Agency EFT Payments will use the primary agency of the signed on agency user making the payment.

False = Agency EFT Payments use the agency assigned to the policy.

Allow Agency Bill Receipts

Allows / disallows agency bill cash receipts when selecting the Receipt tab on the Statement Display screen.

 

False = Do not allow agency bill receipts. The system returns a validation: "The system does not allow cash receipts on agency billed policies.

True = Allow agency bill receipts. The system returns the Cash Receipt Entry screen for entry of a payment.

False = Do not allow agency bill receipts. The system returns a validation: "The system does not allow cash receipts on agency billed policies.

Allow Payments on Denied Policies

Determines if payments can or cannot be applied to denied policies.

False = Payments will not be accepted or applied on denied policies.
True = Payments are accepted and can be applied to denied policies.

True = Payments are accepted and can be applied to denied policies.

Canceled Policy Late Payment Reinstate Days

This setting is used for equity term policies. When a user enters a payment either through the Cash Receipts screen or through Batch Cash Entry, the system checks to see if the cash has been applied to a policy with a cancel renewal offer image. If the setting contains a numeric value greater than zero (0), for example "35," then the system rewrites the policy effective on the payment date and the term is adjusted according to the amount of money paid. If the payment is received after the 35 days, then a note is added to the policy indicating the system cannot automatically rewrite this policy. (For no equity term policies). If a policy is canceled for non pay and the system setting is set to something other than  the user defined value the system automatically does a reinstatement with a lapse and creates a pro rata policy that extends from the payment date to the end of the current term.

User defined. This numeric value represents the number of days.
(Note: A user must have the authority "Late Payment of Premium" in the Billing authorities as well.)

0 = Number of Days

Canceled Policy Late Payment Reinstate With Lapse

Determines if agency bill cash receipts are allowed or not when selecting the Receipt tab on the Statement Display screen.

False = Do not allow agency bill cash receipts when selecting the Receipt tab on the Statement Display screen.
True = Allow agency bill cash receipts when selecting the Receipt tab on the Statement Display screen.

False = Do not allow agency bill cash receipts when selecting the Receipt tab on the Statement Display screen.

Check Authority When Posting Manual Payments On Employee Policies

Determines whether or not the "Access Employee Policies" authority in the System group is checked when making a manual payment to an employee policy. 

 

False =  (Disable). The "Access Employee Policies" authority in the System group is not checked.
True = (Enable) When this is set to "True," and providing a user has the authority "Access Employee Policies," (System group) this allows customers to prevent manual payments from being made on employee policies without the authority.

True = (Enable) When this is set to "True," and providing a user has the authority "Access Employee Policies," (System group) this allows customers to prevent manual payments from being made on employee policies without the authority.

Default Cursor to Check Date
(Note: Windows UI only.)

Determines what field the cursor defaults to on the Cash Receipts Control.

False = Default cursor to Amount field.
True = Default cursor to Check Date field.

False = Default cursor to Amount field.

Default Payments To Account Level

(Note: For the Account Bill option.) If a policy is in a billing account, this determines if "Account Payment" check box is automatically checked on the Cash Receipt Entry (Single Entry) and Cash Entry Detail-Policy (Batch Cash Posting) screens.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

0 = False.

Number of Days Ahead to Sweep for CC Renewal Offers

Used to set up the number of days that a Credit Card will sweep Renewal Offers.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

1

Number of Days Ahead to Sweep for EFT Renewal Offers (Note: Formerly called - "Number of Days Ahead to Sweep for Automated Renewal Offers.")

Used to set up the number of days that an EFT will sweep Renewal Offers.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

1

Process Automated Agency Bill Payments

Used to determine if Agency Billed policies are automatically paid off or not.

False = Disable. Agency Bill policies are not automatically paid off.
True = Enable. Agency Bill policies are automatically paid off.  

True = Enable. Agency Bill policies are automatically paid off.

Process Automated Payment When Below Minimum Amount

Used to determine if Diamond processes an EFT / Credit Card / Payroll payment through End of Day Processing when the outstanding amount is less than the minimum invoice amount.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

1 = True.

Process Automated Payroll Deduction Payments

This determines if payroll deductions will be automatically paid off as installments roll during End of Day.

False = Payroll deduction policies will not be paid off.
True = Payroll deduction policies will be paid off automatically as installments roll at End of Day.

False = Payroll deduction policies will not be paid off.

Set Lapse Date to Payment Date +1

This is used to set a lapse date for Renewals or Reinstatements to payment date + 1.

False = The reinstate with a lapse date is payment date (not payment date + 1).

True = The reinstate lapse date for Renewals and Reinstatements is set to payment date + 1.

True = The reinstate lapse date for Renewals and Reinstatements is set to payment date + 1.

Stop Payments When Policy Is Do Not Reinstate

This is used with the Billing Transaction, "Change Do Not Reinstate." It determines if payments made on or after the non-payment cancellation date or policy expiration date are accepted or not.

False = Payments made on or after the non-payment cancellation date or policy expiration date will be accepted on a "Change Do Not Reinstate" Billing Transaction.

True = Payments made on or after the non-payment cancellation date or policy expiration date will not be accepted on a "Change Do Not Reinstate" Billing Transaction

False = Payments made on or after the non-payment cancellation date or policy expiration date will be accepted on a "Change Do Not Reinstate" Billing transaction.

Validate Back Days For Duplicate Payments

This determines the number of days prior to the system date to validate against duplicate payments. (i.e., the range is (System Date - Back Days) to (System Date).

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0 = Number of days.

Validate Payment Source On NSF

This is used to determine if the payment source is validated when an NSF is done.

 

False = The payment source is not validated when an NSF is done.
True = The payment source is validated on an NSF.

False = The payment source is not validated when an NSF is done.

Workflow Queue for Payments that do not meet Automatic Reinstate Requirements

Holds the name of the Workflow Queue where payments that are made on cancelled policies that do not meet the Reinstatement criteria are held.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Automatic Reinstatement Payment Exceptions

Workflow Queue to Review For Payments After Collections Referral

This is the name of the queue that policies having payments applied to AFTER they have been referred to collection are sent to.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Collections Payment Review

Printing

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Generate Print Event for Edit EFT Info on Any Change

Determines if a print event is generated for the Edit EFT Info transaction when any change is made.

False =Do not generate a print event.

True =Generate a print event.

False = Do not generate a print event.  

Print Notices Before Billing Save

This determines if printing is done first when rolling legal notices. (Note: If your company is using the Base Print Solution, this should be set to "0.")

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Suppress Invoice Printing on EFT New Bus and Renewal

Used to determine if an invoice is triggered when there is an amount outstanding on the issuance of an EFT New Business or Renewal policy. (Note: This setting is only considered if the "Spread at Inception" system setting in the Billing folder is set to "False."

False = A New Business or Renewal issuance Invoice Print Event is created.
True = A New Business or Renewal issuance will not create an Invoice Print Event even if there is a balance on the policy. It does create the EFT Setup Form.

False = A New Business or Renewal issuance Invoice Print Event is created.

Suppress Invoice / Statement on RP (Return Premium) Endorsement with No Futures

This is used to determine if EFT / Credit Card statements are suppressed when there are no future installments and a Return Premium Endorsement is done.

False = EFT / Credit Card statements are not suppressed when there are no future installments and a Return Premium Endorsement is done.
True = EFT / Credit Card statements are suppressed when there are no future installments and a Return Premium Endorsement is done.

True = EFT / Credit Card statements are suppressed when there are no future installments and a Return Premium Endorsement is done.

Suppress Invoice / Statement Printing after NSF Adjustment

Determines if Invoices and EFT Statements are suppressed after processing an NSF Adjustment.

False = Invoices and EFT Statements are not suppressed after processing an NSF Adjustment.
True = Invoices and EFT Statements are suppressed after processing an NSF Adjustment.

False = Invoices and EFT Statements are not suppressed after processing an NSF Adjustment.

Suppress Printing On Future Renewals With Balance

Used to determine if billing sends the invoice print event to the implementation print code when nothing is billed on a future renewal but there is a current outstanding balance. When a renewal is issued, and the renewal installment is still in the future, the outstanding balance would trigger the invoice. (This prevents that from happening.)

False = Send the invoice print event.
True = Do not send  the invoice print event.

False = Send the invoice print event.

Suppress Printing On No Bill Endorsement
(Note: Used with Endorsement Option 2 Pay Plans Only!)

Used to determine when an invoice  is triggered when there is an amount outstanding prior to an endorsement.

 

False = Disable. If an amount is outstanding prior to an endorsement, then an invoice is printed.
True = Enable. Suppress printing.

False = Disable. If an amount is outstanding prior to an endorsement, then an invoice is printed.

Suppress Printing When Invoice Amount Less Than Minimum

Determines if invoices will only print when the current outstanding amount is greater than or equal to the pay plan's minimum invoice amount. For example, if the minimum invoice amount is set to zero (0) in Pay Plan Set Up, then invoices will generate whenever the current outstanding amount is greater than zero (0).

False = Do not print
True = Print the invoices

True = Print the invoices

Suppress Statement with no Future Installments

Used to determine if statements should be suppressed when there are no future installments.

False = Statements will not be suppressed when no future installments exist.
True = Statements will be suppressed when no future installments exist.

False = Statements will not be suppressed when no future installments exist.

Refunds

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Refund With Credit Balance

Specific to the Refund Billing transaction. This setting determines if a company wants to allow refunds to be done on policies that do not have a credit balance.

 

False = Disable.
True = Enable; allows refunds to be processed on a policy up to the amount of cash that has been applied even if the policy currently does not have a credit balance.

False = Disable.

Disable Refund Check Number

"Hides" the check number field and text box on the Refund screen when performing the Refund Cash Adjustment.

 

 

False = Enable; allow users to view / enter the refund check number.
True = Disable; prevent users from viewing / entering refund check numbers.

False = Allow users to view / enter the refund check number.

Disable Refund Transaction Mail To

Determines if the Mail To combo box on the Refund Billing Transaction screen is protected.

False = Disable; the Mail To combo box is accessible.

True = Enable; the Mail To combo box is protected.

False = Disable; the Mail To combo box is accessible.

Load Mortgagees Only As Check Payees

Determines if only mortgagees are available for selection when using the Submit Refund to Check Processing billing transaction.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Send Refund To People Soft As EFT

Determines whether or not to display the "Send as EFT Refund" check box on the Adjustment and Billing Transaction Refund forms. When the check box is enabled and selected, the refund is returned via EFT in the People Soft file.

False = Disable; do not display the "Send as EFT Refund" check box on the Adjustment and Billing Transaction Refund forms.
True = Enable; display the "Send as EFT Refund" check box on the Adjustment and Billing Transaction Refund forms.

False = Disable.

Use People Soft With Refunds

For implementations using the 3rd party accounting system PeopleSoft ®. This setting enables / disables the setting of statuses for cash items in billing. PeopleSoft uses these statuses to track refund checks.

True = Enable.
False = Disable.

False = Disable.

 

Transactions

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Accept Renewal Offer - Default accept date for agency (For Agency Web Only!)

This setting allows for an alternate date in the Effective Date field to be shown in the Agency Screen Accept Renewal Offer. It also protects the fields (date field and calendar control) from entry.

False = Retains the current functionality.

True = When set to "True," the new Effective Date will default as:
1. The Expiration Date if the system date < the Expiration Date.
2. System Date + 1 if the system date > = Expiration Date.

Here's an example:

Renewal Eff. Date = 03/10/2016. System / Current Date is 03/09/2016 The default date when accepting the Renewal would be 03/10/2016.
Renewal Eff. Date = 03/10/2013/ System / current date = 03/11/2013. The default date when accepting the Renewal would be 03/12/2016.

False =

CCC ONE

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Appraiser Search Live Web Service Used to determine the path name of the Appraiser Search Live Web Service Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Appraiser Search Test Web Service Used to determine the path name of the Appraiser Search Test Web Service Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined.
 
Blank
 
CCC Enabled Determines if appraisals are allowed to be interfaced with CCC ONE. False = Appraisals are not interfaced with CCC ONE.
True = Appraisals are interfaced with CCC ONE.
Appraisals are not interfaced with CCC ONE.
CCC Inbound Services Enabled Used to indicate if inbound communication to Diamond hosted CCC Services is allowed or not. False = Inbound communication to Diamond hosted services is not allowed.
True = Inbound communication to Diamond hosted services is allowed.
True = Inbound communication to Diamond hosted services is allowed.
Document & Image Triggers Workflow Item Used to determine if a workflow task is generated or not to the claim’s inside adjuster when a Document Image Transmission is received. False = A workflow task is not generated to the claim's inside adjuster when a Document Image Transmission is received.
True = A workflow task is generated to the claim's inside adjuster when a Document Image Transmission is received.
False = A workflow task is not generated to the claim's inside adjuster when a Document Image Transmission is received.
Estimate Triggers Workflow Item Determines if a workflow item task is generated or not to the claim’s inside adjuster when an Estimate Transmission is received. False = A workflow task is not generated to the claim's inside adjuster when an Estimate Transmission is received.
True = A workflow task is generated to the claim's inside adjuster when an Estimate Transmission is received.
False = A workflow task is not generated to the claim's inside adjuster when an Estimate Transmission is received.
External Assignment Live Web Service Determines the path name of the External Assignment Live Web Service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
External Assignment Test Web Service Determines the path name of the External Assignment Test Web Service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Web Service Login Used to determine the login to the “Live” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Web Service Password Used to determine the password to the “Live” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Domain The Domain to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.   Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Host The name of the Proxy Host in the CCC ONE Live Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Port CCC ONE Live Environment port number. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Proxy User Name The User Name to be used with the authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy User Password The User Password to be used with the authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Testing Determines if whether to use the Test System Settings instead of the “Live” system settings. False = The Testing system settings are used.
True = The Testing system settings are not used.
False = The Testing system settings are used.
Test Web Service Login Used to determine the login to the Test Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Test Web Service Password Used to determine the password to the Test Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank

Checks

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Add System Date Time to Export File Name

Determines if the system date / time is added to the check export file name to prevent previous check exports from being overwritten.

False = The system date / time is not added to the check export file name.
True = Always add the system date / time to the check export file name to prevent previous check exports from being overwritten.

True = Always add the system date / time to the check export file name to prevent previous check exports from being overwritten.

Allow Printed Exported Imported Check Deletion

Determines if any printed, exported or imported Return Premium, Claims, Commission and Suspense Account check can be deleted in Check Processing. 

False = Any printed, exported or imported Return Premium, Claims, Commission and Suspense Account check cannot be deleted in Check Processing.

True = Enable. Any printed, exported or imported Return Premium, Claims, Commission and Suspense Account check can be deleted in Check Processing.

False = Disable.

Allow Renumber After Export

This determines if checks can be renumbered after they have been exported for printing.

False = Disable. The system does not allow a user to renumber any of the check types after they have been exported for printing.
True = Enable. this allows any of the check types (i.e., Return Premium, Agency Commission or Claims) to be renumbered after they have been exported to printing but not posted (updated). The system does not present the hard error that prevents a user from renumbering the checks.

False = Disable.

 

CSV Export Directory

Determines the name of the CVS Export directory.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Custom Cleared Check Import

This determines if implementations can create their own custom cleared check import to clear checks or use the Base System Cleared Check function.

False = Disable. When the Cleared Check Import is used, the import will use the Base code that processes the XML file.
True = Enable. When the Cleared Check Import is used, the import will make a call to DiamBusBillingXX.dll to the interface IRoCheckProcess_ Get And Process Positive Pay Import Data. This allows the custom cleared import.

False = Disable.

Export Positive Pay File After Post

Determines when a Positive Pay file is created: At the time the checks are posted or when they are exported.

False = Disable; creation of the Positive pay file occurs at the time the checks are exported.

True = Enable; creation of the Positive Pay file occurs at the time the checks are posted.

False = Disable.

Positive Pay Directory

Used for the Positive Pay Export functionality. This is the destination folder where all positive pay files are placed. All positive pay export and positive pay exception files are generated and placed in this folder.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Send Automatic Refunds To Premium Finance Company

This is used to determine whether or not automatic return premium checks are sent to the premium finance company listed on the policy.

False0 = Disable. Do not send automatic return premium checks to the premium finance company listed on the policy.
True = Enable. Send automatic return premium checks to the premium finance company listed on the policy.

False = Disable. Do not send automatic return premium checks to the premium finance company listed on the policy.

Use Agency Group Address For Commissions

For agencies that are set up under an agency group, any commission checks can now be mailed to the agency group address. Determines if the commission checks are sent to the agency's group address or the agency itself.

False = Disable; checks will be sent to the agency's address not an agency group address.
True = Enable; an agency is in an agency group. Send any agency commission checks processed for that agency to the agency group address.

False = Disable.

 

Use And Instead Of And / Or

Determines the wording between two (2) Pay To's on a Return Premium Check.

False = When this is set to "0," and a user processes a Submit Refund to Check Processing transaction to submit a check having two (2) policyholder names, the Pay To for the check will have "and / or" between the names.
True = When this is set to "1," and a user processes a Submit Refund to Check Processing transaction to submit a check having two (2) policyholder names, the Pay To for the check will have only the word "and" between the names.

False = Use "and / or."

Use Company Void Check Export

Used to determine if Diamond will export Void Checks to a company specific format in addition to the Base XML format.

False = Diamond will export Void Checks to a company specific format in addition to the Base XML format.

True = Diamond will export Void Checks to a company specific format in addition to the Base XML format.  

False = Diamond will export Void Checks to a company specific format in addition to the Base XML format.

Use DBA Name for Commissions

Used to determine if printed Commission checks will have the Pay To set to the DBA name of the agent.

False = Do not use the “Doing Business As” name in Agency Setup as the Pay To for Commission Checks.

True = Use the “Doing Business As” name in Agency Setup as the Pay To for Commission Checks.

False = Do not use the “Doing Business As” name in Agency Setup as the Pay To for Commission Checks.

Validate Check Number on Manual Refunds

This is used to determine if the  check number entered on a manual billing adjustment refund will be validated to make sure that it has not already been used. If the check number has previously been used, then an error will be returned and the refund will not be allowed to go through.

Implementation Specific.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Void Check Export Directory

Name of the path that holds file for checks that are voided for the GL Interface.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\DiamondPaths\Checks

Write Company Export XML File

Determines if your company is using the Base System Check Export or your implementation's Check Export.

False = Use Base System Check Export.
True = Use Implementation (Custom) Check Export.

False = Use Base System Check Export.

Choice Point

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Update on In Force Image

If there is an existing violation / loss record and any updates have occurred since the last Credit, CLUE Auto, Property or MVR was ordered, this determines if records will be updated with the new information.

False = Disable. Credit, CLUE and MVR information will not be updated on "Active" and "Future" images. If the loss / violation has been deleted, it will remain deleted.
True = Enable. If there is an existing violation / loss record and any updates have occurred since the last Credit, CLUE Auto, Property or MVR was ordered, those records will be updated with the new information. Additionally, if an amount has changed on a violation, it will be updated to reflect the new amount. When an accident / loss has been deleted and the report is re-run, this will re-add the deleted accident  / loss to the report. For Credit Reports, the score and description are updated. (Note: Any "manually" overridden values within an accident / loss will not be updated.)

True = Enable.

Always Mask Report Fields

Determines if the system will always mask the SSN, DLN and DOB fields when viewing any Choice Point report regardless of the authorities.

False = Disable. The system will not mask the SSN, DLN and DOB fields when viewing any Choice Point report regardless of the authorities.
True = Enable. The system will always mask the SSN, DLN and DOB fields when viewing any Choice Point report regardless of the authorities.

False = Disable. The system will not mask the SSN, DLN and DOB fields when viewing any Choice Point report regardless of the authorities.

Batch Record Count

Used to determine when a batch process will be sent to Choice Point.

User defined.

 

10 = After the 10th submission, send the batch to Choice Point for processing. (Note: If there are any submissions left over at the end of the day, there are processes in the End of Day Program that can be executed to send the remaining submissions.)

Choice Point Data Fill

Determines if Choice Point Data Fill is activated by clicking the existing Data Fill button at the top of the Policy Control screen. Users may then select the type of test data they wish (e.g., MVR, NCF, Clue Auto and Clue Property) from the options presented on the screen. If users have already pre-filled the Policy Control and Policy Detail screens with test information using the Data Fill button, the test information pre-filled for Choice Point will be different, because this information is provided by Choice Point and is held in a separate database within Diamond.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Choice Point Loss Summary

Determines the way to categorize the importing of losses by the claim they appear on not by the type of loss.

False = Disable.
True = Enable. This allows users to categorize the importing of losses by the claim they appear on not by the type of loss. For example, there is a CLUE report that has three (3) claims, each with three (3) different types of losses on them. The system then creates nine (9) new loss history records, one (1) for each type of loss. If the "Choice Point Loss Summary" setting is turned on (Enabled), instead of nine (9) different records being created, only three (3) are created. Their descriptions are concatenated, and their amounts are summed.

False = Disable.

CLUE Product Display

Determines if CLUE is available for ordering and is shown on the Third Party Reports screen.

False = Disable; not available to order. Do not display on the Order Third Party Reports screen.
True = Enable; available to order. Display on the Third Party Reports screen.

True = Enable.

CLUE Report File Path

Determines the location of where the generated CLUE file in (Diamond Processes) Create CLUE Report will be saved.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\ClueReport

Commercial Auto Prefill Require Remarks

Used to determine if remarks are required for all un-imported vehicles from the Commercial Auto Data Prefill screen.

False = Remarks are not required
True = Remarks are required.

False = Remarks are not required.

Copy Imported Data to Additional Images for Batch Clue Auto

Determines if imported data for Batch Clue Ordering for Batch Clue Auto is copied to additional images such as Pending, Renewal Underwriting, Future and / or Quotes.

True = Imported data from Batch Order is copied for Batch Clue Auto to additional images for each report type.
False = Imported data is not copied.

False = Imported data is not copied.

Copy Imported Data to Additional Images for Batch Clue Property

Determines if imported data for Batch Clue Ordering for Batch Clue Property is copied to additional images such as Pending, Renewal Underwriting, Future and / or Quotes.

True = Imported data from Batch Order is copied for Batch Clue Property to additional images for each report type.
False = Imported data is not copied.

False = Imported data is not copied.

Copy Imported Data to Additional Images for Batch MVR

Determines if imported data for Batch Clue Ordering for Batch Clue MVR is copied to additional images such as Pending, Renewal Underwriting, Future and / or Quotes.

True = Imported data from Batch Order is copied for Batch Clue MVR to additional images for each report type.
False = Imported data is not copied.

False = Imported data is not copied.

Copy Imported Data to Additional Images for Batch NCF

Determines if imported data for Batch Clue Ordering for Batch NCF is copied to additional images such as Pending, Renewal Underwriting, Future and / or Quotes.

True = Imported data from Batch Order is copied for Batch NCF to additional images for each report type.
False = Imported data is not copied.

False = Imported data is not copied.

Credit Report Product Display

Determines if Credit Report is available for ordering and is shown on the Third Party Reports screen.

False = Disable; not available to order. Do not display on the Order Third Party Reports screen.
True = Enable; available to order. Display on the Third Party Reports screen.

True = Enable.

Credit Score Rules

Determines if a company has Credit Score Rules set up with Choice Point.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Default License Date Auto Data Prefill

Used to determine if the license date should be defaulted if not returned from Auto Data Prefill.

False = If a driver's license date is not returned, the user must manually enter the driver's license date for each of the imported drivers.

True = If the driver's license date is not returned with the Auto Data Prefill, the date is calculated based on the state's license age and the driver's date of birth.

False =  False = If a driver's license date is not returned, the user must manually enter the driver's license date for each of the imported drivers.

Display Auto Data Pre-Fill

Determines whether SAQ (Solutions at Quote) or Auto Data Pre-fill is available in the Diamond System (Policy Detail Screen-Personal Auto).

False = The option for using Solutions at Quote is displayed on the Policy Detail screen - Personal Auto.
True = The option for using Auto Data Pre-fill is displayed on the Policy Detail Screen - Personal Auto.  

False = The option for using Solutions at Quote is displayed on the Policy Detail screen - Personal Auto.

Display Credit Score on 3rd Party Screen

Determines if a Credit Score is displayed on the Choice Point Results screen.

False  = Disable. Do not show the Credit Score on the Choice Point Results screen.

True =Enable. Show the Credit Score on the Choice Point Results screen.

False  = Disable. Do not show the Credit Score on the Choice Point Results screen.

Do Not Update Loss History Driver Assignment with CLUE Auto

When importing Loss History from CLUE, the system will look at this setting to determine if the driver assignment should be updated.

False = The driver assignment on the loss will be updated regardless if it has been assigned to a driver previously.

True = When a driver has already been assigned to the loss, then the system will not update the driver on the loss. This will prevent the driver assignment from changing on an existing loss on subsequent orders if a driver has already been assigned.

False = The driver assignment on the loss will be updated regardless if it has been assigned to a driver previously.

Email Notification

This is used to determine if an email is sent when the Choice Point NCF information is sent when processing of the file starts and completes using the End of Day / Email Notification / SMTP.

False = Disable; do not send an email.   
True = Use the email information set in End Of Day /  Email Notification / SMTP to send emails when the Choice Point NCF information is sent and when processing of the file has started and completed.

False = Disable; do not send an email.  

Enable Port Access

Enables a user to connect to Choice Point through VPN or Frame Relay.

False = Disable; do not connect to Choice Point through VPN or Frame Relay
True = Enable; connect to Choice Point through VPN or Frame Relay.

True = Enable; connect to Choice Point through VPN or Frame Relay (Base System Only).

Environment

Environment in which Choice Point runs.

Test = Test Environment
Production = Live Environment

(For transmission testing purposes, set to: Test. For "live" transmission of data, set to: Production.)

Test

Filter Imported Type of Losses for CLUE Auto

Determines if only the loss records from the CLUE Auto report that match records in the Choice Point Claim Type Codes table will be imported.

False = Disable. The current functionality is used.
True = Enable. this will cause only the loss records from the CLUE Auto report that match records in the Choice Point Claim Type Codes table to be imported. Be aware that if there are no records in that table and the setting is enabled, then NO loss records from CLUE Auto will be imported into the policy. Matches are made based using the Code field.

False = Disable.

Filter Imported Type of Losses for Clue Property

Determines if only the loss records from the CLUE Property report that match records in the Choice Point Claim Type Codes table will be imported.

False = Disable. The current functionality is used.
True = Enable. this will cause only the loss records from the CLUE Property report that match records in the Choice Point Claim Type Codes table to be imported. Be aware that if there are no records in that table and the setting is enabled, then NO loss records from CLUE Property will be imported into the policy. Matches are made based using the Code field.

False = Disable. The current functionality is used

Fix Loss History Link Records During Save

Determines if additional logic should be done to prevent potential duplication of link records during the Loss History "Save."

False = No additional logic is used.

True = Additional logic is done to prevent potential duplication of link records during the Loss History "Save."

False = No additional logic is used.

Import Possible Related Claims with CLUE Auto

Allows or disallows the importing of PRCs (Possible Related Claims) on Clue Auto reports.

False = PRCs are not imported.
True = PRCs (Possible Related Claims) are imported with CLUE Auto Reports.

False = PRCs are not imported.

Limit CLUE Auto Report By Driver

This determines how the CLUE Auto Report is ordered for drivers.

False = Order the report for all drivers.
True = Only order the report for the drivers selected on the UI.

False = Order the report for all drivers.

Max Drivers for Interactive CLUE Auto

Determines if the system will order in batch if the number of drivers is over the maximum number of drivers.

0 = The system will not check the number of drivers.
1 = The system will order in batch if the number of drivers is over the maximum number of drivers. 

0 = The system will not check the number of drivers.

Max Subjects for Batch CLUE Auto

Used to define the maximum number of combined drivers and vehicles that are allowed for a single Batch Clue Auto order.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

50

Max Vehicles for Interactive CLUE Auto

Determines if the system will order in batch if the number of vehicles is over the maximum number of vehicles.

0 = The system will not check the number of vehicles.
1 = The system will order in batch if the number of vehicles is over the maximum number of vehicles.

0 = The system will not check the number of vehicles.

Min Days Since MVR to Allow Reorder at Renewal

This determines the number of days prior to the Policy Term Expiration Date. If an MVR was ordered for a driver during that period, a new one will NOT be ordered for the driver at Renewal.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

MVR Product Display

Determines if MVR is available for ordering and is shown on the Third Party Reports screen.

False = Disable; not available to order. Do not display on the Order Third Party Reports screen.
True = Enable; available to order. Display on the Third Party Reports screen.

True = Enable.

MVR Use PH for Applicant

When ordering an MVR on an Umbrella policy, this determines if Policyholder information is used instead of Applicant information when Applicant information is missing.

False = Disable. The system will return a validation that the Applicant information needs to be entered.
True = Enable. Use the Policyholder information for ordering an MVR if the Applicant information is missing on an Umbrella policy.

False = Disable. The system will return a validation that the Applicant information needs to be entered.

NCFInteractive Only

Not currently functional

Do not use.

 0 = Do not use.

Only Match Losses to Vehicle Operator

For CLUE Auto, only match losses to drivers using the vehicle operator name identified by Choice Point in the loss.

False = The system will not use the vehicle operator included in the Lexis Nexis loss when matching to a driver during the loss import into Diamond.

True =  The system will always use the vehicle operator included in the Lexis Nexis loss when matching to a driver during the loss import into Diamond.

False = The system will not use the vehicle operator included in the Lexis Nexis loss when matching to a driver during the loss import into Diamond.

Process Batch Immediately

Determines if users can access the Process Received Batch screen in Diamond Processes.

False = Disable; do not allow access to the Process Received Batch.
True = Enable; allow access to the Process Received Batch screen in Diamond Processes.

True = Enable; allow access to the Process Received Batch screen in Diamond Processes.

Reorder CLUE Auto in Batch

Used with the functionality to reorder automatically when Clue Auto errors with certain errors during "Interactive" processing. Determines if the system will reorder Clue Auto if specified error in interactive. 

False = The system will not reorder Clue Auto in interactive.
True = The system will reorder Clue Auto if specified error in interactive.

False =  = The system will not reorder Clue Auto in interactive.

Reorder CLUE Property in Batch

Used with the functionality to reorder automatically when Clue Property errors with certain errors during "Interactive" processing. Determines if the system will reorder Clue Property if specified error in interactive. 

False = The system will not reorder Clue Property in interactive.
True = The system will reorder Clue Property if specified error in interactive.

False = The system will not reorder Clue Property in interactive.

Reorder MVR in Batch

Used with the functionality to reorder automatically when MVR errors with certain errors during "Interactive" processing. Determines if the system will reorder MVR if specified error in interactive.  

False = The system will not reorder MVR in interactive.
True = The system will reorder MVR if specified error in interactive.

False = The system will not reorder MVR in interactive.

Report File Path

Name of the path where the Report file resides

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\

Reverse Batch Processing

Allows users to view and access the Process Batch Received screen. Also, displays the Reverse Processing button on the screen for use.

False = Disable; do not display the Reverse Batch Processing button on the Process Batch Received screen.
True = Enable; display the Reverse Batch Processing button on the Process Batch Received screen.

False = Disable; do not display the Reverse Batch Processing button on the Process Batch Received screen.

Show Full NCF Report

Determines if a Credit Report with all additional financial data returned from Choice Point will be shown in Diamond.

False = Disable; only display the original report.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Split Order for Batch CLUE Auto

If the maximum combined drivers or vehicles are reached, this is used to determine if the Clue Auto Batch Request is split into smaller orders or not.

False = Interactive Order is used regardless if the maximum number of drivers or vehicles are reached.
True = If the maximum drivers or vehicles are reached, then the Clue Auto Batch Request is split into smaller orders.

False = Interactive Order is used regardless if the maximum number of drivers or vehicles are reached.

Split Order for Interactive CLUE Auto

Determines if the Clue Auto Batch Request is split into smaller orders if the maximum combined drivers or vehicles are reached.

False = The Clue Auto Batch Request is not split into smaller orders when the maximum combined drivers or vehicles are reached. (Special Note: If this is set to "False," the "Submit Batch CLUE Auto Order for Excess Subjects should be set to "True."
True = If the maximum combined drivers or vehicles are reached, then the Clue Auto Batch Request is split into smaller orders.

False = The Clue Auto Batch Request is not split into smaller orders when the maximum combined drivers or vehicles are reached.  

Submit Batch CLUE Auto Order for Excess Subjects

Determines when the order is done in batch instead of interactive if the maximum drivers or vehicles is reached.

False = Interactive Order is used regardless if the maximum number of drivers or vehicles are reached.
True = If the maximum drivers or vehicles are reached, Batch Order is used instead of Interactive.

False = Interactive Order is used regardless if the maximum number of drivers or vehicles are reached.

Unmask Credit Score

Determines how credit scores are stored in the Diamond database CreditScore table. (Note: In order to run reports against the raw credit score, the score will either need to be unmasked OR the report will need the ability to decode the score.)

False = Store the credit score in the Diamond database (CreditScore table) in its masked or encoded format.

True = Store the credit score in its raw or unmasked format.

False = Store the credit score in the Diamond database (CreditScore table) in its masked or encoded format.

Use Agency Account Info

This is used to determine how MVR and CLUE Auto report information is passed from the agency to Choice Point: By   Agency Account Number and Suffix or by the Choice Point Account first and then the system settings.

False = The system pulls the information from the Choice Point Account first and then the system settings.
True = MVR and CLUE ordering will pass the Agency Number and Suffix information from Agency Setup to Choice Point.

False = The system pulls the information from the Choice Point Account first and then the system settings.

Use Conviction Date If Exists For Acc Viol

Implementation Specific. Determines if the system uses the conviction date instead of the violation date when returning information for rating purposes.

Implementation Specific.
False.
True

 

False = Disable; do not use conviction date instead of violation date.

 

Use Multiple MVR Ports

Allows your company to order MVR Requests with a different port other than the 3rd Party Requests.

False = Disable.
True = Enable. Special Note! If this setting is enabled, your company must be authorized to use multiple ports from Choice Point!

False = Disable.

Use Policy Holder Address for Credit

This controls the address the system looks at when ordering a Credit Score.

False = The system looks at the garage address.
True = The System looks at the policy holder address first. If the policy holder's address is a PO Box, the system then uses the garage address.

False = The system looks at the garage address.

Use Policy Holder Address for Property Credit

This controls what address the system looks at for ordering property credit score.

False = The system uses the location address (if there is one). If a location does not exist, the system uses the watercraft address. If the watercraft address does not exist, the system will then use the policyholder address.
True = Use the policyholder address for all orders.

False = The system uses the location address (if there is one). If a location does not exist, the system uses the watercraft address. If the watercraft address does not exist, the system will then use the policyholder address.

View Reports for Client

Determines if the Choice Point Reports tab is displayed on the Client Information screen; can be used for testing the transmission of reports from Choice Point at the Client level.

False = Disable. Do not display the Choice Point Reports tab on the Client Information screen.
True = Enable. This displays the "Choice Point Reports" tab, which is used for testing reports transmitted from Choice Point at the Client level.

False = Disable.

Batch

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

IP Address

IP address used for transmissions for batch ordering.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

66.241.41.236

Credit Score Unique Identifiers

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Credit Score

Used to store the identifier signifying the start of the Credit Score in the NR52 record of the Credit Report. Defaults blank.

Implementation Specific. Set only if the "Credit Score Rules" is set to "1" (Enable) in the Choice Point folder.

Defaults blank.

Credit Score Dscr

Used to store the identifier signifying the start of the Credit Score description in the NR52 record of the Credit Report.

Implementation Specific. Set only if the "Credit Score Rules" is set to "1" (Enable) in the Choice Point folder.

Defaults blank.

 

Credit Score Reason

Used to store the identifier signifying the start of the Credit Score reasons in the NR52 record of the Credit Report.

Implementation Specific. Set only if the "Credit Score Rules" is set to "1" (Enable) in the Choice Point folder.

Defaults blank.

 

Listener: Contains information that the New Choicepoint Listener (the service that looks into the database for batch Choicepoint orders) when there are enough of them as designated by the client companies.

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Poll Interval

The length of time it should wait between calls to the Diamond code that checks the number of batch orders.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

300000 (All Companies)

Production Port

Name of port used for "live" transmissions.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

10220

Test Port

Name of port used for test transmissions.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

10222

MVR Header Settings

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Amplified MVR Bit

7 Year - 1
3 Year - 0

Implementation Specific.
0 = 3 Year.
1 = 7 Year.

0 = 3 Year

Forced DMV Bit

This determines whether the request should override standard procedure and force the request to go to the State DMV.

Implementation Specific.
0 = False. Do not force DMV Request.
1 = True. Force DMV Request.

0 = False (All Companies).

Soundexing Bit

Using the information your company provides, Choice Point will attempt to generate a valid driver’s license number for the states of Illinois, Maryland, Michigan and Florida using the rules for the state.

Implementation Specific.
0 = False.
1 = True.

0 = False (All Companies).

Activity File Bit:
This folder is used to specify the states number of years to search for data. Companies should discuss this with their Choice Point representatives. States listed below are Diamond Base System.

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

California

***

Implementation Specific.
0 = False.
1 = True.

0 = False (All Companies).

South Carolina

***

Implementation Specific.
0 = False.
1 = True.

0 = False (All Companies).

Type MVR Code:
This folder is also used to specify the states number of years to search for data. Companies should discuss this with their Choice Point representatives. States listed below are Diamond Base System.

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

AZ
(Arizona)

5 Years - 0
39 Months - 1

Implementation Specific.
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

0 = Disable.

AR
(Arkansas)

Regular MVR - 2
Commercial MVR - 3

Implementation Specific.
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

1 = Enable.

GA
(Georgia)

Employment - 4
Insurance - 5

Implementation Specific.
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

0 = Disable.

OR
(Oregon)

Court - 6
Driver - 7

Employment - 8

Implementation Specific.
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

0 = Disable.

PA
(Pennsylvania)

Employment - 9
Regular - 10

Implementation Specific.
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

0 = Disable.

VA
(Virginia)

Insurance - 11

Employment - 12

Implementation Specific.
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

1 = Enable.

 

WA
(Washington)

Non-Commercial - 13
Employment - 14
Commercial - 15

Implementation Specific.
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

0 = Disable.

NCF Batch

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Display Interval

Determines the display interval process.

Implementation specific; user defined.

0

Max Auto Records For Request

Determines the maximum size of the batch request. (Auto)

Implementation specific; user defined. Note: A setting of "0" will set all newly inserted transmission records to a "Pending" status so that the Choice Point service will process them.

0

Max Auto Records To Process

Determines number of Auto records to process from the Choice Point NCF Batch table.

Implementation specific; user defined. Note: If this is set to "0," then all records in the Choice Point NCF Batch table will be processed.

1000

Max Home Records For Request

Determines the maximum size of the batch request. (Home)

Implementation specific; user defined. Note: A setting of "0" will set all newly inserted transmission records to a "Pending" status so that the Choice Point service will process them.

0

Max Home Records To Process

Determines number of Homeowner's records to process from the Choice Point NCF Batch table.

Implementation specific; user defined. Note: If this is set to "0," then all records in the Choice Point NCF Batch table will be processed.

10000

Min Records For Request

Determines the minimum size of the batch request.

Implementation specific; user defined. Note: A setting of "0" will set all newly inserted transmission records to a "Pending" status so that the Choice Point service will process them.

7000

Number Of Threads

Determines the number of threads to be used.

Implementation specific; user defined.

1

Pre Process Stored Procedure Name

The name of the company specific stored procedure used to populate the Choice Point NCF Batch table.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

On Line

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

IP Address

This is the IP address used for transmissions for on line ordering.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

66.241.236

 

Report Type:
This folder is used to specify the types of reports being requested from Choice Point. Companies should discuss this with their Choice Point representatives.

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Clue Auto ADD

This requests the Clue Property and Real Property Report.

Implementation Specific.

3 (Base System Only)

Clue Auto - Non ADD

This requests the Real Property Only Report.

Implementation Specific.

0

Clue Property

This requests the Current Carrier Clue Property Only Report.

Implementation Specific.

0

Credit

This requests the Individual Credit Report.

Implementation Specific.

0

SAQ

Used with MVR ordering. This determines how the Choice Point SAQ (Solutions-at-Quote) functionality orders information: With or Without Current Carrier. 

0 = Order Solutions at Quote without Current Carrier
1 = Order Solutions at Quote with Current Carrier (Note: This option is not currently supported.)

0

Report Usage:
The fields in this folder are used to contain what the intended usage of the requested report will be. Companies should discuss this with their Choice Point representatives.

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Clue Auto

Determines how the report will be used.

Implementation Specific.

0 (Personal Auto Underwriting)

Clue Property

Determines how the report will be used.

Implementation Specific.

0 (Home Underwriting)

Credit - Auto

Determines how the report will be used.

Implementation Specific.

0 (Personal Auto Underwriting)

Credit - Home

Determines how the report will be used.

Implementation Specific.

2 (Underwriting)

SAQ (Solutions-At-Quote)

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Match Policyholder Marital Status

This determines if the Marital Status of the policyholder should match or not when it is sent and returned from Choice Point.

False = The Marital Status returned from Choice Point is the one on record (e.g., not necessarily the same as the one passed in.)
True = The Marital status returned will be the same as the one that was transmitted.

False = The Marital Status returned from Choice Point is the one on record (e.g., not necessarily the same as the one passed in.)

Claims

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Representative New Add and View

This allows the Check box to the Claimant Screen and New Representative Box to appear and be utilized.

False =  The check box to the Claimant Screen and New Representative Box are not displayed.
True = The Check box to the Claimant Screen and New Representative Box to appear and can be utilized.

True = The Check box to the Claimant Screen and New Representative Box to appear and can be utilized.

Allow Claim Detail on Agency Web

Determines if Claim Detail is enabled on the Agency Web.

False = Claim Detail is not enabled on the Agency Web.

True = Claim Detail is enabled on the Agency Web

False = Claim Detail is not enabled on the Agency Web.

Allow External Policies

Allow External Policies; to be used for internal testing of "de-coupling" claims by Insuresoft personnel.

False = Disable; Claims De-Coupling not in use.
True = Enable; turn Claims de-coupling on. When "Allow External Policies" AND "Data Fill" are both set to "1," a check box, Use Policy XML for Test, is displayed on the New Claim Occurrence screen. When this is selected, an XML is automatically generated for the policy used for a claim.

False = Disable.

 

Allow Only One Tracking Type

When used with the existing system setting, “Automatically Assign Claims” (Claims / Automatic Assignment folder), this determines if only one Tracking Type is allowed to be selected on the Loss Notice or Claim Detail.

False = Allows more than one (1) Tracking Type to be selected.
True = The system allows one (1) Tracking Type to be selected within the claim.

False = Allows more than one (1) Tracking Type to be selected.

Allow Shell Policies

Allows users to enter a claim on a shell policy (policies that do not exist within Diamond).

False = Claims are not allowed on shell policies.

True = Claims can be entered on shell policies.

True = Claims can be entered on shell policies.

Claims Enabled

Determines if the Claim System is being used or not.

False = Claim System not being used.
True = Claim System active / in use.

True = The Claim System active.

External Lookup Service

Determines the external policy lookup Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

.http://localhost/DiamondServices/DCLookupService.svc

External Policy Service

Determines the location where the External Policy Service is located.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://localhost/DCPolicyWcfService/DCPolicyService.svc

External Task Service

Name of the address of the service used to generate tasks for an external system.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://localhost/DCTaskWcfService/DCTaskService.svc

Name of Claims Deny Functionality

Determines the name of the Deny function in the Claims System.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Deny

Notify Underwriting on Clearance

Determines if a task to Notify Underwriting is created when a coverage issue is cleared.

False = No task is created.
True = A task is created to Notify Underwriting when a coverage issue is cleared.

True = A task is created to Notify Underwriting when a coverage issue is cleared.

Notify Underwriting on Denial

Determines if a task to Notify Underwriting is created when a claim or a feature / coverage is denied.

False = No task is created.
True = A task is created to Notify Underwriting when a claim or feature / coverage is denied.

True = A task is created to Notify Underwriting when a claim or feature / coverage is denied.

Performance Validation Disable (Note: This setting is in C0 only.)

This disables certain validations that should not be used in Claims performance testing.

False = Enable.
True = Disable.

False = Enable.

Require Policy Verification

System requires policy verification for claims before allowing features / coverages to be added.

False = The system does not require policy verification for claims before allowing features / coverages to be added.

True = The system requires policy verification for claims before allowing features / coverages to be added.

False = The system does not require policy verification for claims before allowing features / coverages to be added.

Select Policy System

Displays a policy system combo box on a new claim occurrence the user can select when accessing an external policy system.

False = The combo box is not displayed.
True = Display a combo box.

False = The combo box is not displayed.

Show Bill Method for Claims

Determines if the “Bill Method” combo appears when creating the First Notice of Loss for a Shell Claim.

False = The “Bill Method” combo is not shown when creating the First Notice of Loss for a Shell Claim.

True = The “Bill Method” combo is displayed when creating the First Notice of Loss for a Shell Claim.

False = The “Bill Method” combo is not shown when creating the First Notice of Loss for a Shell Claim.

Show Claim Provider on Agency

Determines whether Claim Providers will be associated with agencies and displayed as the listed people when selecting claimants.

False = Claim Providers will not be associated with agencies and displayed as the listed people when selecting claimants.
True = Claim Providers will be associated with agencies and displayed as the listed people when selecting claimants.

False = Claim Providers will not be associated with agencies and displayed as the listed people when selecting claimants.

Show Print History in Quick Links

This determines if the Print History link is displayed in the Claims Tree View Quick links section on the Web.

False = The Print History link is not displayed in the Quick Links section of the Claims Tree View.
True =The Print History link is displayed in the Quick Links section of the Claims Tree View.

True =The Print History link is displayed in the Quick Links section of the Claims Tree View.

SIU Workflow Queue

This is the Workflow queue id to send SIU Diary items.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Update External Agency

This is used to determine if an existing agency should be automatically updated with agency information from the external policy.

False = No update is done.

True = The existing agency is automatically updated with agency information from the external policy.

False = No update is done.

Use External Lookup Service

Determines if this hides certain non-Claims related items on the Advanced Lookup screen.

False = Do not hide non-Claims related items.

True = Hide certain non-Claims related items on the Advanced Lookup screen.

False = Do not hide non-Claims related items.

Use SIU Score

This is used to determine whether or not to score an SIU on claims.

False = Do not score an SIU on claims.
True - An SIU is scored on claims.

False = Do not score an SIU on claims.

Validate Subro Adjuster Assignment

Determines if the system triggers a warning message when a user selects the Subro option on a feature or processes a Subro receipt and no Subro adjuster is assigned to the claim.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Additional Interest

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Automatically Update AI on Admin Change

This determines if all associated Claim AIs are updated automatically when they are modified in Diamond Administration.  

False = AIs are not automatically updated when modified in Diamond Administration.

True = AIs are automatically updated when modified in Diamond Administration.

False = AIs are not automatically updated when modified in Diamond Administration.

Automatically Update AI on Endorsements

This determines if all associated Claim AIs are updated automatically when a policy Endorsement is done.

False = AIs are not automatically updated on policy Endorsements.

True = AIs are automatically updated on policy Endorsements.

False = AIs are not automatically updated on policy Endorsements.

Create Note

Determines if a Note is created on the claim or not when the AI is updated.

False = A note is not created on a claim when an AI is updated.

True = A note is created on a claim when an AI is updated.

True = A note is created on a claim when an AI is updated.

Email Adjuster

This determines if an email is sent to the adjuster on the claim when an AI modification occurs.

False = An email is not sent to the adjuster on the claim when an AI modification occurs.

True = An email is sent to the adjuster on the claim when an AI modification occurs.

False = An email is not sent to the adjuster on the claim when an AI modification occurs.

Notify Adjuster of Additional Interest Add

Determines if the adjuster is notified when an AI has been added.

False = The adjuster is not notified when an AI is added.
True = The adjuster is notified when an AI has been added.

True = The adjuster is notified when an AI has been added.

Notify Adjuster of Additional Interest Add Remark

Used to determine the remark that is sent to the adjuster when an AI has been added.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Additional interest has been added.

Notify Adjuster of Additional Interest Deletion

Determines if the adjuster is notified when an AI has been deleted / inactivated.

False = The adjuster is not notified when an AI is inactivated / deleted.
True = The adjuster is notified when an AI has been inactivated / deleted.

True = The adjuster is notified when an AI has been inactivated / deleted.

Notify Adjuster of Additional Interest Deletion Remark

Used to determine the remark that is sent to the adjuster when an AI has been inactivated / deleted.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Additional interest has been deleted / inactivated.

Notify Adjuster of Additional Interest Update

Determines if the adjuster is notified when an AI has been modified.

False = The adjuster is not notified when an AI is modified.
True = The adjuster is notified when the AI is modified.

True = The adjuster is notified when the AI is modified.

Notify Adjuster of Additional Interest Update Remark

Determines the remark that is sent to the adjuster when notifying of an AI modification.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Additional interest has been modified.

Appraisal

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enable CCC

Determines if the screens for the CCC Appraisal Information will be used in place of the default Vehicle Appraisal screens.

False = Use the default Vehicle Appraisal screens.
True = Use the CCC Appraisal Information screens.

False = Use the default Vehicle Appraisal screens.

Default Property Appraisal Type ID

Allows users to set a default appraisal type on new appraisals.

False = Users cannot set a default appraisal type on new appraisals.

True = Users are allowed set a default appraisal type on new appraisals

False = Users cannot set a default appraisal type on new appraisals.

Filter Appraisers by County

This setting  allows a company to filter an appraiser by using  the loss county.

Implementation Specific
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

 

Filter Appraisers by Zip

This setting  allows a company to filter an appraiser by using  the loss zip code.  (Note: An appraiser cannot be set up for specific counties AND zip codes. One or the other must be chosen.)

True = Available Appraisers will be filtered based on the Zip Code of the Vehicle Location if it exists, and if not, the Loss Location.
False = This function is not enabled.

False = This function is not enabled.

Rental Coverage Code

Used to store a company's rental coverage code.

Implementation Specific.

14

Show Appraisal Tab

Determines if the Appraisal Tab is displayed in the Claim Detail Vehicle. The Loss Notice Appraisal is show based off the workflow configuration.

False = The Appraisal Tab is not displayed.

True = The Appraisal Tab is shown.

True = The Appraisal Tab is shown.

ACD

Auto Link

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Appraisal Assignment Production Web Service

This is the URL for sending the Appraisal assignment to ACD in the Production environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

https://autolink.adcorp.com/apu/v3.1/claims

Appraisal Assignment Test Web Service

This is the URL for sending the Appraisal assignment to ACD in the Test environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

https://autolink-stagingacdcorp.com/apu/v3.1/claims

Appraisal Attachment Triggers Workflow Item

Indicates whether to generate a workflow task to the claims inside adjuster when an Attachment is received. Tasks will only be generated for Attachment Types defined to generate.

False = No tasks will be generated, regardless of Attachment Type.

True = Generate a workflow task to the claim Inside Adjuster when an Attachment is received.


False = No tasks will be generated, regardless of Attachment Type.

Assigned Appraiser Triggers Workflow Item

Indicates whether to generate a workflow item to the claims inside adjuster when an Assigned Appraiser transmission is received.

False = Do not generate a workflow item to the claims inside adjuster when an Assigned Appraiser transmission is received.

True = Generate a workflow item to the claims inside adjuster when an Assigned Appraiser transmission is received.

False = Do not generate a workflow item to the claims inside adjuster when an Assigned Appraiser transmission is received.

Enabled

Determines if appraisals are allowed to interface with ACD.

False = Appraisals are not allowed to interface with ACD.

True = Appraisals are allowed to interface with ACD.

False = Appraisals are not allowed to interface with ACD.

Estimate Triggers Workflow Item

Indicates whether to generate a workflow task to the claims inside adjuster when an Estimate transmission is received.

False = Do not generate a workflow task to the claims inside adjuster when an Estimate transmission is received.

True = Generate a workflow task to the claims inside adjuster when an Estimate transmission is received.

False = Do not generate a workflow task to the claims inside adjuster when an Estimate transmission is received.

Production API Key

Unique key assigned to your company by ACD to access the Production Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Production API Secret

Unique password that corresponds to the API Key and is assigned to your company by ACD to access the Production Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Test API Key

Unique key assigned to your company by ACD to access the Test Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Test API Secret

 

Unique password that corresponds to the API Key and is assigned to your company by ACD to access the Test Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Testing

Determines whether to use the Test system settings instead of Production.

False = Use the Test System Settings.

True = Use the Production System Settings.

False = Use the Test System Settings.

Report

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Closing Statement

Ending of the Appraisal Report.

Implementation Specific.

 

"For questions or additional information, contact the claim adjuster at..."

Display Supervisor

Determines if the name and phone number of the supervisor is displayed on the Property Appraisal Report in Claims.

False = Disable. The name and phone number of the  inside adjuster assigned to the claim is displayed on the Property Appraisal Report.
True = Enable. Display the name and phone number of the supervisor on the Property Appraisal Report.

False = Disable. The name and phone number of the  inside adjuster assigned to the claim is displayed on the Property Appraisal Report.

Initial Statement

Used on the Claim Appraisal Report for a property claim. This is a line that displays under the appraiser and agent information that a company can use to specify something meaningful.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

 

Title

Name of a company's Appraisal Report.

Implementation Specific.

Claim Appraisal Report

Attachments

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Default Filter to All Levels

This will default the display level drop down to all levels when displaying Attachments.

False = The display level drop down defaults to "This Level Only."

True = This will default display level drop down to all levels when displaying Attachments.

False = The display level drop down defaults to "This Level Only."

Filter by Specific Level

This will make the level filter show all levels and the specific claims levels.

False = This will make the level filter show "This Level Only" and the specific claims levels.

True = This will make the level filter show all levels and the specific claims levels.

False = This will make the level filter show "This Level Only" and the specific claims levels.

Prompt for Attach Level

This adds the ability to add an Attachment from any level to another level by allowing the user to choose where they would like a given Attachment to be stored.

False = Users cannot add an Attachment from any level to another level.

True = Users have the ability to add an Attachment from any level to another level.

False = Users cannot add an Attachment from any level to another level.

Automatic Assignment

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Automatically Assign Claims

Enables or disables the automatic assignment of a claim during submission.

False = Automatic assignment of a claim is disabled.
True = This hides the Personnel tabs on the Loss Notice and automatically assign personnel during submission.

False = Automatic assignment of a claim is disabled.

Automatically Assign Coverages

Used to determine if coverages / features can be automatically assigned to claims personnel.

False = Does not allow a coverage / feature to be automatically assigned.
True = Allows a coverage / feature to be automatically assigned to claims personnel.

False = Does not allow a coverage / feature to be automatically assigned.

Capture State License Dates

Enables or disables capturing the claim personnel's state license effective and expiration dates.

False = The pop up window capturing the Effective / Expiration Dates of the state license is not displayed.
True = A pop up window capturing the Effective / Expiration Dates of the state license when selecting an accident state for inside adjuster in Claim Personnel is displayed.

True = A pop up window capturing the Effective / Expiration Dates of the state license when selecting an accident state for inside adjuster in Claim Personnel is displayed.

Create Process Note

This is used to determine if a Note detailing the Automated Assignment process should be created or not after each automated assignment.

False = No Note is created.
True = A Note is created after each automated assignment.

True = A Note is created after each automated assignment.

Use Overflow Queues

When an ideal automatic assignment is not found, rather than find a less ideal assignment, a task will be created for this claim and sent back to the designated workflow queue.

False = Do not send a task for the claim.

True = Send a task for the claim.

True = Send a task for the claim.

Use Policy State

It is used to determine if claim personnel are automatically assigned based on the policy’s state instead of the loss state.

False = Claim Personnel are assigned based on the loss state.

True = Claim Personnel are assigned based on the policy state.

Claim Personnel are assigned based on the loss state.

Workflow Queue ID

When an ideal automatic assignment is not found, rather than find a less ideal assignment, a task will be created for this claim and sent to this Workflow Queue.

0 = N / A
2 = Underwriting Exceptions
3 = Loss Notice

3 = Loss Notice

Claim Closure

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Capture Close Reason

(For C.L.U.E. Reporting) This determines if the system captures the reason when a claim is manually closed.

Implementation Specific
 

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Close With Final Expense Payment

Indicates whether or not to close the claim with final expense payment.

False = Do not close the claim with final expense payment.

True = Close the claim with final expense payment.

False = Do not close the claim with final expense payment.

Prompt Reserve and Anticipated Display Only with Amounts

Determines of the Close Claim Summary screen is displayed only if there are open amounts.

False = The Close Claim Summary screen is displayed whether or not if there are open amounts.
True = The Close Claim Summary screen is only displayed when there are open financial amounts.

False = The Close Claim Summary screen is displayed whether or not if there are open amounts.

Require Actual Return to Work Date

Used to determine if an actual return to work date is required for claim closure on a Workers Compensation policy or not.

False = Return to Work date is not required.

True = Return to Work Date is required.

False = Return to Work date is not required.

Require Child Restraint

This is used to determine if the Child Restraint is required before closing the claim. (For companies writing in the state of California.)

False = Child Restraint is not required before closing the claim.

True = Child Restraint is required before closing the claim.

False = Child Restraint is not required before closing the claim.

Require Claimant Contact

Determines if all claimants have been contacted.

False =Do not require that all claimants have been contacted. True = Require that all claimants have been contacted.

False =Do not require that all claimants have been contacted.

Require Close Reason

(For C.L.U.E. Reporting) This setting determines if the system requires the user to select a reason for manually closing a claim.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Require CLUE Vehicle Info

This determines if a CLUE vehicle (one with a clue operator type specified) required on the claim and that the operator on that vehicle has a name, address, and relationship to the policy holder.

False = Not required.
True = Required.

True = Required.

Require CMS Fields on Medicare Coverage

This determines if the system will not allow a claim to be closed when claimants with an injury / Medicare coverage does not have a cause of injury, ICD-9 Code or gender specified.  

False = The Cause of Loss, ICD-9 Code and gender are not required.

True = The Cause of Loss, ICD-9 Code and gender are required.

True = The Cause of Loss, ICD-9 Code and gender are required.

Require Degree of Fault

Determines if Diamond requires that the Degree of Fault field contains a value prior to closing a claim.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Require Disposition

Used to determine if the system requires the Disposition field must contain a value prior to closing a claim.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Require Estimated Return to Work

Determines if an Estimated Return to Work Date is required when closing a Workers Compensation Claim.

False = An estimated return to work date is not required on a Workers Comp claim when closing the claim.

True = An estimated return to work date is required on a Workers Comp claim when closing the claim.

False = An estimated return to work date is not required on a Workers Comp claim when closing the claim.

Require Location of Loss

Determines if the Loss Location is required on the Property screen before closing a claim.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 

False = Disable.

 

Require Loss Indicator

Determines if a loss indicator must be selected for CLUE vehicles before closing a claim.

False = Disable. The loss indicator is not required.
True = Enable. A loss indicator must be selected for CLUE vehicles before the claim may be closed.

False = Disable.

Require Loss Location City / State

Determines if the Loss Location City / State is required when closing a Personal Auto claim.

False = Disable. The Loss Location City / State is not required when closing a Personal Auto claim.
True = Enable. the system requires the Loss Location City / State when closing a Personal Auto claim.

False = Disable. The Loss Location City / State is not required when closing a Personal Auto claim.

Require Tracking Type

This is used to determine if a Tracking Type must be selected or not on the claim when closing a claim.

False = No tracking type is required.

True = A Tracking Type must be selected on a claim before it can be closed.

False = No tracking type is required.

Suppress Claim Closure Validations on bifurcated claims.

Used to suppress claim closure validations on bifurcated claims.

False = Claim closure validations are not suppressed on bifurcated claims.
True = Claim closure validations are suppressed on bifurcated claims.

False = Claim closure validations are not suppressed on bifurcated claims.

Claim Info

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Date of Loss Outside Policy Term

Determines if a date of loss change can be made outside of the policy’s effective date range.

False = The date of loss is not required inside the policy effective date range.
True = This requires that the date of loss be inside the policy effective date range.

False = The date of loss is not required inside the policy effective date range.

Automatically Close Claim

Determines if Diamond automatically closes the claim when all coverages are closed.

False = Disable; do not automatically close the claim when all coverages are closed.
True = Enable; automatically close the claim when all coverages are closed.

True = Enable.

Close Claim Button Enabled

Determines if the system automatically closes a claim and all coverages with and without open reserves and anticipated recoveries.

False = Disable; do not allow the system to automatically closes a claim and all coverages with and without open reserves and anticipated recoveries.
True = Enable; allow the system to automatically closes a claim and all coverages with and without open reserves and anticipated recoveries.

True = Enable.

 

Close Claim With Open Reserve or Anticipated

Determines if the system will allow the claim to be closed with open expense reserves and / or anticipated recoveries or not. (Note: This does not apply to loss / indemnity reserves. These will close when the claim closes.) Authorities must also be granted in the Claims Financial group of authorities.)

Implementation Specific

False = Disable. The system will not allow the claim to be closed with open expense reserves and / or anticipated recoveries.
True = Enable. the system will allow the claim to close with open expense reserves and / or anticipated recoveries providing the user has the proper authority established.

False = Disable.

Delete Property Button Enabled

Allows a user to delete a listed property in the Claim Detail / Property Tab.

False = Disable; do not allow a user to delete a listed property in the Claim Detail / Property Tab.
True = Enable; allow a user to delete a listed property in the Claim Detail / Property Tab.

True = Enable.

Delete Vehicle Button Enabled

Allows a user to delete a listed vehicle in the Claim Detail / Vehicle Tab.

False = Disable; do not allow a user to delete a listed vehicle in the Claim Detail / Vehicle Tab.
True = Enable; allow a user to delete a listed vehicle in the Claim Detail / Vehicle Tab.

True = Enable.

Display CA Child Restraint Question Combo Box

Determines if the CA Child Restraint Combo box is displayed on the Main tab of the Claim Detail. (For companies writing business in the state of California.)

False = The CA Child Restraint Combo box is not displayed on the Main tab of the Claim Detail.

True = the CA Child Restraint Combo box is displayed on the Main tab of the Claim Detail.

False = The CA Child Restraint Combo box is not displayed on the Main tab of the Claim Detail.

Garaging Information

Indicates whether the garage information will be shown on the vehicle screen and be required.

False = Garage information will not be displayed on the Vehicle screen and is not require.
True = Garage information will be displayed on the Vehicle screen and is not required.

False = Garage information will not be displayed on the Vehicle screen and is not required.

Initial Reserves on Reopen

This determines if initial reserves for all features, for all claimants are re-added or not under the claim when the claim is re-opened.
(Note: If, in the above situation, the feature has "In Suit" checked and your company uses litigation average reserves - set up manually in the database per company - then the litigation average reserves are re-added instead of the initial reserves.)

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Minimal Controls

This is used to determine if the system will hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of the Claim Detail.

False = The system will not hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of Claim Detail.

True = The system will hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of Claim Detail.

False = The system will not hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of Claim Detail.

Open Claim Button Enabled

Allows users to re-open a claim without re-opening a coverage reserve when the Open Claim button is active.

False = Disable; do not allow users to re-open a claim without re-opening a coverage reserve.
True = Enable; allow a claim to be re-opened without re-opening a reserve.

True = Enable.

 

Validate CLUE Operator on Vehicle Save

This is used to determine if the system will prompt a warning or not that a C.L.U.E. operator is needed when a vehicle is saved.

False = No prompt will be presented. True = this setting will prompt the user with a warning message when a vehicle is saved with a CLUE operator.

True = Enable; allow a claim to be re-opened without re-opening a reserve.

Validate Month and Year on Date of Loss Change

This determines if the system validates the month / year for Loss Date Changes.

False = The validation skips the month / year for Loss Date change.
True = The system validates the month / year for Loss Date changes.

True = The system validates the month / year for Loss Date changes.

Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Default Filter to All Levels

Determines if users can view Notes from all levels to display at the Claim Level by default.

True = Notes from all levels are displayed at the Claim Level by default.
False =Not all Notes are displayed at the Claim Level.

False =Not all Notes are displayed at the Claim Level.

On Status Change

Determines if a claim note is automatically generated when the status of a claim changes (e.g., from open to closed). Gives an audit trail.

False = Disable; do not generate a claim note when the status of a claim changes.
True = Enable; automatically generate a claim note when the status of a claim changes.

True = Enable; automatically generate a claim note when the status of a claim changes.

Weather Reports

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

API Key

This is the API Key giving access to Weather Analytics.

Implementation Specific; user defined. (Note: Your implementation will need to contact Weather Analytics vendor to obtain this information.)

41cde1ebb114444292fa79591474fc6a

Automatically Attach Weather Reports

Used to determine if the weather reports will automatically attach to the claim or not. For multi-variable reports, each sub-report will also be attached.

False = Do not automatically attach weather reports to the claim.

True = Automatically attach weather reports to the claim. For multi-variable reports, each sub-report will also be attached.

True = Automatically attach weather reports to the claim. For multi-variable reports, each sub-report will also be attached.

Enable Weather Reports

Determines if the Weather Reports toolbar button is enabled on the Claim Detail screen.

False =  The Weather Reports toolbar button is disabled / not visible on the Claim Detail screen.

True = The Weather Reports toolbar button is enabled / visible on the Claim Detail screen.

True = The Weather Reports toolbar button is enabled / visible on the Claim Detail screen.

Workflow

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Special Note About: The system settings that follow. In order to use the functionality to send an Email along with the Workflow Task, you must set the "Notify XXX" to "1" - Enable in this group of settings. So, for example, if you wish the Admin of the claim to receive an Email, you must set the "Notify Admin" setting to "1" - Enable. Additionally, you must enter the Admin's Email address in the user specified as the Administrator in Diamond Administration: User Setup. If no Email address is entered, an Email will not be sent even though both settings are set to "1" - Enable.

Email Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow Task to the adjuster when a claim is transferred / re-assigned.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Admin

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow Task to the administrator when a claim is transferred / re-assigned.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Admin Asst

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow Task to the admin assistant when a claim is transferred / re-assigned.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Outside Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow Task to the outside adjuster when a claim is transferred / re-assigned.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Salvage Adjuster

Used to determine if an Email is sent with the workflow (task) to the salvage adjuster when a claim is transferred or reassigned.

False = No Email is sent to the salvage adjuster with the workflow task when a claim is transferred or reassigned.
True = An Email is sent to the salvage adjuster with the workflow task when a claim is transferred or reassigned.

False = No Email is sent to the salvage adjuster with the workflow task when a claim is transferred or reassigned.

Email SIU Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow Task to the SIU adjuster when a claim is transferred / re-assigned.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Subro Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow Task to the Subro adjuster when a claim is transferred / re-assigned.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

 

Notify Adjuster

Determines if a workflow (task) is sent to the inside adjuster when the claim is reassigned.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

 

Notify Adjuster Remark

Determines the wording of the workflow (task) sent to the inside adjuster.

User defined.

 

New Claim Reassignment.

Notify Admin

Determines if a workflow (task) is sent to the administrator when the claim is reassigned.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Notify Admin Remark

Determines the wording of the workflow (task) sent to the administrator.

User defined.

New Claim Reassignment.

Notify Admin Asst.

Determines if a workflow (task) is sent to the administrative assistant when the claim is reassigned.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

 

Notify Admin Asst. Remark

Determines the wording of the workflow (task) sent to the administrative assistant.

User defined.

 

New Claim Reassignment.

Notify AOB Adjuster

Determines if a task is sent to the AOB (Assignment of Benefits) adjuster on an AOB assignment or not.

False = A task is not sent to the AOB adjuster.
True = A task is sent to the AOB adjuster.

True = A task is sent to the AOB adjuster.

Notify AOB Remark

Determines the remark on the AOB task sent to the adjuster.

User defined.

AOB Assignment.

Notify Outside Adjuster

Determines if a workflow (task) is sent to the outside adjuster when the claim is reassigned.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Notify Outside Adjuster Remark

Determines the wording of the workflow (task) sent to the outside adjuster.

User defined.

New Claim Reassignment.

Notify Salvage Adjuster

Used to determine if a workflow (task) is sent to the salvage adjuster when the claim is reassigned.

False = No workflow (task) is sent on reassignment of the claim.
True = A workflow (task) is sent on reassignment of the claim.

False = No workflow (task) is sent on reassignment of the claim.

Notify Salvage Adjuster Remark

Determines the wording of the workflow (task) sent to the salvage adjuster when a claim is reassigned.

User defined.

Claim Reassignment

Notify SIU (Special Investigative Unit) Adjuster

Determines if an automatic claims diary is generated when assignment of an SIU adjuster occurs on a claim feature. The new workflow diary may be viewed on the Open Tasks screen.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify SIU (Special Investigative Unit) Adjuster Remark

Determines if a remark (notification) is sent to the SIU adjuster on the automatic claims diary when an SIU adjuster has been assigned.

User defined.

SIU Assignment.

 

 

Notify Subro Adjuster

 

Determines if a workflow (task) is sent to the Subro adjuster when the claim is reassigned.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Notify Subro Adjuster Remark

Determines the wording of the workflow (task) sent to the Subro adjuster.

User defined.

Subro Assignment.

Claimant

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Note for Litigation Remarks

Determines if a note is generated at the Claimant Level when a litigation item is saved on the Litigation tab of the claimant.

False = Disable. No note will be generated if no remarks are given.
True = Enable. A note will be generated at the Claimant Level when a litigation item is saved on the Litigation tab of the claimant.

True = Enable.

Default New Claimant to Closed

Determines the status of a new claimant when it is added.

False = Default Claimant to "Open." The new claimant being added automatically defaults to "Open."
True = Default Claimant to "Closed." When adding a new claimant, that claimant defaults to "Closed" until a feature is added.

False = Default Claimant to "Open."

Delete Claimant 1

Determines if Claimant 1 can be deleted or not.

False = Do not allow Claimant 1 to be deleted.

True = Allow Claimant 1 to be deleted.

True = Allow Claimant 1 to be deleted.

Display Claimant Nature Code in Tree View

Determines if the system displays the nature of involvement code to the right of the claimant's name in the Claimant Tree View instead of the description.

False = Disable. When disabled, the full wording of the Nature of Involvement is displayed.
True = Enable. When enabled, it shows the code / abbreviation of the Nature of Involvement.

False = Disable.

Display Claimant Relationship Code in Tree View

Used to determine if Diamond displays the claimant's relationship to the policyholder code to the right of the claimant's name in the Claim Tree View instead of the description.

False = Disable. When disabled, the full wording of the Relationship to Policyholder" is displayed.
True = Enable. When enabled, it shows the code / abbreviation of the Relationship to Policyholder (e.g., W = Other, X = Not Related).

False = Disable.

Display Driver Exclude Type Code in Tree View

Determines if the full driver excluded type or the code from the driver excluded type is displayed in the Claims Tree View.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Hide Carrier Tab

Determines if the system will hide the Carrier Tab on the Claimant screen.

False = The Carrier Tab is hidden on the Claimant screen.

True = The Carrier Tab is not hidden on the Claimant screen.

False = The Carrier Tab is hidden on the Claimant screen.

Hide Flags

Used to determine if the system will hide the check boxes / flags on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.

False = The system will not hide the check boxes / flags on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.

True = The system will hide the check boxes / flags on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.

False = The system will not hide the check boxes / flags on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.

Hide Medical Tabs

Used to determine if the system will hide the Medical Tab on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.

False = The system will not hide the Medical Tab on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.

True =The system will hide the Medical Tab on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.  

False = The system will not hide the Medical Tab on the Main Tab of the Claimant screen.

Initial Reserves on Reopen

Determines if initial reserves for all features under a claimant are re-added or not when the claimant is re-opened.
(Note: If, in the above situation, the feature has "In Suit" checked and your company uses litigation average reserves - set up manually in the database per company - then the litigation average reserves are re-added instead of the initial reserves.)

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Nature of Injury Category Column Name

Determines the column name that will be used on the Claimant Injury screen for the Nature of Injury category.

User defined.

Nature of Injury Category.

Nature of Injury Column Name

Determines the column name that will be used on the Claimant Injury screen for the "Nature of Injury."

User defined.

Nature of Injury.

Notify if 1st Party Clmt is Missing Medicare Data

Used together with the person indicator on the Claimant Type to determine if a Workflow item should be sent to the adjuster on the claim when a new claimant (1st Party) is added without the information required for the Medicare Query file.

False = Do not send Notification / Workflow.
True = Enable. Send Notification / Workflow.

False = Do not send Notification / Workflow

Notify if 3rd Party Clmt is Missing Medicare Data

Used together with the person indicator on the Claimant Type to determine if a Workflow item should be sent to the adjuster on the claim when a new claimant (3rd Party) is added without the information required for the Medicare Query file.

False = Do not send Notification / Workflow.
True = Enable. Send Notification / Workflow.

False = Do not send Notification / Workflow

Require Associated

This is used to determine if the Associated field on the Add Claimant screen is required or not.

False = The Associated field is not required.

True = The Associated field is required.

False = The Associated field is not required.

Require Claimant Type

When adding a 3rd party in the Loss Notice / Claim Submission, the user is required to add a name for that person. In addition, if the system settings, "Require Claimant Type" and / or "Require Relationship" in the Claimant folder are set to "1" (Enabled), the user will be required to enter the Nature of Involvement and / or Relationship to Policyholder.

False = Do not require name.
True = Name required.

True = Name required.

Require Relationship

Determines if Relationship To (Insured) is required when adding a new claimant

False = Relationship to insured not required.
True = Relationship to insured required.

True = Relationship to insured required.

 

TPOC Medicare Validation or Warning

Determines if the system will use warnings or display the validations for Medicare TPOC.

False= The system will use warnings.

True = Diamond will show the validations for Medicare TPOC.

True = Diamond will show the validations for Medicare TPOC.

Use Error for Medicare Validation

This is used to determine if the validation messages for the claimant Medicare information is returned as a hard error or a warning.

False = System returns a warning.

True = System returns a hard error.

True = System returns a hard error.

Closure

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Require Inquiry Fields with Injury Coverage

This determines if a body part and primary injury must be selected on closure when a claimant is associated with an injury related sub-coverage.

False = A body part and primary injury do not have to be selected on closure when a claimant is associated with an injury related sub-coverage.

True = A  body part and primary injury must be selected on closure when a claimant is associated with an injury related sub-coverage.

False = A body part and primary injury do not have to be selected on closure when a claimant is associated with an injury related sub-coverage.

Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

On Status Change

Automatically generate a claim note when the status of a claimant changes.

False = Disable; do not generate a claim note when the status of a claimant changes.

True = Enable; automatically generate a claim note when the status of a claimant changes.

False = Disable.

Claims Info

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Display Hit and Run Checkbox

Displays the Hit and Run combo box on the Main tab of the Claim Detail screen.

False = Do not display the Hit and Run Checkbox.

True = Display the Hit and Run Checkbox.

False = Do not display the Hit and Run Checkbox.

Display Loss Description

Displays the Loss Description combo box on the Main tab of the Claim Detail screen.

False = Do not display the Loss Description Checkbox.

True = Display the Loss Description Checkbox.

False = Do not display the Loss Description Checkbox.

 

Display Public Adjuster Checkbox

Displays the Public Adjuster checkbox on the Main tab of the Claim Detail.

False = Do not display the Public Adjuster on the Main tab of the Claim Detail.
True = Display the Public Adjuster on the Main tab of the Claim Detail.

False = Do not display the Public Adjuster on the Main tab of the Claim Detail.

Display Single Vehicle Checkbox

Display the Single Vehicle Loss check box on the Main tab of the Claim Detail screen.

False = Do not display the Single Vehicle Checkbox.

True = Display the Single Vehicle Checkbox.

False = Do not display the Single Vehicle Checkbox.

 

Create Claims XML

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Create Claims XML for All Claims

Determines if End of Day Processing should create XMLs for all claims. This is in addition to the Number of Days Run.

False = No XMLs are created.

True = The EOD Process, Claims XML, will create XMLS for all claims.

False = No XMLs are created.

Export Path

Determines the path where the claim XMLs will be written.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

c:\temp\claims xml

Export Path - All

The path where the claim XMLs will be written when Create XMLs for All Claims is selected.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

c:\temp\claims xml all

Number of Days

Determines the number of days used during the EOD process to create claims XMLs. XMLs will be created for claims with a reported_date within this number of days.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

7

Dashboard

My Claims List

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Redirect to Detail Used to determine if the Dashboard will redirect to the Claim Detail or the Claim Inquiry screen on a claim. False = The Dashboard redirects to the Claim Inquiry screen on a claim.
True = The Dashboard redirects to the Claim Detail screen on a claim.
False = The Dashboard redirects to the Claim Inquiry screen on a claim.

Email

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

CC

Field used for setting up mail server for email notifications for Notify Underwriting Tasks.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Connection Time Out

Field used for setting up mail server for email notifications for Notify Underwriting Tasks.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

20

Mail Server

Field used for setting up mail server for email notifications for Notify Underwriting Tasks.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

172.16.18.12

Proxy Bypass

Field used for setting up mail server for email notifications for Notify Underwriting Tasks.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Proxy Server

Field used for setting up mail server for email notifications for Notify Underwriting Tasks.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Reply To

Individual or entity used to reply to the email.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Insuresoft Claims Test Notification

End of Period

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Command Timeout

Used to determine the amount of time the code will execute before timing out in the Write Monthly Claims Totals in End of Month Processing.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

7200

Update Pending Approval Transactions to Urgent

This determines the number of days from the task added date that pending approval transactions should be updated to urgent.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

2

Feature

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Multiple Feature Set Up

Determines if a company is using the Claim Multiple Feature Set Up function. This function allows multiple features to be set up on a single claimant.

False = Disable; do not use Multiple Feature Set Up functionality.
True = Enable; use Multiple Feature Set Up functionality.

True = Enable; use Multiple Feature Set Up functionality.

Allow Save With No Coverage

Determines if a feature having no coverage against it can be saved.

False = Disable; do not allow a feature having no coverages against it to be saved.

True = Enable; allow a feature having no coverages against it to be saved.

True = Enable; allow a feature having no coverages against it to be saved.

Default Reported By (Tab)

Determines if the Reported By tab defaults with information entered in Claim Detail when adding a new feature.

False = Disable; no information defaults from the Reported By tab.
True = Enable; information defaults from the Reported By tab.

True = Enable.

Enable in Salvage

Allows the Salvage flag on a claim feature to be enabled and modified while the feature is in Edit mode or when a new feature is being added.

False  = Disable. The Salvage field is protected and cannot be modified.
True = Enable on Edit. The Salvage flag on a claim feature is enabled while the feature is in Edit mode or when a new feature is being added. (Special Note: If the feature is in view mode, users will not be able to modify the Salvage check box).

True = Enable on Edit.

Enable in Subro

Allows the Subro flag on a claim feature to be enabled and modified while the feature is in Edit mode or when a new feature is being added.

False  = Disable. The Subro field is protected and cannot be modified.  
True = Enable on Edit. The Subro flag on a claim feature is enabled while the feature is in Edit mode or when a new feature is being added. (Special Note: If the feature is in view mode, users will not be able to modify the Subro check box).

True = Enable on Edit.

Exclude Feature from Automatic Loss Reserves Increases if 'In Suit'

This determines whether Diamond will prevent automatic increases in reserves based on aging features when the feature is “In Suit.”

False = the feature is included from the automatic loss reserve.
True = the feature is excluded from automatic loss reserves.

False = the feature is included from the automatic loss reserve.

Initial Reserves on Reopen

Determines if initial reserves under a feature when the feature is re-opened are added or not.
(Note: If, in the above situation, the feature has "In Suit" checked and your company uses litigation average reserves - set up manually in the database per company - then the litigation average reserves are re-added instead of the initial reserves.)

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Minimal Controls

This is used to determine if the system will hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of the Feature / Coverage.

False = The system will not hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of the Feature / Coverage.

True = The system will hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of the Feature / Coverage.

False = The system will not hide non-vital combos and check boxes from the main screen of the Feature / Coverage.

Missing Medicare Data

This determines if a workflow item should be generated when Medicare liability coverage is set up against a claimant that is not flagged as a Medicare recipient but does have the required Medicare data. A workflow item is then sent to the adjuster.

False = Notifications are not sent to the adjuster.
True = Send notifications to the adjuster.

False = Notifications are not sent to the adjuster

Rec Only if Claim Is

Used when a new feature is added.

False = Disabled. If set to zero (0), the feature is normal unless the user selects the "Record Only" checkbox or they set up a feature for a coverage that has no coverage. (Note: Users need authority.)
True = Enabled. If set to one (1) and the claim is setup as "Record Only," the feature defaults to "Record Only" whether or not it has coverage.

True = Enabled. The claim is setup as "Record Only," and the feature defaults to "Record Only" whether or not it has coverage.

Require Adjuster

This determines if an inside or outside adjuster is a required selection when adding a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable; Inside  / Outside Adjuster fields are marked with an asterisk (*), indicating "Required" fields.

True = Enable.

.

Require Admin

Determines if the Supervisor is required at the claim feature level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable; Supervisor field is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

True = Enable

 

Require Admin Asst

Determines if the Admin Asst is required at the claim feature level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable; Admin Asst field is marked with an asterisk (*)  indicating "Required" field.

False = Disable.

 

Require Salvage Adjuster

Determines if a salvage adjuster is required on a claim feature.

False = Salvage adjuster is not required on a claim feature.
True = Salvage adjuster is required on a claim feature.

False = Salvage adjuster is not required on a claim feature.

Require SIU (Special Investigative Unit) Adjuster

Determines if an SIU adjuster is a required selection on the Personnel tab in order for a claim feature to be submitted.

False = Disable
True = Enable; SIU Adjuster field is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

False = Disable.

 

Require Subro Adjuster

Determines if a Subro adjuster is required when adding / editing claim feature.

False = Subro adjuster is not required. True = Subro adjuster is required.

False = Subro adjuster is not required.

Show Litigation Icon

Determines if the litigation icon (Gavel) should be shown at the Feature level when a feature / coverage is "In Suit."

False - Disable - Do not show the icon.
True - Enable - Display the icon.

True - Enable - Display the icon.

Statute of Limitations Diary

This represents the number of days in advance to send an "urgent" Workflow Diary on a statute of limitation coverage.

Implementation specific;user defined.

90

Use Claim Loss Date to Determine the Age of the Feature when Processing Automatic

Reserves Updates

This is used to determine whether Diamond will use the Clam Loss Date instead of

the Feature Reported Date to determine how long the feature is open when processing

automatic reserves updates.

False = the system uses the Feature Reported Date to calculate the reserve.
True = the system will use the “Loss Date.”

False = the system uses the Feature Reported Date to calculate the reserve.

Validate Zero Reserve

This determines whether or not a warning message should be displayed when a “Coverage / Feature” is saved without a loss reserve.

False = No warning message is displayed when a “Coverage / Feature” is saved without a loss reserve.
True = A warning message is displayed when a “Coverage / Feature” is saved without a loss reserve.

True = A warning message is displayed when a “Coverage / Feature” is saved without a loss reserve.

Explanation of Benefits (EOB)

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Disable Benefits Applied Row

Determines whether or not the Benefits Applied row is enabled.

False = Benefits Applied row is enabled.

True = Benefits Applied row is disabled.

False

Disable Date Paid

Determines whether or not the Date Paid field is enabled.

False = Date Paid is enabled.

True = Date Paid  is disabled.

False

Disable Deductible Field

Determines whether or not the Deductible field is enabled.

False = Deducible field is enabled.

True = Deductible field is disabled.

False

Disable Total Amount Field

Determines whether or not the Total Amount field is enabled.

False = Total Amount field is enabled.

True = Total Amount field is disabled.

False

Explanation of Benefits Tab Name

Sets the name for the Explanation of Benefits tab.

Implementation specific; user defined.

EOB

Hide Amount Allowed Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Amount Allowed row.

False = Amount Allowed row is shown.

True = Amount Allowed row is hidden.

False

Hide Amount Not Covered Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Amount Not Covered row.

False = Amount Not Covered row is shown.

True = Amount Not Covered row is hidden.

False

Hide Amount Paid Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Amount Paid row.

False = Amount Paid row is shown.

True = Amount Paid row is hidden.

False

Hide Benefits Applied Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Benefits Applied row.

False = Benefits Applied row is shown.

True = Benefits Applied row is hidden.

False

Hide Check Number Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Check Number row.

False = Check Number row is shown.

True = Check Number row is hidden.

False

Hide Claim Condition Category Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Claim Condition Category  row.

False = Claim Condition Category row is shown.

True = Claim Condition Category row is hidden.

False

Hide Claim Condition Type Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Claim Condition Type  row.

False = Claim Condition Type row is shown.

True = Claim Condition Type row is hidden.

False

Hide Claim Reason Type Row

This is used to determine if the Hide Claim Reason Type Row is hidden or not.

False = Claim Reason Type row is not hidden.
True = Claim Reason Type row is hidden.

False

Hide Co Pay Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Co Pay  row.

False = Co Pay row is shown.

True = Co Pay row is hidden.

False

Hide Condition

Determines whether or not to hide the Condition row.

False = Condition row is shown.

True = Condition row is hidden.

False

Hide Date Paid

Determines whether or not to hide the Date Paid row.

False = Date Paid row is shown.

True = Date Paid row is hidden.

False

Hide Date Received

Determines whether or not to hide the Date Received row.

False = Date Received row is shown.

True = Date Received row is hidden.

False

Hide Explanation

Determines whether or not to hide the Explanation row.

False = Explanation row is shown.

True = Explanation row is hidden.

False

Hide Interest Amount

Determines whether or not to hide the Interest Amount row.

False = Interest Amount row is shown.

True = Interest Amount row is hidden.

False

Hide Make a Payment

Determines whether or not to hide the Make a Payment row.

False = Make a Payment row is shown.

True = Make a Payment row is hidden.

False

Hide Medical Provider

Determines whether or not to hide the Medical Provider row.

False = Medical Provider row is shown.

True = Medical Provider row is hidden.

False

Hide Service Date Range

Determines whether or not to hide the Service Date Range row.

False = Service Date Range row is shown.

True = Service Date Range  row is hidden.

False

Hide Total Paid

Determines whether or not to hide the Total Paid row.

False = Total Paid row is shown.

True = Total Paid row is hidden.

False

Interest Payment Type ID

Used when making a payment to determine what type to set on the transaction for the Interest Payment.

0

0

Loss Payment Type ID.

Used when making a payment to determine what type to set on the transaction for the Loss Payment.

0

0

Negotiation Tracker

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Hide Attorney Row

Determines whether or not to hide the Explanation row.

True - Explanation row is hidden.
False = Explanation row is shown.

False = Explanation row is shown.

Validate Loss Payments

This is used to determine if the issuance of Loss Payments will be prevented without the completion of the Negotiation Tracker.

False = Issuance of Loss Payments will not be prevented without the completion of the Negotiation Tracker.

True = Issuance of Loss Payments will be prevented without the completion of the Negotiation Tracker.

False = Issuance of Loss Payments will not be prevented without the completion of the Negotiation Tracker.

Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Initial Reserves on Reopen

This determines when a feature is reopened and initial reserve amounts are automatically added to that feature, if a note is added to the feature or not.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Litigation Average Reserves

Whenever litigation average reserves are assigned, this determines if a note is automatically added to the feature or not.

Implementation Specific.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

On Status Change

Automatically generate a claim note when the status of a claim feature changes.

False = Disable; do not generate a claim note when the status of a claim feature changes.
True = Enable; automatically generate a claim note when the status of a claim feature changes.

True = Enable; automatically generate a claim note when the status of a claim feature changes.

Workflow

Field

Function  / Value

Options

Default

Adjuster Review

Determines if the adjuster receives a recurring review task at the feature level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Adjuster Review Again in X Days

Depending on the number of days, this is used to define the number of days when the claim feature is to be reviewed next by the adjuster.

User defined.

25

Adjuster Review Every X Days

Sets the number of days for subsequent workflow follow up for the adjuster on the claim feature.

User defined.

30

Admin Review

Determines if the supervisor receives a recurring review task at the feature level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Admin Review Again in X Days

Depending on the number of days, this is used to define the number of days when the claim feature is to be reviewed next by the supervisor.

User defined.

 

25

Admin Review Every X Days

Sets the number of days for subsequent workflow follow up for the supervisor on the claim feature.

User defined.

 

30

Special Note About: The system settings that follow. In order to use the functionality to send an Email along with the Workflow Task, you must set the "Notify XXX" to "1" - Enable in this group of settings. So, for example, if you wish the Admin of the claim to receive an Email, you must set the "Notify Admin" setting to "1" - Enable. Additionally, you must enter the Admin's Email address in the user specified as the Administrator in Diamond Administration: User Setup. If no Email address is entered, an Email will not be sent even though both settings are set to "1" - Enable.

Email Adjuster

This determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the adjuster when a feature is added.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

Email Admin

This determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the administrator when a feature is added.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

Email Admin Asst

This determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the admin assistant when a feature is added.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

Email Outside Adjuster

This determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the outside adjuster when a feature is added.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

Email Salvage Adjuster

This determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the adjuster when a feature is added.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

Email SIU Adjuster

This determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the SIU adjuster when a feature is added.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

Email Subro Adjuster

This determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the Subro adjuster when a feature is added.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

 

 

 

 

Notify Adjuster

Determines if the inside / outside adjuster receives a notification they are listed on a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 False = Disable.

Notify Adjuster Remark

Narrative applied on the notification.

User defined.

Coverage Assignment.

Notify Admin

Determines if the supervisor receives a notification they are listed on a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify Admin Asst

Determines if the admin assistant receives a notification they are listed on a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 False = Disable.

 

Notify Admin Asst Remark

Narrative applied on the notification.

User defined.

Coverage Assignment.

Notify Admin Remark

Narrative applied on the notification.

User defined.

Coverage Assignment.

Notify for Zero Expense Reserves

Determines if a Diary item is created or not when an expense reserve is equal to zero (0).

False = A Diary item is not created when an Expense Reserve is equal to “0.”

True = A Diary item is created when an Expense Reserve is equal to “0.”

False = A Diary item is not created when an Expense Reserve is equal to “0.”

Notify Outside Adjuster

Determines if the outside adjuster receives a notification they are listed on a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify Outside Adjuster Remark

This is the narrative applied on the notification for a feature.

User defined.

Coverage Assignment.

Notify Salvage Adjuster

Determines if the salvage adjuster receives a notification they are listed on a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify Salvage Adjuster Remark

This is the narrative applied on the notification for a feature.

User defined.

Coverage Assignment

Notify SIU Adjuster

Determines if the SIU adjuster receives a notification they are listed on a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify SIU Adjuster Remark

Narrative applied on the notification.

User defined.

Coverage Assignment.

Notify Subro Adjuster

Determines if the Subro adjuster receives a notification they are listed on a claim feature.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 False = Disable.

 

Notify Subro Adjuster Remark

Narrative applied on the notification.

User defined.

Coverage Assignment.

Outside Adjuster Review

Determines if the outside adjuster receives a recurring review task at the feature level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Outside Adjuster Review Again in X Days

Depending on the number of days, this is used to define the number of days when the claim feature is to be reviewed next by the outside adjuster.

User defined.

25

Outside Adjuster Review Every X Days

Sets the number of days for subsequent workflow follow up for the outside adjuster on the claim feature.

User defined.

30

Financials

ALAE

Field

Function  / Value

Options

Default

Column Header

Heading title for financial spreadsheet column for ALAE / DCC expense.

DCC
ALAE / DCC
ALAE

DCC

Enabled

Disable or enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable claim financial worksheet for Allocated Loss Adjustment Expense.

Reserve Enabled

For allocated loss adjustment expense, disable or enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Tran Category

For system generated reserve transaction category; do not change

Blank

13

Reserve Tran Type

For system generated reserve transaction type; do not change

Blank

1400

Expense Recovery

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Column Header

Heading title for financial spreadsheet column for Expense Recovery. May also be customized for Reinsurance Expense Recovery

Rein Exp
Rec

Rein Exp

Enabled

Disable or enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Enabled

For an expense recovery, disable or enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Tran Category

For system generated reserve transaction category; do not change.

Do not change.

5

Reserve Tran Type

For system generated reserve transaction type; do not change

Do not change.

1600

Indemnity

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Column Header

Heading title for financial spreadsheet column for Loss / Indemnity.

Loss
Indemnity

Loss

Enabled

Disable or enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Enabled

For an indemnity payment, disable or enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

True = For an indemnity payment, enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Tran Category

For system generated reserve transaction category; do not change.

Do not change.

1

Reserve Tran Type

For system generated reserve transaction type; do not change.

Do not change.

1000

Non - ALAE

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Column Header

Heading title for financial spreadsheet column for ULAE / AO expenses.

ULAE
AO
ULAE / AO
NON - ALAE

AO

Enabled

Disable or enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Enabled

For a non allocated loss adjustment payment, disable or enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Tran Category

For system generated reserve transaction category; do not change.

Do not change.

3

Reserve Tran Type

For system generated reserve transaction type; do not change.

Do not change.

1200

Other Recovery

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Column Header

Heading title for financial spreadsheet column for Other Recovery. May be customized for use as Reinsurance Loss Recovery.

Rein Loss
Other Rec

Rein Loss

Enabled

Disable or enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Enabled

For other recovery, disable or enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Tran Category

For system generated reserve transaction category; do not change.

Blank

11

Reserve Tran Type

For system generated reserve transaction type; do not change.

Blank

2200

Row Headers

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Current Reserve

Description used for Current Reserves in the grid, located in the lower portion of the Claims Screens under the Claim Level Totals.

Not recommended to change.

Cur. Reserve / Anticipated.

Initial Reserve

Description used for Initial Reserves in the grid, located in the lower portion of the Claims Screens under the Claim Level Totals.

Not recommended to change.

Initial Reserve / Anticipated.

Paid

Description used for Paid / Received in the grid, located in the lower portion of the Claims Screens under the Claim Level Totals.

Not recommended to change.

Paid / Received.

Salvage

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Column Header

Heading title for financial spreadsheet column for Salvage.

Salvage

Salvage

Enabled

Disable or enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Enabled

 

For a salvage payment, disable or enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve.

Reserve Tran Category

For system generated reserve transaction category; do not change.

Do not change.

7

Reserve Tran Type

For system generated reserve transaction type; do not change.

Do not change.

1800

Subro

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Column Header

Heading title for financial spreadsheet column for Subro.

Subro

Subro

Enabled

Disable or enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet when a new feature is entered.

Reserve Enabled

For a Subro payment, disable or enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve when a new feature is entered.

False = Disable the claim financial worksheet.
True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve.

True = Enable the claim financial worksheet for entry of an initial reserve.

Reserve Tran Category

For system generated reserve transaction category; do not change.

Do not change.

9

Reserve Tran Type

For system generated reserve transaction type; do not change.

Do not change.

2000

Forms

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Export Path
(For Batch Claims Forms)

Used to designate the company specific export path for Diamond Processes claims XML files.

User defined.

C:\DiamondPaths\Data\ClaimForms

General

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Bifurcation

Determines if Claim Bifurcation is used in a client's system.

False = Disable. Claims bifurcation is not available for use in a client's system and the Bifurcate option is protected.
True = Enable. The Bifurcate option is available for use on the Claim Detail Menu, providing a user has the authority to bifurcate claims.

True = Enable.

 

Automatically Add AI (Additional Interest) With Listed Unit

Option which automatically adds additional interests to the Loss Payee / Additional Interest tab in Claim Detail when a claim is submitted.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Claim No Length

This sets the character length for claim number.

Numeric

10

Display Current Personnel Workflow

Used to determine if the number of claims and features / coverages assigned to claim personnel display in the Personnel Contact Information.

False = The number of claims and features / coverages assigned is not displayed in the Personnel Contact Information.

True = The number of claims and features / coverages assigned is displayed in the Personnel Contact Information.

True = The number of claims and features / coverages assigned is displayed in the Personnel Contact Information.

Require Catastrophe Type

Determines if a Catastrophe Type is required or not.

False = Catastrophe Type is not required.

True = Catastrophe Type is required.

False = Catastrophe Type is not required.

View Features in Claims Inquiry

This determines if the system will hide the "Select" button next to each Claimant in the Grid View to prevent the user from viewing the Features section of the Claims Inquiry.

False = The system hides the "Select" button next to each Claimant on the Grid View to prevent users from viewing the Features section in Claims Inquiry.

True = The "Select" button is not hidden and users may view the Features section for each Claimant.

True = The "Select" button is not hidden and users may view the Features section for each Claimant.

Import

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Import Path

Used to name the directory path from which the claim XMLs will be imported into Diamond.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\ClaimImport

ISO Claim Search

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Create Error File Workflow

This is used to determine if a workflow diary should be created for error file errors or not.

False = A Workflow Diary is not created for Error file errors.

True = A Workflow Diary is created for Error file errors.

True = A Workflow Diary is created for Error file errors.

Create Match File Workflow

This determines if a Workflow Diary should be created for match file matches or not.

False = A Workflow Diary is not created for Match file matches.

True = A Workflow Diary is created for Match file matches.

True = A Workflow Diary is created for Match file matches.

Error File Path

Name of the path where the match file error file is stored.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Temp\ISO Error File\ErrorFile.txt

Exclude Invalid Claimants from ISO Claim Search File

This indicates whether or not to remove invalid claimants and their features from the ISO Claim Search File.

False = Invalid claimants and their features will not be removed.

True = The Claim will only be included if it has at least one valid claimant.

False = Invalid claimants and their features will not be removed.

Generate Task to Outside Adjuster when Inside Not Available

This system setting will change the hierarchy of creating tasks on an ISO Claims Search Match. It will first attempt to go to the Inside Adjuster if one is assigned. If this system setting is turned on, it will then attempt to assign the task to the outside adjuster, if not, it then goes to the supervisor. If it cannot find either the inside or outside, it will go to the supervisor.

False = Uses current functionality. It will go to the Inside Adjuster assigned.

True = If no Inside Adjuster is assigned, it will then attempt to assign the task to the outside adjuster, if not, it then goes to the supervisor. If it cannot find either the inside or outside, it will go to the supervisor.

False = Uses current functionality. It will go to the Inside Adjuster assigned.

Match PDF Path

Name of the path where the match file PDFs are stored.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Temp\ISO PDFs\MatchPDF.txt

Output Path

Determines the path that the ISO Claim Search interface file is written out to.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

c:\temp

Search All Claims for Claims Director

Used to determine if all claims should be searched for ISO Claim Director.

False = The system only searches for claims that are flagged for search.
True = The system searches for all claims.

True = The system searches for all claims.

Send Flagged Claims to ISO Claim Search

Used to determine if only claims that are flagged as submit to ISO will be included in the nightly ISO Claim Search files.

False = All new and updated claims will be included in the nightly Claim Search file. The Submit to ISO Claim Search check box is not displayed.
True = Display the Submit to ISO Claim Search check box. Only claims that are flagged as submit to ISO will be included in the nightly ISO Claim Search files. Users must also have the authority, "Edit Send to ISO Claim Search" (Claim Detail group.)   

True = Display the Submit to ISO Claim Search check box. Only claims that are flagged as submit to ISO will be included in the nightly ISO Claim Search files.

Skip Submitted Report Only

Determines if match files for a reported claim only should be skipped.

False = The system does not skip match reports from being imported.

True = The system excludes certain match reports from being imported.

True = The system excludes certain match reports from being imported.

Skip Submitted Report Plus

This determines if match files for a submitted claim plus should be skipped or not.

False = Match files for a submitted claim plus are included.

True = Match files for a submitted claim plus are skipped.

True = Match files for a submitted claim plus are skipped.

Validate Claimant Address against ISO Requirements

This indicates whether or not to validate the Claimant Address against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.  If invalid, Diamond will provide a warning message but will not prevent the save.

False = The system will not validate the Claimant Address against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.

True = The system will validate the Claimant Address against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.

False = The system will not validate the Claimant Address against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.

Validate Claimant Name against ISO Requirements

This indicates whether or not to validate the Claimant Name against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.  If invalid, Diamond will provide a warning message but will not prevent the save.

False = The system will not validate the Claimant Name against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.

True = The system will validate the Claimant Name against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.

False = The system will not validate the Claimant Name against ISO requirements upon Claimant Save.

Validate License Plate against ISO Requirements

This indicates whether or not to validate the License Plate of Claim Vehicles upon Vehicle Save. If invalid, Diamond will provide a warning message but will not prevent the save.

False = The system will not validate the License Plate of Claim Vehicles upon Vehicle Save.

True = The system will validate the License Plate of Claim Vehicles upon Vehicle Save.

False = The system will not validate the License Plate of Claim Vehicles upon Vehicle Save.

Workflow Queue for ISO Errors

This determines the name of the Workflow Queue that will receive the Task generated from ISO Error processing when the claim does not have an Inside Adjuster.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Limit Verification

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Net Indemnity Over Per Occurrence Limit

Allows or disallows a user to make payments exceeding the policy limit. (Note: User must have authority.)

False = Disable; do not allow user to make payments exceeding policy limit.
True = Enable; allow a user to make payments exceeding policy limit

True = Enable; allow a user to make payments exceeding policy limit.

Net Indemnity Over Per Person Limit

Allows or disallows a user to make payments above the policy level. (Note: User must have authority.)

False = Disable; do not allow user to make payments above the policy level.
True = Enable; allow a user to make payments above policy level.

True = Enable; allow a user to make payments above the policy level.

Net Indemnity Over Per Policy Limit

Allows or disallows a user to make payments above the policy level. (Note: User must have authority.)

False = Disable; do not allow user to make payments above the policy level.
True = Enable; allow a user to make payments above policy level.

True = Enable; allow a user to make payments above the policy level.

List

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Load Claims for Rewritten Policy This is used to determine if the Claims List should load claims for associated rewritten policies. False = No rewritten policies are considered.
True = The Claims List loads all claims for rewritten policies.
False = No rewritten policies are considered.

Litigation

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Create Review Case Diary Item

Used to determine if a Diary Task is created to review the case with defense counsel.

False = No Diary Task is created.

True = A Diary Task is created to review the case with defense counsel.

False = No Diary Task is created.

Default Budget Warning Percentage

Determines the default amount that the Budget Warning percentage will be set to.

Implementation specific; user defined percentage value.

50

Default Litigation Status Combo Box

This is used to default the Litigation Status combo box on the Page One and Two Tabbed Page Litigation.

0 = Disable; the Claims Litigation Status combo box defaults / will be empty when entering new Litigation. 1 = Enable; the Claims Litigation Status combo defaults to “Open” on new Litigation entries.

1 = Enable; the Claims Litigation Status combo defaults to “Open” on new Litigation entries.

Require Closure Type

Used to determine if the closure type is required or not when closing claim litigation.

False = Closure type is not required.

True = Closure Type is required.

False = Closure type is not required.

Require Demand Amount

Used to determine if the demand amount is required when closing claim litigation.

False = Demand amount is not required.

True = Demand amount is required.

False = Demand amount is not required.

Require Initial Offer Amount

Used to determine if the initial offer amount is required when closing claim litigation.

False = Initial offer amount is not required.

True = Initial Offer amount is required.

False = Initial offer amount is not required.

Require Settlement Amount

Used to determine if the settlement amount is required when closing claim litigation.

False = Settlement amount is not required.

True = False = Settlement amount is required.

False = Settlement amount is not required.

Review Case Diary Item in X Days

This determines the number of days for the Diary item to re-occur for the defense counsel.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Send Budget Warning Message to the Reports To for the Litigation Adjuster

This is a flag used to indicate that the Budget Warning message will go the Reports To for the Litigation Adjuster instead of the Claim Level Supervisor.

False = The Budget Warning message is sent to the Claim Level supervisor.
True = The Budget Warning message is sent to the Reports To for the Litigation Adjuster.

False = The Budget Warning message is sent to the Claim Level supervisor.

Show Budget Screen for Claims Litigation

Determines if the Budget screen is shown for Claim Litigation or not.

False = The Budget screen is not displayed.
True = The Budget screen is displayed.

False = The Budget screen is not displayed.

Un/Set Date Received when In Suit Un/Checked

This sets the date when In Suit date is received / checked.

False = The date is not set when the In Suit Date is received / checked.

True = The date is set when the In Suit Date is received / checked.

False = The date is not set when the In Suit Date is received / checked.

Use One Page Litigation Screen

Determines if the 1 Page Litigation screen is used instead of the 3 tab Litigation screens.

False = The 3 tab Litigation screens are used.
True = Use the 1 Page Litigation screen.

False = The 3 tab Litigation screens are used.

Medical

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled This is used to determine if the Medical Tab is displayed or not in the Claims System. False = The Medical Tab is not displayed.
True = The Medical Tab is displayed.
True = The Medical Tab is displayed.

Medicare

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Output Path

This determines the output location of the claim query file and claim file that are created for reporting to Medicare.

Implementation specific.

C:\DiamondPaths\Data\
ClaimsMedicare

Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Default Filter to All Levels

Allows the user the option if they want Notes from all levels to display at the Claim Level by default.

False = The display level will default to "This Level Only."

True = This will default the display level drop down to all levels when displaying Notes.

False = The display level will default to "This Level Only."

Default System Generated Notes as Private

Used to determine if system generated notes default to "Private."

False = System generated notes do not default to “Private.”

True = System generated notes to “Private.”

False = System generated notes do not default to “Private.”

Display System Generated Notes on Inquiry

Used to determine if system generated notes are displayed on the Claims Inquiry screen or not.

False =  System generated Notes are not displayed on the Claims Inquiry screen.

True =System generated Notes are displayed on the Claims Inquiry screen.

False =  System generated Notes are not displayed on the Claims Inquiry screen.

Default To Summary

Determines the Claim Note View: Summary or Detail.

False = Detail View.
True = Summary View.

False = Detail View.

Filter by Specific Level

This will make the Level Filter show All Levels and the specific Claims Levels.

False = The Level Filter will not show All Levels and the specific Claims Levels.

True = The Level Filter will show All Levels and the specific Claims Levels.

False = The Level Filter will not show All Levels and the specific Claims Levels.

Prompt for Attach Level

Determines if users can select any claimant, feature / coverage or transaction to add a note from anywhere on the claim. 

False = Notes cannot be added from any level.
True = Users can add notes from anywhere on the claim.

False = Notes cannot be added from any level.

Require Note Title

Determines if the title is required on a Claim Note or not.

False = The Note Tile is required on a Claim Note.

True =  The Note Tile is not required on a Claim Note.

False = The Note Tile is required on a Claim Note.

Suppress Pending Claim Policy Diary Note

This determines whether or not to prevent a Policy Diary Note from being created when a claim is “Pended.”

False = The system allows a Policy Diary Note to be created when a claim is "Pended."
True = The system prevents a Policy Diary Note from being created when a claim is "Pended."

False = The system allows a Policy Diary Note to be created when a claim is "Pended."

Notify Underwriting

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Policy Note

Determines if a Note is added to the policy when a "Notify Underwriting" item has been added to a claim.

False = No Note is added.
True = A Note is added when a  "Notify Underwriting" item has been added to a claim.

True = A Note is added when a  "Notify Underwriting" item has been added to a claim.

Enabled

Used to enable or disable the Underwriting Tab at the Claim, Claimant and Claim Feature levels.

False = Disables the Notify Underwriting Tab
True = Enables the Notify Underwriting Tab

True = Enables the Notify Underwriting Tab at the Claim, Claimant and Claim Feature levels.

Send Workflow

Determines if a workflow item is generated to underwriting or not.

False = Disable; do not send workflow item.
True = Enable; send workflow item to underwriting.

True = Enable; send workflow item to underwriting.

Email Notification

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Used to enable or disable the Underwriting Tab at the Claim, Claimant and Claim Feature levels for email notification.

False = Disables the Underwriting Tab.
True = Enables the Notify Underwriting Tab.

False = Disables the Notify Underwriting Tab at the Claim, Claimant and Claim Feature levels for email notification.

Reinsurance

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Create Reinsurance Diary Item

Used to determine if a Diary Task is created to report reinsurance.

False = No Diary Task is created.

True = A Diary Task is created to report reinsurance.

False = No Diary Task is created.

Create Update Reinsurance Carrier Diary Item

Flag to indicate if a Diary Task is created to update the reinsurance carrier.

False = Do not create a Diary Task to update the reinsurance carrier.

True = Create a Diary Task to update the reinsurance carrier.

False = Do not create a Diary Task to update the reinsurance carrier.

Notification of Retention Limit Used to determine if a Diary Item is created once the retention limit is reached or over the threshold of the claim. False = No Diary Item is created.
True = A Diary Item is created if the loss on the claim is over the threshold.
False = No Diary Item is created.
Notify Reinsurance Queue Determines the queue id to send the claim to if the retention limit is reached. Note: Clients have to set up a Workflow Queue or use an existing queue and use that Queue ID. 0

Reinsurance Diary Item Amount

This is used to indicate the amount of the total incurred to notify for reporting purposes.

Implementation Specific; user defined. 0

Review Update Reinsurance Carrier Diary Item in X Days

This determines the number of days for the Diary item to re-occur for the reinsurance carrier.

Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Versify Retention Limit Determines the retention percentage threshold to trigger the notification. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0

Salvage

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Auction Enabled

Determines whether or not Salvage Auctions are enabled.

False = Salvage Auctions are not enabled.

True =Salvage Auctions are enabled.

True =Salvage Auctions are enabled.

Default Auction Type Bid

Used to determine which auction bid type defaults.

N/A

Minimum Bid

Bid Approval

Bid Approval

Invoices Path

This is the location of the directory for the path for third party attachments.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Notify for Auction Bid Awaiting Approval

Determines whether or not a task is sent when the auction bid has been made that requires approval.

False = No task is sent.

True = Send a task when auction bid has been made and an approval is required.

True = Send a task when auction bid has been made and an approval is required.

Notify for Lot Rolling Into New Auction

Indicates whether or not to generate a task to the adjuster when a lot's auction ends without selling and rolls into a new auction.

False = No task is sent.

True =  Send a task when a lot's auction ends.

True =  Send a task when a lot's auction ends.

Notify for Rejected Auction Update

Indicates whether or not a task is sent when an auction rejects an update.

False = No task is sent.

True = Send a task when an auction rejects an update.

True = Send a task when an auction rejects an update.

Send Notifications on Lot Stage Updates

Determines whether or not Lot Stage Notifications are enabled.

False = Lot Stage Notifications are not enabled.

True = Lot Stage Notifications are enabled.

False = Lot Stage Notifications are not enabled.

Validate Auction Bid Type

Determines if Bid Type is required or not.

False = Bid Type is not required.

True = Bid Type is required.

True = Bid Type is required.

Scheduled Payments

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Create Transactions in Suspense

Used to determine if the scheduled payment transaction will be created in suspense (pending) or require a user to release it before it is issued.

True = Scheduled payments are added in suspense (pending). This requires the user to release it before it is issued.
False = Scheduled payments are added as issued.

True = Scheduled payments are added in suspense (pending). This requires the user to release it before it is issued.

Enable Scheduled Payments

Determines if the “Scheduled Pay” tab on the claimant is visible so a user with proper authority can set up a payment cycle.

True = This makes the "Scheduled Pay” tab on the claimant visible so a user with proper authority can set up a payment cycle.
False = The Schedule Pay tab is not shown.

True = This makes the "Scheduled Pay” tab on the claimant visible so a user with proper authority can set up a payment cycle.

Scheduled Payment Release Days

Used to determine the number of days prior to issuance for the scheduled payment to be created in suspense.

Numeric value. Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Send Tasks to Inside Adjuster

Determines if the system generated tasks for scheduled payments will be sent to the Inside Adjuster assigned to the feature / coverage or to the user who created the Scheduled Payment cycle instead.

True = The task is assigned to the Inside Adjuster assigned to the feature / coverage of the Scheduled Pay Cycle.
False = It will be sent to the user who created the scheduled payment cycle instead.

False = It will be sent to the user who created the scheduled payment cycle instead.

Submission

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Features / Coverages

This determines if Features / Coverages can be added to the First Notice of Loss (on the claimant).

False = Features / Coverages cannot be added on the First Notice of Loss (claimant).
True = Features / Coverages can be added on the First Notice of Loss (claimant).

True = Features / Coverages can be added on the First Notice of Loss (claimant).

Allow Pend

This determines if your company will allow claims to be "Pended."

False = Disable.
True = Enable. If the system setting is turned on, a Pend button will appear on the Loss Notice toolbar. If the user has the authority, "Delete Pending," (Claims Submission), they are allowed to delete a "Pending" claim from the Claims tab of the policy.  

True = Enable.

Automatically Add Listed Units for LOB Ids

When used, this setting adds all vehicles, properties, motorcycles, watercraft (i.e., those items listed on the policy) to the Loss Notice / Claim Detail.

Implementation Specific.

2, 3, 13, 17 (Note: These line ids represent the different lines of business. They must be separated with commas.)

Default Loss Date to System Date on New Claim

Determines if the Loss Date defaults to the System Date when entering a new claim.

False = The Loss Date will not default to the System Date when entering a new claim.
True = False = The Loss Date will default to the System Date when entering a new claim.

False = The Loss Date will not default to the System Date when entering a new claim.

Default Web Loss Notice Note Type

Designates which Note Type will be given to notes submitted via the Web Claims Loss Notice Submission.

Implementation Specific.

0 = Agent Note Type

Enable Claims Made

Used to determine if "Claims Made Claims" are allowed in the system or not.

False = "Claims Made Claims" are not enabled / allowed in the Claims System.

True = When enabled and the user has the authority, "Submit Claims Made Claim, " (Claim Submission group), user can submit a Loss Notice as a "Claims Made" (versus Occurrence) claim. A "Claims Made Claim" will only display claims made coverages.

False = "Claims Made Claims" are not enabled / allowed in the Claims System.

New Loss Queue ID

This designates the ID of the Workflow Queue a company wants their new losses from the Web to be assigned to.

Implementation Specific; user defined. Used for Agency Web Submission.

3 = New Loss Queue.

Populate Location Address with Listed Property

When used, this populates the Loss Location in the Loss Notice with the address of the property that is listed on the policy. It loads the property marked as the "Primary Location," or if no properties are designated as the "Primary Location," it then loads the location of the property with the lowest location_num.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 

True = Enable.

Require Actual Return to Work Date

Used to determine if an Actual Return to Work Date is required for a Workers Comp claim submission.

False = The Actual Return to Work Date is not required for claim submission.

True = he Actual Return to Work Date is required for claim submission.

False = The Actual Return to Work Date is not required for claim submission.

Require Adjuster

Determines if an adjuster is required for claim submission or not.

False = Disable; do not require an adjuster.
True = Enable; require an adjuster. The Adjuster field is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

True = Enable; require an adjuster.

Require Admin

Determines if a supervisor is required for claim submission or not.

False = Disable; do not require supervisor.
True = Enable; require supervisor. The Admin field is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

True = Enable; require an administrator.

Require Admin Asst

Determines if an administrative assistant is required for claim submission or not.

False = Disable; do not require administrative assistant.
True = Enable; require administrative assistant. The Admin Asst field is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

True = Enable; require administrative assistant.

Require Claimant

Determines of a claimant is required on claim submission.

False = Claimant not required.

True = Claimant required.

False = Claimant not required.

Require Claimant Relationship

Determines of a claimant's relationship is required on claim submission.

False = Claimant's relationship not required.

True = Claimant's relationship required.

False = Claimant's relationship not required.

Require Contact Information

Determines if the insured's phone number and the contact's first name, last name and phone number is required if any contact information is given.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Require Degree of Fault

Used to determine if Degree of Fault is required on claim submission.

False = Degree of Fault not required.

True = Degree of fault is required.

False = Degree of Fault not required.

Require Degree of Fault on Fast Track

This setting determines if the Degree of Fault field is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field when submitting a "Fast Track" claim.  (Please Note: This setting is independent of the setting, "Require Degree of Fault," in the Claims / Claim Closure folder.)

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable. Diamond Base System
False = Disable. For all other Diamond client systems.

Require Disposition on Fast Track

This setting determines if the Require Disposition field is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field when submitting a "Fast Track" claim.  (Please Note: This setting is independent of the setting, "Require Disposition," in the Claims / Claim Closure folder.)

False = Disable.

True = Enable. Users will not be able to submit the "Fast Track" claim with the Disposition blank, an Undetermined Disposition or None Reported selected.

True = Enable. Diamond Base System.
False = Disable. For all other Diamond client systems.

Require Estimated Return to Work Date

Determines if an Estimated Return to Work Date is required for a Workers Comp claim submission.

False = Require Estimated Return to Work Date is not required.

True = Require Estimated Return to Work Date is required.

False = Require Estimated Return to Work Date is not required.

Require Insured Phone Information

Determines if the system requires the policyholder's phone information or not.

False = Policyholder's phone information is not required.

True = Policyholder's phone information is required.

False = Policyholder's phone information is not required.

Require Listed Vehicle

This is used to determine if the system will require that a listed vehicle is added to the Auto Loss Notice.

Implementation Specific.

False = Disable.

Require Loss Indicator

Determines if a loss indicator must be selected for CLUE vehicles before the claim may be closed.

False = Loss indicator is not required.

True = Loss indicator is required.

False = Loss indicator is not required.

Require Loss Location City / State

Determines if users are required to enter the loss location city / state in order to submit a claim.

False = Disable; not required.
True = Enable; required for claim submission.

True = Enable.

Require Loss Time

At claim submission, requires the entry of time of loss.

False = Disable; do not require time of loss.
True = Enable; require time of loss.

False = Disable; do not require time of loss.

Require Salvage Adjuster

Determines if a salvage adjuster is required at claim submission.

False = A salvage adjuster is not required at claim submission.
True = A salvage adjuster is required at claim submission

False = A salvage adjuster is not required at claim submission.

Require Severity (Type or Level)

Determines if a severity level is required on claim submission or not.

False = Disable; do not require severity level.
True = Enable; require severity level.

False = Disable; do not require severity level.

Require SIU Adjuster

Determines if an SIU adjuster is a required selection on the Personnel tab in order for a claim to be submitted. If required, the SIU adjuster field is marked with an asterisk (*)indicating "Required" field.

False = Disable. Do not require an SIU adjuster.
True = Enable. Require an SIU adjuster.

False = Disable.

Require Subro Adjuster

Determines if a Subro adjuster is required when submitting a Loss Notice.

False = Subro Adjuster is not required.
True = Subro Adjuster is required.

False = Subro Adjuster is not required.

Require Tracking Type

At claim submission, requires selection of a Tracking Type.

False = Disable; do not require Tracking Type.
True = Enable; require Tracking Type.

False = Disable; do not require Tracking Type.

Submit on Cancelled Policy

This determines if a claim can be set up when the date of loss is after the cancel date of the policy but still within the original policy period. For example, a 12 month policy has a term of 01/01 - 12/31. It is cancelled on 07/15. This option allows users with authority to submit a claim from 07/15 - 12/31. The claim is "Record Only." Additionally, users (with authority) can change the status of the features and make loss payments.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Submit on Future Policy

Used to determine if a Loss Notice can be submitted on a policy having a Future Transaction Effective Date.

False = Disable. Do not allow a Loss Notice to be submitted on a "Future" policy.
True = Enable. A claim can be submitted on a policy with a status of Future. The user is warned that the claim is being added to a policy with a Future status and that the claim will be Record Only.  Only a user with the “Claim Detail / Edit for Record Only” authority will be able to change the claim type if the claim type is “Record Only” (on the Loss Notice or Claim Detail).

True = Enable.

Submit on Pending Policy

This is used to determine if a claim can be set up when only a “Pending” policy exists for the Date of Loss.

False = A claim cannot be set up on a “Pending” policy.
True = A claim can be set up when only a “Pending” policy exists for the Date of Loss.

False = A claim cannot be set up on a “Pending” policy.

Use Recent Image

Enables / disables an authorized adjuster or user to submit a "Record Only" claim against a policy that is out of term. For example, there is a 6 month policy from 01/01 - 06/30. The policy is not renewed. A claim having a date of loss after 06/30 can be added even though there is no policy image. Even though its status is "Record Only," users can change the record only status of the features and make loss payments.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enables a user with authority the ability to submit a "Record Only" claim against a policy term that is out of term.

Validate Reinstatement on Submission

This determines if the system returns a warning message for any claim submitted on a reinstated policy when the reinstatement is within + / - 5 days of the date of loss. The warning message occurs after the policy number / date of loss is entered prior to the claim submission (Loss Notice) screen being loaded. The error message includes the effective date of the reinstatement.

False = Disable.

True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Claim No

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Auto Generate

Enables or disables the claim number button after generating one claim number using company specific rules for assignment of claim numbers.

False = Disable the claim number button after generating one claim number using company specific rules for assignment of claim numbers.
True = Enable the claim number button after generating one claim number using company specific rules for assignment of claim numbers.

True = Enable the claim number button after generating one claim number using company specific rules for assignment of claim numbers.

Allow Manual

Used to allow or disallow the entry of manual claim numbers in the system.

False = Disable; do not allow entry of manual claim numbers.

True = Enable; allow entry of manual claim numbers.

False = Disable; do not allow entry of manual claim numbers.

Auto Generate Only One

Allows the claim number button to be enabled or disabled after generating one claim number.

False = Disable the claim number button after generating one claim number.
True = Enable the claim number after generating one claim number.

True = Enable the claim number after generating one claim number.

Workflow

Fields

Function / Value

Options

Default

Admin Review Again in X Days

A numeric value that represents the number of due days the task should be reviewed in.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

25

Admin Review Enabled

Used to determine if an interval diary is automatically sent to the supervisor and adjuster at Claim Submission. The interval diary may then be viewed when View Tasks is chosen from the Claim Detail main menu toolbar.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Admin Review Every X Days

A numeric value used to determine when the task should be re-created.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

30

Special Note About: The system settings that follow. In order to use the functionality to send an Email along with the Workflow Task, you must set the "Notify XXX" to "1" - Enable in this group of settings. So, for example, if you wish the Admin of the claim to receive an Email, you must set the "Notify Admin" setting to "1" - Enable. Additionally, you must enter the Admin's Email address in the user specified as the Administrator in Diamond Administration: User Setup. If no Email address is entered, an Email will not be sent even though both settings are set to "1" - Enable.

Email Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the adjuster on submission of a Loss Notice.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Admin

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the administrator on submission of a Loss Notice.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Outside Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the outside adjuster on submission of a Loss Notice.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Salvage Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the salvage adjuster on submission of a Loss Notice.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.

Email SIU Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the SIU adjuster on submission of a Loss Notice.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

Email Subro Adjuster

Determines if an Email is sent with the Workflow task to the Subro adjuster on submission of a Loss Notice.

False = Disable; do not send an Email with the Workflow Task.
True = Enable; send an Email with the Workflow Task.

False = Disable.

 

Flag Tasks as Urgent

This is used to determine if all tasks created from workflow submission should be flagged as “Urgent.”

False = No tasks from workflow submission are flagged as “Urgent.”

True = All tasks from workflow submission are flagged as “Urgent.”

False = No tasks from workflow submission are flagged as “Urgent.”

Notify Adjuster

Determines if a workflow item is sent to an adjuster upon claim submission.

False = Disable; do not send workflow item to adjuster upon claim submission.
True = Enable; send workflow item to adjuster upon claim submission.

True = Enable; send workflow item to adjuster upon claim submission.

Notify Adjuster Remark

Allows user customization of assignment diary sent to inside adjuster.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

New Claim Assignment.

Notify Admin

Determines if a workflow item is sent to an administrator upon claim submission.

False = Disable; do not send workflow item to administrator upon claim submission.
True = Enable; send workflow item to administrator upon claim submission.

True = Enable; send workflow item to administrator upon claim submission.

Notify Admin Remark

Allows user customization of assignment diary sent to administrator.

Implementation Specific; user defined description of automated claim diary.

New Claim Assignment.

Notify Outside Adjuster

Determines if an automatic claims diary is generated when assignment of an outside adjuster occurs on claim submission. The new workflow diary may be viewed on the Tasks screen.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify Outside Adjuster Remark

This is the remark (notification) sent to the outside adjuster on the automatic claims diary when an outside adjuster has been re-assigned.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

New Claim Assignment.

Notify Salvage Adjuster

Determines if an automatic claims diary is generated when assignment of a salvage adjuster occurs on claim submission. The new workflow diary may be viewed on the Tasks screen.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify Salvage Adjuster Remark

This is the remark (notification) sent to the salvage adjuster on the automatic claims diary when a salvage adjuster has been re-assigned.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Coverage Assignment

Notify SIU Adjuster

Determines if an automatic claims diary is generated when assignment of an SIU adjuster occurs on claim submission. The new workflow diary may be viewed on the Tasks screen.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Notify SIU Adjuster Remark

This is the remark (notification) sent to the SIU adjuster on the automatic claims diary when an SIU adjuster has been re-assigned.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

SIU Assignment.

Notify Subro Adjuster

Determines if Diamond  generates an automated claims diary (not task) to the Subro adjuster selected on the Personnel tab during claims submission.

False = Disable; do not generate a claims diary.
True = Enable; automatically generate a claims diary.

True = Enable; automatically generate a claims diary.

Notify Subro Adjuster Remark

 If a claims diary is automatically generated to a Subro adjuster, this is the message displayed notifying the Subro adjuster.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

New Subro Assignment.

Outside Adjuster Review Again in X Days

A numeric value that represents the number of due days the task should be reviewed in by the outside adjuster.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

25

Outside Adjuster Review Enabled

Used to determine if an interval diary is automatically sent to the outside adjuster at Claim Submission. The interval diary may then be viewed when View Tasks is chosen from the Claim Detail main menu toolbar.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Outside Adjuster Review Every X Days

A numeric value used to determine when the task should be re-created for the outside adjuster.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

30

Review Again in X Days

Depending on the number of days, this is used to define the number of days when a claim is to be reviewed next.

Numeric. User defined number of days.

25

Review Defaulted

Determines if the workflow check boxes, Review Again and Review Every, on the Loss Notice screen default with a check mark. If checked, this sends an interval claim diary to the inside adjuster assigned to the claim.

False = Disable; do not default check marks.
True = Enable; default check marks.

True = Enable; default check marks.

Review Enabled

Enable or disable the Workflow Section of the Loss Notice screen.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Review Every X Days

Sets the number of days for subsequent workflow follow up.

Implementation Specific; user defined

30

Transaction

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Adjust Reserve on Partial Payment

This is used to determine if the minimum reserves should be used for a partial payment, or if the adjuster should be forced to pend the transaction and manually adjust the reserves. Please Note: To also set a minimum reserve amount, you will have to set the "Minimum Automatic Loss Reserve," the "Minimum Automatic Expense Reserve" and the "Minimum Automatic ALAE Reserve" system settings to a dollar amount.

False = Disables the soft error warning that the minimum reserve will be used, and the system will return a hard error indicating that the payment would cause a negative reserve.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Allow Pend

Determines if a user can manually pend a claim transaction or not.

False = Disable; do not allow user to manually pend a claim transaction.
True = Enable; allow user to manually pend a claim transaction.

True = Enable; allow user to manually pend a claim transaction.

Allow Split Transactions

Allows the function Split Coding per Claimant for Transactions and Payments to be used.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Allow Supplemental ALAE Payment on Closed Claim

Determines if a user can process a supplemental ALAE payment on a closed claim.

False = Disable; do not allow user to process supplemental ALAE payment on a closed claim.
True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental ALAE payment on a closed claim.

True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental ALAE payment on a closed claim.

Allow Supplemental ALAE Payment on Closed Feature

Determines if a user can process a supplemental ALAE payment on a closed feature.

False = Disable; do not allow user to process supplemental ALAE payment on a closed feature.
True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental ALAE payment on a closed feature.

True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental ALAE payment on a closed feature.

Allow Supplemental Indemnity Payment on Closed Claim

Determines if a user can process a supplemental indemnity payment on a closed claim.

False = Disable; do not allow user to process supplemental indemnity payment on a closed claim.
True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental indemnity payment on a closed claim.

True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental indemnity payment on a closed claim.

Allow Supplemental Indemnity Payment on Closed Feature

Determines if a user can process a supplemental indemnity payment on a closed feature.

False = Disable; do not allow user to process supplemental indemnity payment on a closed feature.
True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental indemnity payment on a closed feature.

True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental indemnity payment on a closed feature.

Allow Supplemental Non-ALAE Payment on Closed Claim

Determines if a user can process a supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed claim.

False = Disable; do not allow user to process supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed claim.
True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed claim.

True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed claim.

Allow Supplemental Non-ALAE Payment on Closed Feature

Determines if a user can process a supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed feature.

False = Disable; do not allow user to process supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed feature.
True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed feature.

True = Enable; allow user to process supplemental non-ALAE payment on a closed feature.

Allow Void on Non Printed Check

Determines if a non-printed / exported claim payment can be voided.

False = Disable.

True = Enable. If set to "1," the user must also have the authority to "Void Checks" in User Setup.

True = Enable.

Capture Void Reason

Determines if Diamond captures and displays the reason a transaction was voided on the Voided Transactions Detail screen.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 

True = Enable.

Check for Duplicate Payment

Used to determine if the system checks for duplicate payments within the same category with the same amount.

False =The system will not check for a duplicate payment within the same category with the same amount.
True = The system will check for a duplicate payment within the same category with the same amount.

True = The system will check for a duplicate payment within the same category with the same amount.

Check for Duplicate Reserve

Determines if the system checks for duplicate payment amounts on the same coverage to the same “Pay to the Order of” and for reserves for the same amount under the same claimant & feature.

False =  The system does not check for duplicate reserves and payments. No validation is returned.

True =  The system will check for duplicate reserves and payments and return a validation.

False =  The system does not check for duplicate reserves and payments. No validation is returned.

Claim Payment Form Default

Determines the default value (Check or Draft) in the Claim Payment Form combo box on claim payment transactions.

1 = Checks.
2 = Drafts.

1 = Checks.

Default Expense Payment Types

Determines if the Claim Transaction Type defaults to “Final” when there is an open Expense Reserve.

False = The Loss Payment Type on an open Expense Reserve defaults to “Partial.”
True =  The Loss Payment Type on an open Expense Reserve defaults to “Final.”

False = The Loss Payment Type on an open Expense Reserve defaults to “Partial.

Default ALAE Payment to Final

This defaults the Claim Transaction Payment Type to "Final" when there is an open ALAE Reserve.

False = Claim Transaction Payment Type does not default to "Final" when an ALAE Reserve exists.

True = Claim Transaction Payment Type does defaults to "Final" when an ALAE Reserve exists.

False = Claim Transaction Payment Type does not default to "Final" when an ALAE Reserve exists.

Default Expense Payment to Final

This defaults the Claim Transaction Payment Type to "Final" when there is an open Expense Reserve.

False = Claim Transaction Payment Type does not default to "Final" when an open Expense Reserve exists.

True = Claim Transaction Payment Type defaults to "Final" when an open Expense Reserve exists.

False = Claim Transaction Payment Type does not default to "Final" when an open Expense Reserve exists.

Default Loss Payment to Final

Determines if the Claim Transaction Payment Type defaults to “Final” when there is an open Loss Reserve.

False = The Claim Transaction Payment Type defaults to “Partial” on an open Loss Reserve.
True = The Claim Transaction Payment Type defaults to “Final” on an open Loss Reserve.

False = The Claim Transaction Payment Type defaults to “Partial” on an open Loss Reserve.

Display Check Number for Recovery Transaction

Enables the ability to display, capture and save the check number for Recovery transactions.

False = Do not display, capture or save the check number.

True = display, capture or save the check number for a Recovery transaction.

False = Do not display, capture or save the check number.

Expense Payments Supplemental

Determines if the pay type of supplemental is returned in place of partial and final for expense payments (ALAE and ULAE).

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.

True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Import Path

This is used to determine the location for the directory for importing transactions from a file.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Temp

Interest # of Days (Number of Days for Interest Penalties)

Used with the Interest Notification on Loss Payments functionality. Determines the number of days that will be used to calculate if the warning message is displayed. This is the number of days subtracted from the current date and then compared to the reported date.

User defined.

90 (Days)

Interest Message (Validation Message for Interest Penalties)

Used with the Interest Notification on Loss Payments functionality. This is the text displayed in the warning that is returned to the user on a loss payment.

User defined.

"Payment is 90 days after the Reported Date - Interest May Apply."

Minimum Automatic ALAE Reserve

The minimum amount you would like your ALAE / DCC reserve to reach when processing a partial payment. Note: Disabling the "Adjust Reserve on Partial Payment" setting will disable this option.

 Implementation Specific; user defined. This is a dollar amount.

0 (Dollar amount)

Minimum Automatic Expense Reserve

The minimum amount you would like your ULAE / AO expense reserve to reach when processing a partial payment. Note: Disabling the "Adjust Reserve on Partial Payment" setting will disable this option.

Implementation Specific; user defined. This is a dollar amount.

0 (Dollar amount)

Minimum Automatic Loss Reserve

 The minimum amount you would like your loss reserve to reach when processing a partial payment. Note: Disabling the "Adjust Reserve on Partial Payment" setting will disable this option.

Implementation Specific; user defined. This is a dollar amount.

0 (Dollar amount)

Notify Adjuster of Auto Reserve Change

Determines whether or not a diary is sent to the Adjuster when a reserve change is made resulting from the reserve balance falling below the minimum balance when a payment is made.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Notify Adjuster of Auto Reserve Change Remark

Remark that will appear in the diary generated above.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

"Diary to IA for Auto Reserve Adjust."

Notify Admin of Auto Reserve Change

Determines whether or not a diary is sent to the administrator when a reserve change is made resulting from the reserve balance falling below the minimum balance when a payment is made.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Notify Admin of Auto Reserve Change Remark

Remark that will appear in the diary generated above.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

"The claim reserve was automatically updated."

PTTOO Characters per Line

The number of characters per each line of the PTTOO.

Up to 255 for all lines (lines x char <= 255)

60

PTTOO Lines Exceeded Message

The message displayed to the user when they exceed the allowed characters/lines for the PTTOO text.

User defined.

“Pay to the Order of may not exceed 60 characters”

 

PTTOO Number of Lines

The number of lines printed on a check for the PTTOO field.  Used in verification and display of the PTTOO field

1 through 5

 2

Require Claimant Address on Medicare Coverage

Used to determine if the system will not allow a blank claimant address when making a claims payment on injury / Medicare coverage.

False = The claimant address is not required when issuing a Loss Payment on a coverage that is flagged as Medicare Liability.

True = The claimant address is required when issuing a Loss Payment on a coverage that is flagged as Medicare Liability.

False = The claimant address is not required when issuing a Loss Payment on a coverage that is flagged as Medicare Liability.

Require CMS Query Fields on Medicare Coverage

This is used to determine if the claimant first name, last name, date of birth, gender, and social security number are required when making a claims payment on injury / Medicare coverage.

False = The CMS Query fields (claimant first name, last name,date of birth, gender and social security number) are not required.

True = The CMS Query fields (claimant first name, last name,date of birth, gender and social security number) are required.

True = The CMS Query fields (claimant first name, last name,date of birth, gender and social security number) are required.

Require Void Reason

Determines if the system requires the entry of a reason for a claim transaction's void.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 False = Disable.

 

Reserve Required for Payment on Claim Reported X Days

When making a partial loss payment on a claim that has been open for X # of days, this determines if a reserve amount must be added or not.

True = A reserve amount is required and a validation is returned.
False = A reserve amount is not required and the system does not return a validation.

False = A reserve amount is not required and the system does not return a validation.

Reserve Required for Payment on Claim with X Paid Amount

When making a partial loss payment on a claim that has X amount of loss payments, this determines if a reserve amount is required or not.

True = A reserve amount is required to be added and a validation is returned.
False = A reserve amount is not required and the system does not return a validation.

False = A reserve amount is not required and the system does not return a validation.

Show Minimum Reserve Validation

This also works with the system setting, "Adjust Reserve on Partial Payments (Claims / Transaction folder. It is used to suppress the validation message that is received so that it can be used in situations where reserves are not used.

True = The validation message is shown.
False = No validation is displayed.

False = No validation is displayed.

Stop Payment

Enables or disables the Stop Pay functionality. In Version 4.32, this was updated to include the Void Payment function. This determines if the system prompts the user if they have the check in their possession when the Void option is selected. If "Yes," the system voids the check using the same authorities as before. If a user does not have the check in their possession, the system prompts the user if they want to order a Stop Pay. If "Yes," the Stop Payment function is called using same authorities as before. If they do not have the authority, the user is returned to the Transaction screen.

False = Disable Stop Payment / Void Payment.
True = Enable Stop Payment / Void Payment.

True = Enable Stop Payment / Void Payment.

Validate and Assign Default Subro Adjuster

When issuing a Loss Payment, if the coverage or sub coverage field, "Validate Subro Adjuster,” is flagged, then the system validates and assigns a default Subro adjuster to the feature / coverage.

False = Validate Subro field not flagged, the system does not validate or assign a subro adjuster to the feature / coverage.

True =The coverage or sub coverage field, "Validate Subro Adjuster,” is flagged, the system validates and assigns a default Subro adjuster to the feature / coverage.

False = Validate Subro field not flagged, the system does not validate or assign a subro adjuster to the feature / coverage.

Validate Interest Date

Used with Interest Notification on Loss Payments functionality.

False = Disable.

True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Validate Last Day of Month for Check Issuance

Indicates whether to validate that the user has authority to issue a check on the last day of the business month.

False = The system does not validate that the user has authority to issue a check on the last day of the business month.

True = The system validates that the user has authority to issue a check on the last day of the business month.

False = The system des not validate that the user has authority to issue a check on the last day of the business month.

Close Feature

Fields

Function / Value

Options

Default

Recovery Types

System setting allows entry of recovery type ids that, when selected, close the feature; works similar to a final payment.

Blank; not recommended for feature / coverage closures.

Blank

List

Fields

Function / Value

Options

Default

Show Effective Signed Amounts

Determines if a transaction displays based on its financial effect (e.g., Credit transactions display as negative amount)

False = Disable; when the transaction is shown with the sign entered for that transaction (e.g., a negative sign is only displayed if a user entered a negative number.)
True = Enable; the effective sign of the transaction, which is determined by the financial effect on the transaction, is displayed.

True = Enable.

Manual Check

Fields

Function / Value

Options

Default

Require Mail To

Determines if a Mail To name and address is required on a manual claim check.  

False = Disable; do not require a Mail To name and address.
True = Enable; Mail To name and address required.

True = Enable; Mail To name and address required on a manual claim check.

Require Payee

Used to determine if a payee is required on a manual claim check.

False = Disable; do not require payee on manual claim check.
True = Enable; require payee on manual claim check.

True = Enable; require payee on manual claim check.

Require PTTOO (Require Pay to the Order Of)

Determines if a Pay To The Order Of is required on a manual claim check.

False = Disable; do not require a Pay To The Order of.
True = Enable; require a Pay To The Order Of.

True = Enable; Pay To The Order Of required on a manual claim check.

Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Note

Determines if a claim note should be added when a Claim Transaction is processed.

False = Disable; do not add a claim note when a Claim Transaction is processed.
True = Enable; add a claim note when a Claim Transaction is processed.

True = Enable; add a claim note when a Claim Transaction is processed.

Auto Note

Determines if a claim note is automatically added to a new claim transaction or not.

False = Do not automatically add a claim note to a new claim transaction.
True = Automatically add a claim note to a new claim transaction.

True = Automatically add a claim note to a new claim transaction.

Payee

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Auto Delete Mail-To

This determines if the system will automatically delete the Mail-To associated (same claimpayee_id) with the Payee. When set to "0" (Disable), the system will prompt if the Mail-To should be deleted.

False = The system will prompt if the Mail-To should be deleted.

True = The system automatically deletes the Mail-To associated with the Payee.

True = The system automatically deletes the Mail-To associated with the Payee.

Auto Populate 1st Party Claimant to Transaction

Determines if the first party claimant is automatically added to the loss payment.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Disable.

Auto Populate 3rd Party Claimant to Transaction

Determines if the third party claimant is automatically added to the loss payment.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Auto Populate AI (Additional Interest) to Transaction

Determines if an  additional interest is automatically added to a loss payment.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

 

True = Enable.

Auto Populate Insureds to Transaction

This allows a user to automatically add the insured (s) information from the policy. It also allows the users to automatically populate the insured as payees on specified transactions rather than automatically populating 1st party claimants.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

 

Default 1st Auto Payee as Mail-To

Determines if the 1st automatically added party defaults as the Mail-To on the loss payment.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Delete Pending Payee # of Days

This defines the number of days when "Pending" payees are deleted in "batch" form during the End of Month Process: "Delete Payees in "Pending" Status After <#> Days."

Implementation Specific; user defined.

90

Display Levy Information

Determines whether the W-9 information is displayed on the Add Payee screen.

 

False = Disable. The Levy information is not displayed.
True = Enable. The Levy information is displayed.

 

True = Enable. The Levy information is displayed.

 

Levy Notification

Determines the Levy information message.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

"Notify Accounting of Check Details."

Require B-Notice Information

Determines whether the W-9 information is shown on the Add Payee screen.

False = Disable. The B-Notice information is not required.
True = Enable. The B-Notice information is required.

False = Disable. The B-Notice information is not required.

Require W9 Information

Determines whether the W-9 information is required on the Add Payee screen.

False = Disable. The W9 information is not required.
True = Enable. The W9 information is required.

False = Disable. The W9 information is not required.

Show B-Notice Information

Determines whether the B-Notice information is shown on the Add Payee screen.

False = Disable. The B-Notice information is not displayed.
True = Enable. The B-Notice information is displayed.

 

True = Enable. The B-Notice information is displayed.

Show W9 Information

Determines whether the W-9 information is shown on the Add Payee screen.

False = Disable. The W9 information is not displayed.
True = Enable. The W9 information is displayed.

True = Enable. The W9 information is displayed.

Remarks

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Allow Edit After Issuance

Determines if users are allowed to edit remarks on issued checks and transactions.

False = Disable; do not allow edit.
True = Enable; allow edit.

True = Enable; allow edit.

Check and Stub Character Limit

The additional number of characters from the remark field that will print on the check stub.

Up to 255, but not exceeding 255 between the number of characters on the check and the number of characters on the check stub.

- 1

Check Character Limit

The number of characters from the remark that will print on the claim check.

Up to 255, but not exceeding 255 between the number of characters on the check and the number of characters on the check stub.

-1

Exceed Character Limit Prevent Issuance

Determines whether or not a transaction can be issued when the payment exceeds the allowed characters from printing on both the check and stub.

 False = Disable; warns user of validation error but issues transaction.
True = Enable; warns user of validation error and prevents transaction issuance.

False = Disable; warns user of validation error but issues transaction.

Exceed Check And Stub Character Limit Warning

Warning message received by user when exceeding the character limit for check stub.

User defined.

“You have exceeded the character limit for check and stub printing. Additional text will not appear on the check stub.”

Exceed Check Character Limit Warning

Warning message received by user when exceeding the character limit for check.

User defined.

“You have exceeded the character limit for check printing.  Additional text will appear on the check stub.”

Workflow

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Approval Enabled

Determines if workflow tasks are generated when tasks are approved.

False = Workflow tasks are not generated.

True = Generate workflow tasks.

True = Generate workflow tasks.

Approve / Reject at Task / Diary Level

Determines if the option to approve or reject transactions are available on the approval / rejection Diary.

False = The option to approve or reject transactions are not available on the approval / rejection Diary.

True = The option to approve or reject transactions are available on the approval / rejection Diary.

True = The option to approve or reject transactions are available on the approval / rejection Diary.

Pending Approval - Enabled

Determines if workflow tasks are generated when tasks are pended for approval.

False = Disable; do not create tasks.
True = Enable; generate tasks.

True = Enable.

Pending Issuance - Enabled

Determines if workflow tasks are generated when tasks are pended for issuance.

False = Disable; do not create tasks.
True = Enable; generate tasks.

True = Enable.

Rejected Enabled

Determines if workflow tasks are generated when tasks are rejected.

False = Workflow tasks are not generated.

True = Generate workflow tasks.

True = Generate workflow tasks.

Skip Admin Asst

Determines whether or not a "Pending Approval" transaction workflow is sent to the admin asst or directly to the administrator.

False = Disable; send the "Pending Approval" workflow item to the admin asst.
True = Enable; send the "Pending Approval" workflow item directly to the administrator.

True = Enable; send the pending approval workflow item directly to the administrator.

Validate Vehicle Loss Indicator Completed

This is used to determine if a validation will appear when a user goes to issue a loss payment transaction on property damage type features.

False = No validation will be displayed.
True = a validation will be shown when a user issues a loss payment transaction on property damage type features.

False = No validation will be displayed.

Comparative Rating

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Always Create Bridging URL

Determines whether Bridging URL will be created or not even if there are errors.

False = Bridging URL will be not be created even if there are errors.

True = Bridging URL will be created even if there are errors.

False = Bridging URL will be not be created even if there are errors.

Create Error Log Records for Invalid Credentials and Agency Code

This is used to control whether the Comparative Rater invalid credentials and agency code are logged on the Error Log table or not.

False = No records are created or passed.
True = Informational error log records will be created whenever the user name / password or agency code passed from the Comparative Raters is invalid.

False = No records are created or passed.

Credit Score Days

This is the valid number of days to pull credit score from existing records.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

90

Get Credit Score
 
Enables credit score ordering during comparative rating.

False = Credit score ordering is not enabled during comparative rating.

True = Credit score ordering is enabled during comparative rating.

False = Credit score ordering is not enabled during comparative rating.

Include Authentication in Url Indicates whether or not to include the authentication token as a parameter in the Policy Bridging Url.

False = The authentication token is not included as a parameter.
True = The authentication token is included as a parameter.

True = The authentication token is included as a parameter.

Include Payment info on Rating Failure Indicates whether or not to include the payment options in the response if rating fails

False = Payment options are not included in the response.
True = Payment options are included in the response.

True = Payment options are included in the response.

Include Policy Number in Url Indicates whether or not to include the policy number as a parameter in the Policy Bridging Url.

False = Policy number is not included in the URL.
True = Policy number is included in the URL.

True = Policy number is included in the URL.

Include Response Url on Rating Failure Indicates whether or not to include the Policy Bridging Url in the response if rating fails.

False = The Policy Bridging URL is not included in the response if rating fails.
True = The Policy Bridging URL is included in the response if rating fails.

True = The Policy Bridging URL is included in the response if rating fails.

Lookup KY Tax Code Enables tax location lookup during comparative rating.

False = Tax location lookup is not enabled during comparative rating. True = Tax location lookup is enabled during comparative rating.

False = Tax location lookup is not enabled during comparative rating.

Min Tax Threshold The minimum tax confidence factor that will be accepted during tax lookup. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Policy Bridging Url URL for accepting a comparative rating quote. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Workflow Queue Assignment Stored Procedure Stored procedure called after data conversion to assign proper workflow queue to policy. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank

Controls

Accidents Violations

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Show Non-Chargeable Violations By Default

Used to determine if non-chargeable violations will be hidden or shown by default on the Accidents / Violations screen in Personal Auto.

False = The non-chargeable violations will be hidden by default on the Accidents & Violations screen; users will have to click the button to show them.  
True = The non-chargeable violations will be shown by default on the Accidents & Violations screen; users will have to click the button to hide them.

True = The non-chargeable violations will be shown by default on the Accidents & Violations screen; users will have to click the button to hide them.

Additional Interest

Field

Value / Function

Options

Default

Always Use Single Entry

Used to determine if “Single Entry” is always used for additional interests on the Web.

False = Do not use single entry for additional interest lists on the Web.

True =Use single entry for additional interest lists on the Web.

False = Do not use single entry for additional interest lists on the Web.

Enable Deletion for Global AI (Additional Interests)

This determines if a user is allowed delete an additional interest from the databases as long as it is not associated with a policy.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable. Allow a user to delete an additional interest from the databases as long as it is not associated with a policy.

Include Single Entry for Global AI (Additional Interests) Lookup

This setting determines if the system will return the entire list of additional interests including those that are marked as "Single Entry." (Note: Currently, these cannot be accessed from the policy side.)

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Limit Additional Interest by Agency

 

Allows agency users to lookup and view only the additional interests their agency users have created.

Implementation Specific.
True = Enable.
False = Disable.

False = Disable. Agency users see all additional interests listed in the system.

Limit Additional Interest Lookup Return to 250

It is used to determine if the system limits the number of additional interests in the lookup to 250 or presents all matches meeting the search criteria. Additionally, if the search criteria is limited, the system returns a message to the user: "Refine Your Lookup Criteria."

Implementation Specific.

False = Disable.

True = Enable.

True = Enable.

 

Agency

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Limit Agencies Returned to 100

This determines if the Agency Search function on the Agency Setup screen limits a return of 100 agencies in the list view. If the agency they are looking for is not displayed in the list view, users may then use the lookup function to find the agency instead.

0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.

0 = Disable.

Employee Info

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Lookup

This is used to determine if the Lookup button on the Employment Information screen is hidden or displayed.

0 = Disable; hide the Lookup button.

1 = Enable; show the Lookup button.

0 = Disable.

Inland Marine Location Info
(Note: A company specific Inland Marine Location Info system setting will need to be added by each implementation that uses this line of business.)

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Lookup

This is used to determine if the Lookup button on the Inland Marine Location Information screen is hidden or displayed.

0 = Disable; hide the Lookup button.

1 = Enable; show the Lookup button.

0 = Disable.

Loss History

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Lock Description Unless Manually Entered

On the Loss History screen, this determines if the Description field is locked unless it is a "manually" entered loss.

False = The field is not locked, because it is a "manually" entered loss.
True = Lock the Description field; this is not a "manually" entered loss.

False = The field is not locked, because it is a "manually" entered loss.

Loss History Summary

Determines if users can view and edit the Loss History Summary records.

False = Disable. If this is set to "0" (Disable), the radio buttons (Summary & Detail on the Loss History list view) are not displayed.
True = Enable. When this setting is enabled, the radio buttons, "Summary" and "Detail" are displayed; "Summary" is the default value. Losses listed having the same claim numbers and loss dates are combined into one (1) loss with descriptions concatenated and amounts summed. Allows users to view and edit (most of the fields) the Loss History Summary records, in addition to the functionality that already exists for individual loss history records. The only fields that are not editable for Summary records are Amounts and Loss Description.

False = Disable.

Loss History Summary Save

Used to determine if the UI should summarize the Loss History records on “Save.” Both the “Loss History Summary” and “Loss History Summary Save” should NOT be enabled at the same time.

False = The UI will not summarize the Loss History records on “Save.”
True = The UI will summarize the Loss History records on “Save.”

False = The UI will not summarize the Loss History records on “Save.”

Name Control

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Address Lookup

Controls if the Address Lookup Link is visible next to the Address Information section of the Application Submission Request screen.

False = The Address Lookup Link is visible next to the Address Information section of the Application Submission Request screen.
True = The Address Lookup Link is visible next to the Address Information section of the Application Submission Request screen.

True = The Address Lookup Link is visible next to the Address Information section of the Application Submission Request screen.

Address Lookup Max Rows

Determines the number of rows displayed in the Grid View when the Address Lookup Link is selected.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

50

Auto Fill License Date

This determines if the Date Licensed field defaults with a date based on the Date of Birth entered.

False = Disable; do not default a date in the Date Licensed field if Date of Birth is entered.
True = Enable; default a date in the Date Licensed field if Date of Birth is entered.

True = Enable.

Commercial Name Label

Allows for the changing of Commercial Name Label to a different value on Name screens (e.g., change from Commercial Name to Other Name).

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Commercial Name

Confirm Clear

Used to determine if a validation is presented when users clear name data on the Web.

True = Selection of the Clear Contents link on the Client Info and Edit Name screens returns a validation: “Are you sure you want to clear all entered information?” Answering “Yes,” removes all data previously entered.
False = No validation is displayed; contents cleared.

False = No validation is displayed; contents cleared.

Email Validation Expression

This regular expression is used by the code to validate Email Addresses. There is no perfect expression that will validate correctly all Email Addresses, because the standards change and can be very complex; however, this will allow companies some control on how they validate the Email Address without having to make code changes.

^((([!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\w])|([!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\w][!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\.\w]{0,}[!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\w]))[@]\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)*)$
Please Note:
It is recommended that this value is NOT changed.

^((([!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\w])|([!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\w][!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\.\w]{0,}[!#$%&''*+\-/=?^_`{|}~\w]))[@]\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)*)$
Please Note:
It is recommended that this value is NOT changed.

Personal Name Label

Allows for the changing of Personal Name Label to a different value on Name screens (e.g., change from Personal Name to Individual Name).

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Personal Name

Residence Info

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Lookup

This is used to determine if the Lookup button on the Residence Information screen is hidden or displayed.

0 = Disable; hide the Lookup button.

1 = Enable; show the Lookup button.

0 = Disable.

Core Logic

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Core Logic Enabled

Determines if Diamond will order Geo Code information through Core Logic.

False = Diamond will not order Geo Code information through Core Logic.

True = Diamond will order Geo Code information through Core Logic.

True = Diamond will order Geo Code information through Core Logic.

Live Geo Code URL

Name of the address where the live Geo Code environment is located.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://rmx.riskmeter.com/CdWsRmllS/CdGeocode.Asp

Live Risk Meter URL

Name of the address where the live Risk Meter environment is located.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://rmx.riskmeter.com/CdWsRmllS/CdRm.Asp

Live User Name

Determines the Subscriber Code to the production environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live User Password

Determines the Subscriber password to the production environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Member ID

Customer specific Billing ID.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Proxy Domain

Domain to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Proxy Host

Name of the Proxy Host.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Proxy Port

Proxy Port number.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Proxy User Name

User name to be used for authentication  with the Proxy server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Proxy User Password

User password to be used for authentication  with the Proxy server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Test Geo Code URL

Name of the address where the test Geo Code environment is located.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://staging.riskmeter.com/CdWsRmllS/CdGeocode.Asp

Test Risk Meter URL

Name of the address where the test Risk Meter environment is located.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://staging.riskmeter.com/CdWsRmllS/CdRm.Asp

Test User Name

Determines the Subscriber Code to the test environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Test User Password

Determines the Subscriber password to the test environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

 

Testing

Determines if testing mode is enabled.

False = Testing mode is not enabled.

True = Testing mode is enabled.

True = Testing mode is enabled.

Demo

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Demo Mode

Allows Sagent ® functionality to be enabled for demonstration purposes for Insuresoft sales representatives.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Detail

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Navigate to Portal Home on Workflow Exit

Determines whether to display the portal (news / agency information or anything set up for the company) or display an empty page when finishing a workflow. This occurs when finalizing a quote or exiting a one page workflow.

False = Show an empty screen.

True =Show the news portal.

True = Show the news portal.

Renumber Display Nums

Determines if items (drivers, vehicles, locations, etc.) are sequentially numbered after an item is deleted and rating occurs on a New Business transaction.

False = Disable. Items are not renumbered on New Business transactions.
True = Enable. Items are renumbered on New Business transactions after an item is deleted and rating occurs.

True = Enable.

Show Missing Coverage Info

For Commercial Lines Only - This determines if any Commercial Coverage fields that are missing are highlighted in a color, indicating they are required for entry.

Implementation Specific; user defined. When a valid color name (e.g., Orange) is entered, and a user enters a Commercial Policy, any Commercial Coverage fields that are missing are highlighted in that color. This indicates they are required for entry.
Blank = No color value entered. Commercial Coverage fields missing are not highlighted.

Blank = No color value entered. Commercial Coverage fields missing are not highlighted.

DHI (Driver's History, Inc.)

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Automatic DHI Order Used to determine whether Diamond will attempt to order a DHI report instead of an MVR during automatic ordering; limited by whether the driver’s licensing state is set up for DHI ordering. False = DHI reporting is not being used.
True = DHI reporting is being used.  
False = DHI reporting is not being used.
Enable Commercial Auto Determines whether or not DHI is enabled for ordering Commercial Auto policies. False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Commercial Auto policies.
True = DHI is enabled for ordering Commercial Auto policies.
False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Commercial Auto policies.
Enable Commercial Umbrella Determines whether or not DHI is enabled for ordering Commercial Umbrella policies. False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Commercial Umbrella policies.
True = DHI is enabled for ordering Commercial Umbrella policies.
False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Commercial Umbrella policies.
Enable Commercial Watercraft
(Note currently used.)
Determines whether or not DHI is enabled for ordering Commercial Watercraft policies. False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Commercial Watercraft policies.
True = DHI is enabled for ordering Commercial Watercraft policies.
False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Commercial Watercraft policies.
Enable DHI Determines whether or not Diamond will do the checks for DHI and order a DHI report. False = DHI report ordering is not enabled.
True = DHI report ordering is enabled
False = DHI report ordering is not enabled.
Enable Personal Auto Determines whether or not DHI is enabled for ordering Personal Auto policies. False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Personal Auto policies.
True = DHI is enabled for ordering Personal Auto policies.
False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Personal Auto policies.
Enable Personal Umbrella Determines whether or not DHI is enabled for ordering Personal Umbrella policies. False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Personal Umbrella policies.
True = DHI is enabled for ordering Personal Umbrella policies.
DHI is not enabled for ordering Personal Umbrella policies.
Enable Personal Watercraft Determines whether or not DHI is enabled for ordering Personal Watercraft policies. False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Personal Watercraft policies.
True = DHI is enabled for ordering Personal Watercraft policies.
False = DHI is not enabled for ordering Personal Watercraft policies.
Error Alert Email Notification Used to determine whether or not an Email is sent to notify user of DHI Service Errors. False = No email is sent.
True = Send an email.
False = No email is sent.
Live License Key This is the DHI assigned identifier that must accompany each Web Service request in the Live Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Web Service This is the path name of the Live Web Service Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Domain This is the Domain to be used for authentication with the Proxy server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Host This is the name of the Proxy host in the DHI Live Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Port This is the name of the port number in the DHI Live Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Proxy User Name This is the user name to be used for authentication with the Proxy server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy User Password This is the User password to be used for authentication with the Proxy server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Testing Determines whether or not to use the Test System Settings (instead of “Live.”) False = The Test System Settings are not being used.
True =  The Test System Settings are being used.
False = The Test System Settings are not being used.
Test License Key This is the DHI assigned identifier that must accompany each Web Service request in the Test Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Test Web Service This is the path name of the Test Web Service Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank

Diadmin

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Note for Cancellation Extension

Used to determine if a Note will be added to each policy where a Cancellation Extension has occurred.

False = A Note is not added.

True = A Note is added to each policy when a Cancellation Extension occurs.

False = A Note is not added.

 

Export Pay Plan Path

This is used to set the path where the Export Pay Plan SQL file (generated when using the Export Pay Plan button in DiamUI Administration: Pay Plan Setup / Billing Pay Plans Screen) will be saved. The SQL file contains all of a Diamond client's pay plan information that can be extracted for use in diagnosing billing issues by Insuresoft personnel.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\DiamondPaths\
Diadmin

Require User Code

Determines if entry in the User Code field on the User Setup screen in DiamUI Admin: User Setup is required or not.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable. If set to "1," it requires an entry in the User Code field on the User Setup screen in DiamUI Admin: User Setup. It also displays the User Code on the Claims Transaction List (at the end of the list). Additionally, if a User Code is entered, it is shown after the Claim Personnel Name on the Claim Personnel Setup screen in the Claim Detail and Claim Feature.

False = Disable.

Agency

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Validate Add Agency Commission Detail Amount

Determines the amount of the Agency Commission Detail Amount value.

False = Allows users to enter negative values, zero (0) and positive values.
True = This requires the amount value to be greater than zero (0).

True = This requires the amount value to be greater than zero (0).

Validate Commissions

Determines if commissions are required to be set up for each company / state / line of business before a user can save and leave the Agency Setup screen.

False = The system will not check each Company / State / LOB to see if they have an Agency Commission set up.
True = The system will require that all Company / State / LOB have at least one Agency Commission set up and if more than one is set up, it has an amount filled in.

False = The system will not check each Company / State / LOB to see if they have an Agency Commission set up.

Diamond

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Access Tools Only

Controls whether or not only the ancillary tools (e.g., Administration, End of Period, etc.) are available via the Diamond Agent depending if the user has (System) Administration authority.

False = Selecting the Diamond Agent returns a menu for users to select the ancillary tool they want providing they have the authority.
True = When a user with (System) Administration authority runs “Diamond,” then Diamond Administration will open automatically. When a user without Administration authority runs “Diamond,” then no window displays. A balloon tip that shows over the Diamond Agent icon in the system tray will be displayed in order to draw the attention of the user. In either of the two (2) above cases, “Diamond” will not close unless the Exit menu option is selected by right-clicking on the Diamond Agent icon.  (The user is also prompted to confirm that they want the application to close.)

False = Selecting the Diamond Agent returns a menu for users to select the ancillary tool they want providing they have the authority.

Allow Texting

Determines if cell phone texting is allowed or not in Diamond.

False = Texting is not allowed.

True = Texting via cell phones is allowed.

True = Texting via cell phones is allowed.

Caption

Banner heading on Diamond main menu

Implementation Specific; user defined.

The Diamond System

CHECK DATE FORMAT

Diamond uses this to check that a user's computer is set to the proper date format. Diamond requires a "short date" format of MM/DD/YYYY in the Regional Settings (found in Windows Control Panel). If the date setting is incorrect, Diamond will not continue beyond this point.

False = Disable; Diamond does not check the date format.
True = Enable; Diamond checks for the correct (proper) date format.

True = Enable; check a user's computer for the proper date format.

Company Name

This allows print vendors that work with more than one Diamond client to be able to distinguish between those clients so they can do specific things those clients want done in printing.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Insuresoft

Data Fill

Determines if the Datafill button is displayed or hidden. The Datafill button is primarily used for testing purposes only. When used, it pre-fills testing information on the Policy Submission, Control and Detail screens. It is also used for the same purpose in the Claim System.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Help File

Location of the on line Diamond Help File user documentation.

User defined.

C:\Program Files\Insuresoft, LLC\DiamondClient\DiamondHelpFiles.chm

Is Production Server

Used to denote if the database is the Production instance.

False = Database is not the Production Server.

True = Database is the Production Server.

False = Database is not the Production Server.

Limit Email Phone Entry to Client

This is used to determine if the system will not allow phones and emails to be entered at the Policy Control level but will allow them on the Client.

False = This function will be turned off and the system will work as it always has.
True = The system will no longer allow email and phones to be entered at the Policy Level and it can only be done at the Client Level; however, any policies under that client will get the email and phones when the client information is saved.

True = The system will no longer allow email and phones to be entered at the Policy Level and it can only be done at the Client Level; however, any policies under that client will get the email and phones when the client information is saved.

Load Static Data from File

Used to determine how Static Data is loaded. If this is set to a valid path and file name, the system loads Static Data from this file instead of from the tables. The setting should contain a valid path and filename for the Static Data to be saved to.

Implementation Specific.
E.g., C:\StaticPath
\StaticData.xml

(Note: When new versions or other Static Data are added to the system, this file should be deleted so that the most up to date Static Data is loaded into it.)

Blank

 

Number of Web Tabs Open

This determines the maximum number of Web tabs that can be open at one time.

This is implementation specific with 5 = Maximum number of tabs that can be open. When set to "5", the system will close one tab and open a new tab when the maximum number is reached. The system will close the first policy or claim tab that is open; it will not close the Tasks tab. The minimum number should be set to "2."

5

Remove Minimize

Determines if the Minimize button in the upper right hand corner of the Diamond screen is disabled and cannot be used.

False = Disable; allow Diamond to be minimized.
True = Enable; disable (protect) the Minimize button on the Diamond screen.

False = Disable; allow Diamond to be minimized.

Show White Pages

Determines if the White Pages button on the Name Control is displayed or not.

False = The White Pages button is not displayed.

True = The White Pages button is shown.

True = The White Pages button is shown.

Text Closing Message

Determines the message that is automatically added to the end of the text.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

"Please do not reply."

Text from Email Address

Determines the return address of the text.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

[companyname]@unmonitored.com

Use External Lookup Service

Used to determine if the DCCustomer Lookup Control is used to search for an external policy system.

True = Enable. this will hide certain non-Claims related items on the Advanced Lookup screen.
False = Disable.

 

Use Simple Splash Screen

For remote users using Citrix. Setting determines if, when logging in to Diamond, an alternate screen that does not contain the bitmap on the splash screen is displayed or not.

Implementation Specific.
False = Use the original Diamond screen with the bitmap.
True = Return the alternate screen on login.

False = Use the original Diamond screen with the bitmap.

Validate Authorities
(Note: The system setting, "Data Fill," must also be enabled to use this setting.)

In Claims, this determines when authorities that are not found, the system returns a validation message indicating to the user that the authority is not found.

False = Disable. Do not return a validation.
True = Enable. If the Data Fill system setting is also set to "True" (Enable), the system will return a validation to the user that a Claims authority is not found.

True = Enable.

 

Validate System Settings

Used in conjunction with the "Data Fill" system setting (Diamond folder - also set to "1" - Enable) this determines if system settings that are checked in the code will display a message box to the user if the system setting is not found. This also includes authorities that are checked in the Claims code.

False = Disable. No message box is displayed to the user.
True = When this is set to "True" (Enable), and the "Data Fill" (Diamond folder) system setting is also set to "1" (Enable), system settings that are checked in the code will display a message box to the user if the system setting is not found. This also includes authorities that are checked in the Claims code.

1 = True.

Web Rating Delimiter For Choice Point Transmission

Determines if Real Time Rating accepts Choice Point Data with a delimiter instead of carriage returns.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Quick Lookup

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Display Legacy Policy Number

Used to determine if the "Is legacy policy number" field will be visible or hidden on the Quick Policy Lookup screen.

True = Display
False = Hide

True = Display

Max Quick Lookup Records

This is a user defined system setting that gives user the ability to limit the number of Quick Lookup records returned in the combo box on the Quick Policy Lookup screen and the Quick Lookup Billing screen.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

10

Minimum Information Needed

This determines the number for the fewest characters needed for Quick Claim Lookup. Default = 4.

Values = Implementation specific; user defined.

4 (Note: The lowest number that can be used is 3.)

Partial Claim Lookup

This is used to indicate whether or not to allow Quick Lookup using less than the full Claim number.

False = The full claim number will be used.
True = The Quick Claim Lookup can use less than the full claim number.

False = The full claim number will be used.

Web Addresses

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Diamond

Returns Diamond On the Web

User defined.

http://www.insuresoft.com/
Diamond.htm

Insuresoft

Returns the Insuresoft homepage

User defined.

http://www.insuresoft.com

Technical Support

Returns the Insuresoft homepage

User defined.

http://www.insuresoft.com

DMV

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Command Timeout This is the command timeout for executing the DMV process stored procedures. Implementation Specific; user defined. 3600
Version Determines which version  of the DMV Code is currently being used. 1 = Use prior version.
2 = Use Current version.
2 = Use current version.

Download

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Create Separate Files by Company

Determines whether or not the Download process will create a separate file for each process.

False = Separate files are not created.

True  = Separate files are created.

False = Separate files are not created.

Days Before System Date for End Date

Determines the number of days before the system date to end the Download process.

User defined. This is the number of days to default the ending date for the Download range. The number entered here looks at the system date to determine when the Download range should end.

0

Days Before System Date for Start Date

Determines the number of days before the system date to start the Download process.

User defined. This is the number of days to default the start date for the Down Load range. The number entered here looks at the system date to determine when the Download range should begin.

7

Download Backup Path

Name of the Backup Archive download folder.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

c:\DiamondXML

Download by Company / State / LOB

Determines if the Download process is set up by line of business per agency.

False = Disable.
True = Enable. In Diamond Administration / Agency Setup / Agency, a Download button replaces the Download check box on the Interface Info tab. When selected, it returns an Agency Download screen where you can select which lines of business you want to download for each agency.

False = Disable.

Download Deleted Vehicles

Determines if vehicles that have been deleted are included in the Download XML or not.

False = Disable; do not include deleted vehicles.
True = Enable; include deleted vehicles.

True = Enable; include deleted vehicles.

Download Path

Identifies the directory used to store the download XML file containing all transactions selected when the Download function is used in Diamond Administration.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Download

Exclude Denied Policies

Determines if Download will exclude polices that are denied or not.

False = The system will not exclude policies that are denied.
True = The system will exclude policies that are denied

False = The system will not exclude policies that are denied

Include OOS Renewal Cancels

This is used to determine whether the Out of Sequence Renewal Cancelled policies will be included in Download or not.

True = Download will include Out of Sequence Renewal Cancelled policies.
False = Out of Sequence Renewal Cancelled policies will not be included in the Download.

False = Out of Sequence Renewal Cancelled policies will not be included in the Download.

Initial Download Path

The directory for the initial download of a book of business.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Download\Initial

 

IVANS Package

Controls whether the real time download items are packaged up for IVANS when the Download End of Day Processing function runs.

False = Real time download items are not packaged for IVANS.
True = Real time download items are packaged for IVANS.  

False = Real time download items are not packaged for IVANS.

One XML Per Agency Policy Initial Download (Note: This is used with the "Use Company File Name" listed below.)

This determines how downloaded XMLs are created.

False = Disable. All the downloaded XML's will be contained in one file.
True = Enable. One (1) file per each Download XML will be created.

False = Disable.

 

Policies Per XML Document

Determines the number of policies that will be included in each XML document.

User defined; must be a numeric value. This is the number of policies that will be included in each XML document.

50

Save Administration Download to Staging Folder

This sets the Administration – Agency Download Path to the initial Download path.

False = Do not set the Agency Download path to the initial Download path.
True = Set the Agency Download path to the initial Download path.

False = Do not set the Agency Download path to the initial Download path.

Use Agency Code in Path

Determines if the agency code is added as a folder under the Initial Download Path and Download Path settings.

False =  Agency code is not added as a folder.
True = Agency code is added as a folder.

False = Agency code is not added as a folder.

Use Company File Name

Determines if the file name contains the date / time the Download XML file was created or the policy_id and the policyimage_num.

False = Disable. The file name will contain the date and time the download XML was created.
True = Enable. The download XML file name will contain the policy_id and the policyimage_num.  

False = Disable.

XML to Path

Used to determine where the Print XML file is saved.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

c:\DiamondXML

Real Time Download

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

This controls whether images are downloaded when a policy is issued or not.

False = Do not download the policy image.
True = Download the policy image.

False = Do not download the policy image.

Include Future Images

Used to determine if future images are included in the Download file or not.

False = Do not include future images in the Download file.
True = Include future images in the Download file.

False = Do not include future images in the Download file.

Include Historical Images

Used to determine if historical images are included in the Download file or not.

False = Do not include historical images in the Download file.
True = Include historical images in the Download file.

False = Do not include historical images in the Download file.

End of Day

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Payments With EOD

Determines if users can submit payments while End of Day Processing is running. (Special Note: This is used with the End of Day function, "Process Payments Received During EOD." If your implementation does NOT have this included in their End of Day program and you will have users submitting payments during the EOD Process, please contact your Insuresoft business analyst!)

False = Disable. Users are not allowed to submit payments while End of Day Processing is running.
True = Enable. Users are allowed to submit payments while End of Day Processing is running. Do NOT set this to "1" unless you have the End of Day Process, "Process Payments Received During End of Day" as one of your EOD functions listed.

False = Disable.

Allow Promote Quote To Pending With EOD

Determines if users can promote quotes to a "Pending" status while End of Day Processing is running.

False = Disable. Users are not allowed to promote quotes to a "Pending" status while End of Day Processing is running.
True = Enable. Users are allowed to promote quotes to a "Pending" status while End of Day Processing is running.

False = Disable.

Command Time Out

Used for the Daily Premium and Cancellation processes in End of Day. When this setting contains a value, it increases the time out for both of these processes.

Implementation Specific.
 

7200 (60 Minutes)

Process Future Events to Roll Date
(Note: This does not apply to the Service Controller / Automated End of Day function.)

Determines whether "Future Events" in End of Day to roll a day ahead of time. The only time this does not occur if the future is on the first day of the next month.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable. Do not allow "Future Events" to roll a day ahead of time.
True = Enable "Future Events" to roll a day ahead of time.

False = Disable. Do not allow "Future Events" to roll a day ahead of time.

Process Futures to Roll Date

Determines whether "Futures" roll a day ahead of time. The only time this does not occur is if the future is on the first day of the next month.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable. Do not allow "Futures" to roll a day ahead of time.
True = Enable "Futures" to roll a day ahead of time.

False = Disable. Do not allow "Futures" to roll a day ahead of time.

Process Saturdays (Note: This does not apply to the Service Controller functionality.)

Determines if the End of Day Program executes on a Saturday.

False = Only one business day is processed.
True = When EOD is run, and the next day is Saturday, EOD will process Saturday's business as well.

False.

Process Sundays (Note: This does not apply to the Service Controller functionality.)

Determines if the End of Day Program executes on a Sunday.

False = Only one business day is processed.
True = When EOD is run, and the next day is Sunday, EOD will process Sunday business as well.

False.

Archive Process

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Mark Archive Database as Read Only

(Note: This requires the Diamond user to have the DB owner role for the archive database.): This determines if the Archive Process marks the Diamond Archive database as Read-Only.

False = Diamond Archive database is not read only.
True = Diamond Archive database is read only.

True = Diamond Archive database is read only.

Attachments

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

This is used to determine if the archive process includes Attachments.

False = The Archive Process does not include Attachments.

True = The Archive Process includes Attachments.

False = The Archive Process does not include Attachments.

Number of Months

This indicates the number of months that should be subtracted from the system date for archiving Attachments.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

18

Print Output

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

This is used to determine if the archive process includes print output or not.

False = The Archive Process does not include print output.

True = The Archive Process includes print output.

False = The Archive Process does not include print output.

Number of Months

This indicates the number of months that should be subtracted from the system date for archiving print output. Print output older than that date will be archived.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

18

Workflow

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

This is used to determine if the archive process includes workflow records or not.

False = The Archive Process does not include workflow records..

True = The Archive Process includes workflow records.

False = The Archive Process does not include workflow records.

Number of Months

This indicates the number of months that should be subtracted from the system date for archiving print output. Print output older than that date will be archived.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

18

Calculate Exposures

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Coverages

Used to determine if the system will add records or not to the EOP Exposure Coverage table for each coverage to calculate written and earned days.

False = The system will not add records to the EOP Exposure Coverage table for each coverage to calculate written earned days.
True = The system will add records to the EOP Exposure Coverage table for each coverage to calculate written earned days

False = The system will not add records to the EOP Exposure Coverage table for each coverage to calculate written earned days.

Locations

Used to determine if the system will add records or not to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each location to calculate written and earned days.

False = The system will not add records to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each location to calculate written and earned days.
True = The system will add records to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each location to calculate written and earned days.

False = The system will not add records to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each location to calculate written and earned days.

Vehicle

Used to determine if the system will add records or not to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each vehicle to calculate written and earned days.

False = The system will not add records to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each vehicle to calculate written and earned days.
True = The system will add records to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each vehicle to calculate written and earned days.

False = The system will not add records to the EOP Exposure Risk table for each vehicle to calculate written and earned days.

Current Carrier

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Create First Policy Information Record (FP01)

Creates a policy record.

False = Do not create a policy record.
True = Create a policy record.

False = Do not create a policy record.

Create First Property Information Record (PR01)

Creates a property record.

False = Do not create a property record.
True = Create a property record.

False = Do not create a property record.

Create Miscellaneous Information Record (MR01)

Creates a miscellaneous record.

False = Do not create a miscellaneous record.
True = Create a miscellaneous record.

False = Do not create a miscellaneous record.

Create Property Characteristics Record (PC01)

Creates a property characteristic record.

False = Do not create a property characteristic record.
True = Create a property characteristic record.

False = Do not create a property characteristic record.

Create Vehicle Record (VR01)

Creates a vehicle record.

False = Do not create a vehicle record.
True = Create a vehicle record.

False = Do not create a vehicle record

Enable Reporting

This determines if the Current Carrier files are written during End if Day Processing.

False = Current Carrier files are not written out.
True = Current Carrier files are written out.

False = Current Carrier files are not written out.

File Name Company Code

The company Code used in the file name naming convention.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Initial Contribution

This indicates the Current Carrier file generated during End of Day Processing will be considered "Initial Contribution."

False = The Current Carrier file is not considered "Initial Contribution."

True = The Current Carrier file is considered "Initial Contribution."

False = The Current Carrier file is not considered "Initial Contribution."

LOB Indicator

This is the line of business code for reporting the Current Carrier file information.

01 = Personal Auto Only.
02 = Commercial Auto Only.
03 = Commercial and Personal Auto Only.
04 = Personal Property Only.
05 = Commercial Property Only.
06 = Commercial and Personal Property Only.
07 = Personal Auto and Personal Property Only.
08 = Commercial Auto and Commercial Property Only.
09 = All lines of business.

07 = Personal Auto and Personal Property Only.

Output Folder

The directory / folder the Current Carrier files are written to.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

c:\temp

Process Personal Auto

This processes Personal Auto policies through Current Carrier.

False = Do not process Personal Auto policies through Current Carrier.
True = Process Personal Auto policies through Current Carrier.

True = Process Personal Auto policies through Current Carrier.

Process Personal Home

This processes Personal Homeowner's policies through Current Carrier.

False = Do not process Personal Home policies through Current Carrier.
True = Process Personal Home policies through Current Carrier.

True = Process Personal Home policies through Current Carrier.

Source ID

This is the company specific identification number given to your implementation from Lexis Nexus.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Diagnostic Process

Credit Card Expiration

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Additional Email Addresses

Email addresses (in addition to the configured End of Period Email) that should receive notification for credit card expirations.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Enabled

Determines if the diagnostic process evaluates Credit Card Expiration Dates.

False = No check is done.
True = The diagnostic process evaluates Credit Card Expiration Dates.

False = No check is done.

Number of Months

Indicates the number of months after the current system date to use for determining when notification should be sent.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

EFT Account Numbers

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Additional Email Addresses

Email addresses (in addition to the configured End of Period Email) that should receive notification regarding EFT account number errors.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Enabled

Determines if the diagnostic process evaluates EFT account number errors.

False = No check is done.
True = The diagnostic process evaluates EFT account number errors.

False = No check is done.

Payment Due Notification

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enable

This is used to determine if the system allows text and emails for certain payment reasons (e.g., late payments, payments made, NSF and credit card expired / declined) to be sent.

False = No notification is sent.
True = The system sends payment notifications.

False = No notification is sent.

Pending Automatic Transactions

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Additional Email Addresses

Email addresses (in addition to the configured End of Period Email) that should receive notification regarding pending transactions

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Enabled

Determines if the diagnostic process sends notification regarding pending transactions.

False = No notification is sent.
True = The diagnostic process sends notification regarding pending transactions.

False = No notification is sent.

Transaction Types

Indicates which transaction types should be included in the pending transaction notification. The values must be entered exactly as they appear in the system.  Multiple values can be entered, delimited by a comma.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Cancellation, Non-Renewal

Policy Processing

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Additional Email Addresses

Email addresses (in addition to the configured End of Period Email) that should receive notification.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Enabled

Determines if the diagnostic process evaluates policies.

False = No diagnosis of policies is done..
True = The diagnostic process evaluates policies.

False = No diagnosis of policies is done.

Print Output

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Additional Email Addresses

Email addresses (in addition to the configured End of Period Email) that should receive notification regarding print output errors.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Enabled

Determines if the diagnostic process sends notification regarding print output errors.

False = No notification is sent.
True = The diagnostic process sends notification regarding print output errors.

False = No notification is sent.

DMV

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Command Timeout

Use to determine the command time out used for executing the DMV process stored procedures.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

3600

Texas Reports

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Annual Aggregate Experience Report Path

If your implementation is running the Annual Aggregate Experience Report, this is the name of the path / folder the report is written to as a .txt file.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Annual Reconciliation Report Path

If your implementation is running the Annual Reconciliation Report, this is the name of the path / folder the report is written to as a .txt file.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Financial Responsibility Program Report Path

If your implementation is running the Financial Responsibility Program Report, this is the name of the path / folder the report is written to as a .txt file.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Quarterly Commercial Experience Report Path

If your implementation is running the Quarterly Commercial Experience Report, this is the name of the path / folder the report is written to as a .txt file.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Quarterly Market Report Path

If your implementation is running the Quarterly Market Report, this is the name of the path / folder the report is written to as a .txt file.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Error Log

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Post to MQ Series

Determines if an error should only be written to the Error Log or if an error should be written to both the error log and MQ (Message Queuing) Series.

0 = Write the error to the Error Log only.
1 = Write the error to both the Error Log and the MQ Series as well (Note: If set to "1," two other settings may have to be made. First, set the setting Queue Manager to the MQ Series Manager that you want to post to. Second, set the setting Queue which is the queue you want to post to on that manager.)

0 = Write the error to the Error Log only.

Schedule Runner Job

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Policy Export - Number of Threads

Used to determine the number of threads to use when exporting policies via the Queue Policy Export Schedule Runner job. 

Implementation specific; user defined.

5
(Note: Any value less than one (1) will be ignored.)

FTP

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Domain

Name of the user's domain for connecting to the target FTP server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<user domain>

Password

User's password for connecting to the target FTP server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<user password>

Proxy Domain

This is the user's domain for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy user domain>

Proxy Enabled

Determines if a proxy server is being used to forward calls through.

0 = Disable. No calls are forwarded through a proxy server.
1 = Enable. Calls are forwarded through a proxy server.

0 = Disable.

Proxy Name

This is the proxy server's name / IP address.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy server>

Proxy Password

This is the user's password for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy user password>

Proxy User Name

This is the user's user name for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy user name>

 

Upload Files

Used to determine if your implementation will upload the files from the Error Log Export.

0 = Disable. The FTP upload is inactive.
1 = Enable. The FTP upload is active.

0 = Disable.

URL

This is the URL to the target FTP and subfolders.

Implementation specific; user defined.

ftp://ftp1.mywebaddress.com/
SubfolderA/SubfolderB.

User Name

User's user name for connecting to the target FTP server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<user name>

Experian

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Auto Check CID

This is the customer ID required for Auto Check Transmission in the Production Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Auto Check Live SID

This is the ID required for Auto Check Transmissions in the Production Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Auto Check Password

User required password required for Auto Check Transmissions in the Production Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Auto Check Test SID

ID required for Auto Check transmissions in the Test Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Auto Check Testing

Indicates whether to use the Test Environment settings.

False = Do not use the Test Environment settings.

True =Use the Test Environment settings.  

False = Do not use the Test Environment settings.

Auto Check URL

The URL of the Production request.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Auto Check VHR Enabled

Used to indicate if Experian Auto Check VHR can be ordered.

False = Auto Check VHR cannot be ordered.
True =  Auto Check VHR can be ordered.

False = Auto Check VHR cannot be ordered.

Proxy Domain

Insuresoft test purposes; this is the user's domain for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Host

Insuresoft test purposes; name of the local proxy.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Port

Insuresoft test purposes; this is the proxy server's name / IP address.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy User Name

Insuresoft test purposes; this is the user's name for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy User Password

Insuresoft test purposes;  this is the user's password for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Experience Modification Factor Import

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Archive Directory

Determines where the system will copy the NCCI files after being imported.

Implementation specific; user defined.

C:\DiamondPaths\ExpModFactorImport

Import Directory

Determines the name of the directory where the NCCI files will be imported.

Implementation specific; user defined.

C:\DiamondPaths\ExpModFactorImport

Number Of Records Per Batch

Determines how many records are imported with each batch when importing NCCI files.

Implementation specific; user defined.

10

File Manager

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Completed Files Directory

This is used to determine the name of the directory where a file that has been attached is moved to.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Al-test\SQL-1\TestData\FileManager\Completed

Default Due Days

Determines the “Default Due Days” associated with the Diary that is generated when attaching a file.

Implementation specific; user defined.

10

Email Folder

This is the directory that Emails are saved to when they cannot be attached automatically.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Email

Root Directory

This is the root directory where all files and folders are available in the File Manager Control.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Al-test\SQL-1\TestData\FileManager

Filing Info

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Failure Queue Determines the workflow the SR22 / 26 policies that failed during the import are written to. Implementation specific; user defined. 0

Forms

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Attach Forms At Issuance or Tab Click Rather Than Rate (Formerly located in the Policy Folder)

Allows a user to attach forms at issuance or by using the Forms tab click rather than at rating time.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Image Right

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

AFUP Directory Determines the directory where the system will create the AFUP files. Implementation Specific; user defined. C:\Temp
Command Timeout The command timeout used for executing the Image Right stored procedures. Implementation Specific; user defined.  
Enabled Determines if the Image Right integration is being used. True = The Image Right integration is in use and enabled.
False = The Image Right integration is not in use and is disabled.
 
False = The Image Right integration is not in use and is disabled.  
Enable Purge Process Used to determine if the system automatically executes the Image Right purge process once daily. True = The Image Right purge process runs once a day.
False = The purge process is disabled.
True = The Image Right purge process runs once a day.
FUP Directory Determines the directory where the system will create the FUP files. Implementation Specific; user defined. C:\Temp
Number of Days to Retain Activity Determines the number of days that Image Right activity will be kept and not purged. Implementation Specific; user defined. 30

Imaging (For Future Use)

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

ET Diamond Imaging

 

For Future Use

0 =

Et Diamond Output Path

 

For Future Use

Blank

ET File Integrator Path

 

For Future Use

Blank

Insight

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enable Insight Scoring Determines whether to use the Auto Location Insight (ALI) interface or not.

False = The ALI interface is not being used.

True = Use the ALI interface.

False = The ALI interface is not being used.
Live Customer Number Customer number that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Live” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Password Password that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Live” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Reporting Number Reporting number that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Live” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live User Name Identifier that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Live” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Web Service Determines the name of the path for the "Live" Web Service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Domain Name of the domain to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Host Name of the Proxy Host Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Port The Proxy Port Number Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Proxy User Name User name to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy User Password User password to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Test Customer Number Customer number that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Test” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Testing Determines whether to use the “Test” system settings instead of the “Live” system settings. False = Use the "Live" system settings instead of the "Test" system settings.
True = Use the "Test" system settings instead of the "Live" system settings.
True = Use the "Test" system settings instead of the "Live" system settings.
Test Password Password that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Test” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Test Reporting Number Reporting number that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Test” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Test User Name Identifier that must accompany each Web Service request in the “Test” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Test Web Service Determines the name of the path for the "Test" Web Service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank

Insurance Verification

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enable Legacy Policy Lookup

Determines if Diamond will perform the Legacy Policy Lookup for insurance verification.

False = No Legacy Policy Lookup for insurance verification is done.

True = Diamond will perform the Legacy Policy Lookup for insurance verification.

False = Diamond will not perform the Legacy Policy Lookup for insurance verification.

Legacy Policy Lookup File Name

This is the Legacy Policy Lookup file name including the file name and extension.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Legacy Policy Lookup Path

This is the path to locate the Legacy Policy Lookup File. If network share, then use Uniform Naming Convention (UNC).

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Testing Used to determine if database logging will occur on what was passed into the service. False = Database Logging does not occur.
True = Database logging occurs.
False = Database Logging does not occur.

Integration

Corvel

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Corvel Errored File Path

This determines where to move the import files if the process errors.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Temp\Corvel\Errored

Corvel Processed File Path

This determines where to move the import files when they process successfully.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Temp\Covel\Processed

Customer Name

This setting holds the customer name used in the generation of the export file to Corvel.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Insuresoft

Enable Manual Trigger

This determines if the user has the ability to manually flag a claim for processing by the Medical Export process.

False = No manual flagging allowed.

True = Users can manually flag a claim for processing.

True = Users can manually flag a claim for processing.

Enabled

This determines if the Medical Bill Review process is enabled or not.

False = The Corvel Interface is not being used.

True = The Corvel Interface is used.

True = The Corvel Interface is used.

Export File Path

This holds the path for the Export file location that Diamond generates.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Temp

Import File Path

This is the path to which files will be imported from the CorVel Interface.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Temp

Move Files After Processing

Indicates if the files should be moved from the original location after processing during the Import process.

0 = False. Do not move files after processing.

1 = True. Move the files after processing.

0 = False. Do not move files after processing.

Send Task on Approved Bill

Determines if a task should be sent to the adjuster when an approved bill is received from Corvel.

False = Do not send a task.
True = Send to the adjuster when an approved bill is received from Corvel.

True = Send to the adjuster when an approved bill is received from Corvel.

Setup Corvel Payment as Reserve

Determines if a system reserve should be added when an approved bill is received from Corvel.

False = Do not add a system reserve when an approved bill is received from Corvel.
True = Add a system reserve when an approved bill is received from Corvel.

False = Do not add a system reserve when an approved bill is received from Corvel.

DocuSign

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Account Email

Determines the email address that will be used for the DocuSign integration account.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

appcenter@insuresoft.com

Account Password

Determines the email password that will be used for the email address linked with the DocuSign integration account.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Insuresoft13

Production Mode

Determines if DocuSign API uses production or test mode.

False = For test environments, this should always be set to "False."

True = DocuSign API uses the production environment.

False = For test environments, this should always be set to "False."

Proxy

For intranet sites that use a proxy. The API Service calls to DocuSign must pass through the proxy named here. Please discuss with your Net Admin if you experience proxy issues with DocuSign.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Use Test Document

Determines if the DocuSign integration will use a test document provided in the Base System.

False = This is used for Bin installs that do not have Publisher installed. This should never be turned on; leave this setting "False."

False

Eagle Eye

RTSS

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Authentication Code

This is the Eagle Eye assigned authentication Code (password) to be passed in the request.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Client ID

The Eagle Eye assigned Client ID to be passed in the request.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Enabled

Used to indicate whether the Eagle Eye RTSS Interface is enabled.

False =  Eagle Eye RTSS Interface is not enabled.
True = Eagle Eye RTSS Interface is enabled.

False =  Eagle Eye RTSS Interface is not enabled.

Live Web Service

Path name for the live Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Blank

Proxy Domain

Name of the domain for the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Blank

Proxy Host

Name of the Proxy Host.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Blank

Proxy Port

Proxy Port Number.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

0

Proxy User Name

User name to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Blank

Proxy User Password

User password to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Blank

Testing

Determines whether to use the Test System Settings (instead of Live).

False = Use the Test System Settings.
True = Use the Live System Settings.

False = Use the Test System Settings.

Test Operation Mode

Pre-defined 3 digit code generated by Eagle Eye for testing purposes. This value is used in the request in the Test Environment. When in the production environment, Live will ne used instead.

Live
Test

Test

Test Web Service

Path name of the Test Web Service Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://ws3.eeanalytics.us/RTSS/Score.asmx

EARS

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Do Not Add Duplicate Tasks That Match Exactly

Determines if the system will no longer display duplicate validations that have already been added to the Task List and match exactly.

False = The system will allow EARS to add duplicate tasks that match exactly.

True = The system will no longer display duplicate validations that have already been added to the Task List and match exactly.  

False = The system will allow EARS to add duplicate tasks that match exactly.

Enabled

Used to determine if the Explore EARS product will be used for ordering MVR Reports and receiving accident / violation information on a monthly basis.

True = Your company will be using the Explore EARS product.
False = Your company will NOT be using the Explore EARS product.

False = Your company will NOT be using the Explore EARS product.

Global User or Workflow Queue

This is used to determine the user or workflow queue that will receive Diary items in the event that the configuration is either invalid or missing. (Note: For queues, use the negative value for the workflowqueue_id. When defining a user, use the users_id.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

-2

Only Attempt to Apply Violation Once

Determines if imported violations should be marked as failed by the apply EOP process when configuration or version data is missing or invalid.

False = Imported violations are not marked as failed.
True = Imported violations should be marked as failed by the Apply EARS Imported Violation Process in End of Day Processing.

False = Imported violations are not marked as failed.

Hartford Steam Boiler

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Company Code Stored Procedure Name

Return the company and product codes for Hartford coverages.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Inforce File Stored Procedure Name

This is the stored procedure name for the Hartford Steam Boiler inforce file reporting.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Output Folder

Determines the directory / folder the files will be written to.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

c:\temp

Payment File Stored Procedure Name

This is the stored procedure name for the Hartford Steam Boiler payment file reporting.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Testing

The file name includes the word "TEST" at the end of the file name.

False = For production environment. The word "TEST" will not be included in the file name.
True = If testing, please ensure this is set to "True." The file name includes the word "TEST" at the end of the file name.

True = If testing, please ensure this is set to "True." The file name includes the word "TEST" at the end of the file name.

Transaction File Stored Procedure Name

The stored procedure name for HSB transaction file reporting.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

IIX

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Active Environment

This sets the "Active" environment to use when processing IIX requests (for MVR processing).

1 = Test
2 = Production
3 = Support

1 = Test

ISO

APlus

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Loss Instead of Updating Existing Loss

Indicates whether Diamond should add all losses received (whose Loss Types are mapped) or update existing losses.

False = Diamond will update an existing loss if it is received from APlus. Diamond will only update losses imported from APlus; it will not update manually entered losses or modified imported losses. Diamond will use Claim Number and Loss Date to identify if a loss already exists.

True = Diamond will add the new losses.

False = Diamond will update an existing loss if it is received from APlus. Diamond will only update losses imported from APlus; it will not update manually entered losses or modified imported losses. Diamond will use Claim Number and Loss Date to identify if a loss already exists.

APlus Live Password

Password required for APlus transmissions in the ”Live” environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

APlus Live URL

URL of the production request.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

https://passport.iso.com/PPWebListener/
HTTPRequestListener

APlus Live User ID

User ID required for APlus transmissions in the “Live” environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

APlus Loss Summary

Determines the way to categorize the importing of losses by the claim they appear on or not by the type of the loss.

False = Each separately paid component becomes its own Loss History record in Diamond. There will be no Loss History Detail records.

True = All separately paid components with the same claim number are summarized into a single Loss History record. Each paid component will be a separate Loss History Detail record.

False = Each separately paid component becomes its own Loss History record in Diamond. There will be no Loss History Detail records.

APlus Property Enabled

Determines if APlus is available for ordering and is shown on the Third Party Reports screen.

False = APlus not available for ordering; not shown on the Third Party Reports screen.

True = APlus available for ordering; shown on the Third Party Reports screen.

True = APlus available for ordering; shown on the Third Party Reports screen.

APlus Test Password

Password required for APlus transmissions in the "Test" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

APlus Test URL

URL of the test request.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

https://passport.iso.com/PPWebListener/
HTTPRequestListener

APlus Test User ID

User ID required for APlus transmissions in the “Test” environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

APlus Testing

Indicates whether to use the test environment settings.

False = Test environment settings are not being used.

True = Test environment settings are in use.

True = Test environment settings are in use.

Exclude Risk Losses when importing from APlus Property Report

Indicates whether Diamond will exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to the Risk Address but are not matched to an Applicant.

False = Diamond will not exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to the Risk Address.

True = Diamond will exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to the Risk Address.

False = Diamond will not exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to the Risk Address.

Exclude Subject Losses when importing from APlus Property Report

Indicates whether Diamond will exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to an Applicant but are not matched to an input address.

False = Diamond will not exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to an Applicant.

True = Diamond will exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to an Applicant.

False = Diamond will not exclude (vs. import) losses that are matched to an Applicant.

Include Mailing Address in Search Request

Determines if the Mailing Address is included in the APlus request.

False = Mailing Address is not included.

True = Mailing Address is included.

False = Mailing Address is not included.

Include Previous Address in Search Request

Determines if the Previous Address is included in the APlus request.

False = Previous Address is not included.

True =Previous Address is included.

False = Previous Address is not included.

Match Losses to Location when Importing from APlus Property Report

Indicates whether to identify the Location Risk on the Loss History Record created when the loss is imported from an APlus Property Request.

False = Do not identify the Location Risk.

True = Identify the Location Risk on the Loss History Record.

True = Identify the Location Risk on the Loss History Record.

Match Losses to Subject when Importing from APlus Property Report

Indicates whether to identify the Applicant Risk on the Loss History Record created when the loss is imported from an APlus Property Request.

False = Do not identify the Applicant Risk.

True = Identify the Applicant Risk on the Loss History Record.

True = Identify the Applicant Risk on the Loss History Record.

Ordering ID

Customer Ordering ID assigned by ISO for APlus transmissions.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

7235

Proxy Domain

Insuresoft test purposes. APlus proxy domain.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Host

Insuresoft test purposes. APlus proxy host in the APlus “Live” environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy User Name

Insuresoft test purposes. APlus proxy user.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy User Password

Insuresoft test purposes. APlus proxy password.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Shipping ID

Customer shipping ID assigned by ISO for APlus transmissions.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

7235

ISO 360

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Used to determine if the ISO 360 Service is enabled or not.

False = The ISO 360 Service is disabled.
True = The ISO 360 Service is enabled.

False = The ISO 360 Service is disabled.

Group ID

If using the ISO 360 Service, this determines the Group ID for the ISO 360 Service.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Password

If using the ISO 360 Service, this determines the password for the ISO 360 Service.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Service URL

If using the ISO 360 Service, this determines the Service URL for the ISO 360 Service.

Implementation specific; user defined.

http://test.360-value.com/apps/iv/webservices/RCV

User ID

If using the ISO 360 Service, this determines the User ID for the ISO 360 Service.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Valuation URL

If using the ISO 360 Service, this determines the Valuation URL for the ISO 360 Service.

Implementation specific; user defined.

http://test.360-value.com/apps/iv/Login

ISO 360 Validation Form

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Display Maximized

Determines if the Valuation Form is maximized or not.

False = Valuation Form is not maximized.
True = Valuation Form is maximized.

False = Valuation Form is not maximized.

Form Height

Determines the height of the ISO 360 Form.

Implementation specific; user defined.

600

Form Width

Determines the width of the ISO 360 Form.

Implementation specific; user defined.

800

Pass Port

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Customer ID

This is the Customer ID given by ISO for the Passport Location lookup service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Customer Password

This is the Password given by ISO for the Passport Location lookup service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Number of Retries

Determines the number of times to retry connecting to the ISO Passport Service if there is an error connecting.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

3

Retry Delay

Determines the amount of time in milliseconds that the lookup will wait before retrying to connect after an error.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

5000

Timeout

Determines the amount of time in milliseconds it takes for the ISO Passport Location Tax Code Lookup to wait for a response from the Web Service. 

Implementation Specific; user defined numeric value.

15000

Use Proxy

Determines if the ISO Passport Service uses a proxy to connect.

False =  = ISO Passport Service does not use a proxy to connect.
True = ISO Passport Service uses a proxy to connect.

True = ISO Passport Service uses a proxy to connect.

Web Proxy

Name of the Web Proxy used to connect to the ISO Passport Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

al-isa-1.insuresoft.com

Web Proxy Port

Port of the Web Proxy used to connect to the ISO Passport Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

8080

Web Service URL

Name of the URL of the ISO Passport Location lookup service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

https://passporta.iso.com/
PPWebListener/
services/SOAPListener

Location

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Determines if the system is using the ISO Passport lookup service.

False = Disable. The system is not using the ISO Passport lookup service.
True = Enable. The system is using the ISO Passport lookup service.   

False = The system is not using the ISO Passport lookup service.

Ordering ID

The customer ordering id given by ISO for the Passport Location lookup service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

Blank

Pend Renewals for No Exact Match

Determines if renewals are pended and have a Sticky Note added to the policy if any addresses do not have an exact match returned.

False = Disable. Do not pend Renewals and add a Sticky Note a Sticky Note to the policy if any of the addresses do not have an exact match returned.
True = Enable. Pend Renewals and add a Sticky Note a Sticky Note to the policy if any of the addresses do not have an exact match returned.

False = Disable.

Product Code

This is a code that lets ISO know what product is being requested through the API.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

LOCNT110

Shipping ID

This is the customer shipping id given by ISO for the Passport Location lookup service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

PPC

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Add Sticky Note on Renewal When PPC Data Changes

Determines if a Sticky Note will be added if PPC data changes at Renewal.

False = No Sticky Note is added.
True = A Sticky Note is added when the PPC data changes at Renewal.

False = No Sticky Note is added.

Enabled

This is used to determine if ISO Lookup is enabled or not.

False = Disable. ISO Lookup is not used.
True = Enable. ISO Lookup is used.

False = Disable.

Pend Renewal When PPC Data Changes

Used to determine if a Renewal will “Pend” if PPC data changes.  

False = A Renewal is not “Pended” if PPC data changes.
True = A Renewal is “Pended” if PPC data changes.

False = A Renewal is not “Pended” if PPC data changes.

Product Code

Identifies the Product Code for ISO PPC.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

LOCNF160

Renewals Enabled

Determines if ISO PPC Lookup is enabled for Renewals.

False =  The ISO PPC Lookup is not enabled for Renewals.
True = The ISO PPC Lookup is enabled for Renewals.

False =  The ISO PPC Lookup is not enabled for Renewals.

Renewal Subscription Fire District Diary

Determines if a Diary is created at Renewal issuance when a Subscription Fire District is returned.  

False = A Diary is not created at Renewal issuance when a Subscription Fire District is returned. True = A Diary is created at Renewal issuance when a Subscription Fire District is returned.

False = A Diary is not created at Renewal issuance when a Subscription Fire District is returned.

Renewal Subscription Fire District Diary Due Days

Used to determine the number of days prior to the Renewal Effective Date that the Diary should show.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Renewal Subscription Fire District Workflow Queue_Id

This is the name of the Subscription Renewal Fire District workflow queue_id.  

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Use Distance to Hydrant When 9 / 10 Returned

Determines if the user entered distance to a fire hydrant will be considered when assigning the PPC value if a PPC value of 9 or 10 is also returned.   

False = The user entered distance to a fire hydrant is not considered when assigning the PPC value if a PPC value of 9 or 10 is also returned.
True = The user entered distance to a fire hydrant will be considered when assigning the PPC value if a PPC value of 9 or 10 is also returned.   

False = The user entered distance to a fire hydrant is not considered when assigning the PPC value if a PPC value of 9 or 10 is also returned.

Lexis Nexis

Lexis ID

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Determines if Diamond will use the Lexis ID function.

False = Lexis ID will not be used.
True =  Lexis ID will be used. On the 3rd Party Reports screen, Lex ID will appear as a selection.

False = Lexis ID will not be used.

Production URL

Determines the Production URL.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Testing URL

Determines the Testing URL.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Testing

Determines whether or not to use the Test system settings (instead of the Live .)

False = Use the Test system settings.
True = Use the Live system settings.

False = Use the Test system settings.

Web Service Login

Determines the Web Service login.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Web Service Password

Determines the Web Service password.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Blank

Mitchell

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Proxy Domain

Domain to be used for authentication with the Proxy server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Host

Name of the Proxy host.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Port

Name of the Proxy Port Number.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Proxy User Name

User name to be used for authentication with the Proxy server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy User Password

User password to be used for authentication with the Proxy server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Medical

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Determines if the interface with the Mitchell Medical Billing (Decision Point) is active or not.

False = Mitchell Medical Billing (Decision Point) is not active.
True = Mitchell Medical Billing (Decision Point) is active.

False = Mitchell Medical Billing (Decision Point) is not active.

Enable Manual Send Option

Determines if the "manual" send option is enabled.

False = The "manual" send option is not enabled.
True = The "manual" send option is enabled.

False = The "manual" send option is not enabled.

Live URL

Name of the address where the "Live" environment is located.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

https://mdx.mymitchell.com/

Medical Bill Default State of Jurisdiction

Used to indicate what state from the claim should be used to set the State jurisdiction when sending a claim to the medical billing vendor. Options include: Policy or Risk.

Policy = Use the Policy state. Risk = Use the Risk state.

Policy

Mitchell Company ID

Mitchell-assigned company identifier.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Mitchell Office ID

Mitchell-assigned office identifier.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Testing

Determines whether to use the Test System Settings instead of the "Live."

False = Do not use the Testing System Settings.

True = Use the Testing System Settings.

Blank

Testing URL

Name of the address where the Test Environment is located.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

https;//mdx-uat.mymitchell.com/

 

Pitney Bowes

GEO Tax

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Used to determine of the Pitney Bowes Geo Tax is enabled or not.

False = Pitney Bowes Geo Tax is disabled.
True = Pitney Bowes Geo Tax is enabled.

False = Pitney Bowes Geo Tax is disabled.

Minimum Confidence Factor

This is used to determine the minimum confidence percentage that has to be met for a match to automatically have its tax data used. If multiple results return under the confidence, the match must be verified by the user.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

100

Production Login Name

Geo Tax Production Login Name

Implementation Specific; user defined.

InsSft9871

Production Mode

Used to determine if Production or Test URL Login Name / Password are used.

False = Production mode is disabled.  
True = Production mode is enabled.

False = Production mode is disabled.  

Production Password

The password used in the Geo Tax Production environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

3850$is%JF

Production URL

The Geo Tax “Live” service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://spectrum.pitneybowes.com/
soap/ssignGeoTAXInfoPlusIPD

Proxy

For networks that pass through a proxy. This will include the proxy URL and port.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Save Transmission

Determines if the Pitney Bowes transmission record should be saved to Diamond database.

False =  Transmission records are not saved to the Diamond database.
True = Transmission records are saved to the Diamond database.

True = Transmission records are saved to the Diamond database.

Test Login Name

Geo Tax Test Login Name

Implementation Specific; user defined.

InsSft9871

Test Password

The password used in the Geo Tax Test environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

3850$is%JF

Test URL

The Geo Tax “Test” service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

http://spectrum.pitneybowes.com/
soap/ssignGeoTAXInfoPlusIPD

Sales Force

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Last Ran Date

This is the date for the last run of the Sales Force Process.

Automatically generated by the system.

01/01/1800

Password

Password used to connect to the Sales Force Process.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

User Name

User name used to connect to the Sales Force Process.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Third Party System

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Live User Name

User Name of the user in the receiving live system that has access to call the Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live User Password

Password of the user in the receiving live system that has access to call the Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live Web Service

Path name of the live Web Service environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Domain

The Domain to be used with authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Host

Name of the Proxy Host.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Port

Name of the Proxy port.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Proxy User Name

User name to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

100

Proxy User Password

User password  to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

100

Test User Name

User name in the receiving test system that has access to call the Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

False = Process all images.

Test User Password

Password of the user in the receiving test system that has access to call the Web Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Test Web Service

Path name of the Test Web Service environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Testing

Determines whether to use the Test system settings (instead of live).

False = Use the Test System environment / system settings.
True = Use the Live Web Service Environment.

False = Use the Test System environment / system settings.

Interface

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Historical Send

Determines if only historical data is sent to the MQ / File.

False = Do not send historical data.

True = Send historical data.

False = Do not send historical data.

Interface Active

Used to determine if the Interface processing is active or not.

False = Disable. The Interface processing is not active.
True = Enable. The Interface processing is active.

False = Disable. The Interface processing is not active.

Interface Queue Manager

Name of the MQ Queue Manager.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Interface Queue Name

Name of the MQ Name.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Number of Interface Threads

Determines the number of interface threads.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

12

Number of Records to Process

Determines the number of records to bring in each iteration when creating XMLs.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

100

Number of Records to Send

Determines the number of records to process to a queue.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

100

Process Only Migrated Images

This is used to determine if only migrated records that are in the Process Interface table that have a transaction sequence number greater than zero (0) are sent to MQ or a file path.

False =
True = Only migrated records in the Process Interface table that have a transaction sequence number greater than zero (0) are sent to MQ or a file path.

False = Process all images.

Real Time Billing Transactions

Determines if Data Warehouse Real Time Billing Transaction Processing is turned on or not.

False = Data Warehouse Real Time Billing Transaction Processing is not enabled.

True = The Data Warehouse Real Time Billing Transaction Processing is turned on.

False = Data Warehouse Real Time Billing Transaction Processing is not enabled.

Send to File

Used to determine if the Interface is written out to a file directory.

False = Disable. The Interface is not written out to a file directory.
True = Enable.  The Interface is written out to a file directory.

False = Do not write Interface out to file directory.

Send to File Directory

Name of the directory where the file is written to.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Send to MQ

Determines of the Interface is written out to the MQ server.

False = Disable. The Interface is not written out to the MQ Server.
True = Enable. The Interface is written out to the MQ Server.

False = Do not write interface out to MQ Server.

KY Tax

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Exclude Footnotes

For Future Use

 

Blank

Group Calcs By Tax Percent

For Future Use

 

1 =

Use Location Code for All Coverages

For Future Use

False
True

False =

Lockbox

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Lockbox Backup Path

Contains the name of the path to the backup folder in which lockbox files are stored after processing.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Lockbox Polling Path

Contains the name of the path to the folder in which the service will poll.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Wait Interval

This is the number of seconds to wait before polling an empty directory.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

60

Start Time

This is the start time for the Lockbox Polling Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

9:00 AM

End Time

This is the end time for the Lockbox Polling Service.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

5:00 PM

Email Address

Determines the Email Address for all notifications associated with the Lockbox process.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

SQL Mail Profile Name

This is the SQL Server Mail Profile Name that is configured for sending Emails.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Metropolitan Reporting Bureau

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Batch Max Responses Determines the number of maximum responses to process in one (1) file. Please Note: The size of the file needs to be managed because it will include attachments. Implementation Specific; user defined. 99
Live One Gate Set Determines the Metro communication setting for “Live” orders. Implementation Specific; user defined. XML_Order
Live URL Indicates the name of the address where the “Live” environment for MRB is located. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Web Service Path name of the “Live” web service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Web Service Login Determines the login to the “Live” web service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Web Service Password Determines the password to the “Live” web service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
MRB Enabled Indicates whether or not to generate any files to MRB or not.   True = Enable
False = Disable
True = Enable
Proxy Domain Name of the proxy domain. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Host Name of proxy host in MRB Live Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Port Name of MRB Live Environment port. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy User Name Name of MRB proxy user. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy User Password Password of MRB proxy user. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Testing Determines if the Test Environment settings are being used. True = Test Environment settings are being used.
False = Test Environment settings are not being used.
True = Test Environment settings are being used.
Test One Gate Set Determines the type of file being passed to MRB. Set to XML_TestCTOrder for initial testing and later change to XML_CTOrder for testing, but using production logic. The default value is XML_TestCTOrder. XML_TestCTOrder = For testing.
XML_CTOrder = For testing using production logic.

XML_TestCTOrder
Test URL Name of the address where the Test Environment is located. Implementation Specific; user defined. http://metroweb.metroreporting.com/cgi-bin/onegate
Test Web Service Path name of the test web service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Test Web Service Login Default name for login to Test Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. insuresoft
Test Web Password Default password for Test Environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. g46s8!o8

MSB (Note: This is used with the Marshall, Swift, Beck Web Site Interface.)

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Live URL

Name of address where the Live Environment located.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Live Web Service

Path name of the "Live" web service environment.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Live Web Service Login

Determines the login to the live environment for the MSB Web Site.

Implementation Specific.

Diamond UAT

Live Web Service Password

Determines the password to the live environment for the MSB Web Site.

Implementation Specific.

Diamond

MSB Renewal Roll On Active

Determines if the MSB factors are used for Renewals or not.

Implementation Specific.

0 = Disable

Proxy Host

Name of proxy host in Live Environment.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Proxy Port

Name of Live Environment port.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

 

Testing

Determines where users go to enter the Test Environment.

Implementation Specific.

 

Test Login

Default name for login to Test Environment.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Test Password

Default password for Test Environment.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Test URL

Name of the address where the Test Environment is located.

Implementation Specific.

Blank

Test Web Service

Path name of the test web service environment.

Implementation Specific.

https://rcttest.msbexpress.net/
cinfin_37/ExpressLync/
ValuationService.asmx

Test Web Service Login

Determines the login to the test environment for the MSB We Site.

Implementation Specific.

DiamondUAT

Test Web Service Password

Determines the password to the test environment for the MSB We Site.

Implementation Specific.

Diamond

Netsuite

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enable Netsuite

This determines whether or not the Netsuite interface is enabled or not.

False = Netsuite interface is not enabled (used).
True = Netsuite interface is being used.

True = Netsuite interface is being used.

Live Account Number

The account number that must accompany each Web Service request in the "Live" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live Application ID

The Live Application ID that must accompany each Web Service request in the "Live" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live Password

Password that must accompany each Web Service request in the "Live" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live Role ID

Identifier that must accompany each Web Service request in the "Live" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live User Name

Path name of the "Live" Web Service environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live Web Service

Path name of the "Live" Web Service environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Domain

The Domain to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Host

Name of the Proxy host in the "Live" Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy Port

Name of the "Live" environment port.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Proxy User Name

The User Name to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Proxy User Password

The User Password to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Services URL

This is the main services URL for endpoints.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

/services/NetSuitePort_2013_2

Test Account Number

The account number that must accompany each Web Service request in the "Test" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

TSTDRV1094674

Test Application ID

The Test Application ID that must accompany each Web Service request in the "Test" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Test Password

Default password for Test Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Insuresoft13

Test Role ID

Role Identifier that must accompany each Web Service request in the "Test" environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

1064

Test User Name

Path name of the "Test" Web Service environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

phancock@insuresoft.com

Test Web Service

Path name of the test Web Service environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Testing

Determines whether to use the Test system settings (instead of Live).

False = Use Live system settings.
True =  Use Test system settings.

True = Use the Use Test system settings.

Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Edit

Allows notes to be edited system wide.  

False = Disable; notes may not be edited. They may only be appended no matter if a user has the authority to edit.
1 = Enable; notes may be edited system wide if a user has authority to edit them.

True = Enable; allow editing of notes if user has authority.

Allow Launch Browser

This determines if the Show / Hide Launch Browser button is visible on the on Notes toolbar.

False = the Show / Hide Launch Browser button is not visible on the on Notes toolbar.
True = the Show / Hide Launch Browser button is visible on the on Notes toolbar.

False = the Show / Hide Launch Browser button is not visible on the on Notes toolbar.

Allow Multiple Note Types

Determines if multiple Note Types can be selected on a Note.

False = Multiple Note Types cannot be selected on a Note.

True = Allow multiple Note Types to be selected on a Note.

True = Allow multiple Note Types to be selected on a Note.

Allow Re-sizing of Notes Boxes

This allows Claim Notes to open to the right of Tree View instead of in a popup window.

False = Claim Notes will open as a popup.
True = Claim Notes will open to the right of the Tree View instead of a popup.

False = Claim Notes will open as a popup.

Assign User Category

This determines if a User Category selection will be available or not in the Note Type Setup in the Company Configuration Tool so that users can be assigned to a specific category (e.g., Employee, Agency).

False = A User Category selection is not  available in the Note Type Setup in the Company Configuration Tool.
True = A User Category selection is  available in the Note Type Setup in the Company Configuration Tool so that users can be assigned to a specific category.

False = A User Category selection is not  available in the Note Type Setup in the Company Configuration Tool.

Auto Launch Browser

Where allowed, this determines if Notes are automatically launched in a separate browser.

False = Notes cannot be automatically launched in a separate browser.
True = Notes can be automatically launched in a separate browser.  

False = Notes cannot be automatically launched in a separate browser.

Copy Policy Notes for All Rewrites

Determines if all notes are copied from the old policy to the new policy on the following transactions: Rewrite Full, Cancel-Rewrite, ABT Cancel-Rewrite or a Rewrite pro rata.

False = Disable. Notes will not be copied from the old policy to the new policy on any of the following transactions: Rewrite Full, Cancel-Rewrite, ABT Cancel-Rewrite or Rewrite pro rata.
True = Enable. Notes will be copied from the old policy to the new policy on a Rewrite Full, Cancel-Rewrite, ABT Cancel-Rewrite and a Rewrite pro rata transaction.

False = Disable.

Default Note to Private

Determines if all users can view Notes that are marked "Private."

False = Disable; default Note to "Public" view.

True = Enable; default Note to "Private" view.

True = Enable; default Note to "Private" view.

Default Page Size

This sets the default amount of Notes displayed per page.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

14

Default Sort Field

Determines the column on which to sort by default.

Implementation to choose from columns on Notes.

Added Date

Default Sort Order

Determines the order on which to sort by default for Notes.

Desc = Descending
Asc = Ascending

Desc = Descending

Default Sticky Note to Private

Determines if all users can view Sticky Notes that are marked "Private."

False = Disable; default Sticky Note to "Public" view.

True = Enable; default Sticky Note to "Private" view.

True = Enable; default Sticky Note to "Private" view.

Display Note Type on Claim

Determines if the Note Type combo box on the Notes tab list view is displayed at the claim, claimant and feature level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Display Note Type on Policy

Determines if the Note Type combo box on the Notes tab list view is displayed at the policy, client and agent level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Display Edit Check On Renewal Message

Not currently functional.

Blank

Blank

Edit Check On Renewal Only

Disable or enable changes on a note except the Check on Renewal check box.

False = Disable; do not allow any changes to a note through editing except the Check on Renewal check box system wide.
True = Enable; allows users to fully edit a note system wide.

False = Disable; do not allow any changes to a note through editing except the Check on Renewal check box system wide.

Get Sticky Note Count

This determines if the Sticky Note count is evaluated and displayed.

False = The system will not retrieve the count and display the number of Sticky Notes on the Policy History screen in the Windows UI.

True = The system will retrieve the count and display the number of Sticky Notes on the Policy History screen in the Windows UI.

True = The system will retrieve the count and display the number of Sticky Notes on the Policy History screen in the Windows UI.

Include System Generated Notes in Display Results

This determines if system generated Notes are included in the Notes that are displayed on the Notes tab or not.

False = The system will not display system generated Notes.
True = System generated Notes are included in the Notes that are displayed on the Notes tab.

True = System generated Notes are included in the Notes that are displayed on the Notes tab.

Max Chars for Notes

When a note is being saved, if this setting greater than zero (0), a check will be made. If the length of the note is greater than Max Chars For Notes, a message box is displayed warning the user this could take a considerable amount of time to save. It also prompts the user if they still wish to save. If "No" is selected, the user can continue to edit the note.

Implementation Specific.

The default setting is 10000, but it may be changed at the implementation level.

Note Time Stamp

Determines the type of time stamp placed on a note.

None = No time stamp.
PC Date = Use the PC Date for a time stamp.
PC Date Time = Use the PC date and time as the time stamp.
System Date = Use the Diamond System Date.
System Date Time = Use the Diamond System Date and use the time from the PC.
System Date and PC Date = Use both PC and Diamond Dates

System Date Time. And PC Date Time = Use both and include the time also.
System Date And PC Date Time = Use the system date with no time and PC Date with time.
System Date Time and PC Date = Use System Date, Time and the PC Date.

System Date.

Open Notes in View Summary

Determines how Notes are loaded: "View Summary" or "Detail View."

False = Load Notes in View Detail

True = Load Notes in View Summary

False = Load Notes in View Detail

Require Note Type on Claim

Determines if the Note Type combo box on the New Note screen for claims, claimants and features is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

False = Disable; not required. The combo box does not have an asterisk by it.
True = Enable; required. The combo box's background is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

True = Enable; required. The combo box's background is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

Require Note Type on Policy

Determines if the Note Type combo box on the New Note screen for policies is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

False = Disable; not required. The combo box does not have an asterisk by it.
True = Enable; required. The combo box's background is marked with an asterisk (*),  indicating "Required" field.

False = Disable; not required. The combo box's background is not marked with an asterisk (*).

Show All Policy Notes

Determines if the system displays all notes no matter which policy image is in view or show only the notes attached to the current image of a policy.

False = Display notes attached to the current image of the policy only.
True = Show all notes no matter which policy image is in view.

False = Display notes attached to the current image of the policy only.

User Timer On Policy

Determines if the Notes Control is started behind a timer or not when loading a policy. This setting enhances the performance of loading a policy when Notes are attached.

False = Do not use the Notes Control started behind a timer when a policy is loaded.
True = Use the Notes Control started behind a timer when a policy is loaded.

True = Use the Notes Control started behind a timer when a policy is loaded.

Delete Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Deleting of Notes at Agency Level

Determines if Notes can be deleted at the Agency Level or not.

False = Note cannot be deleted.
True = Note can be deleted.

False = Note cannot be deleted.

Allow Deleting of Notes at Claim Level

Determines if Notes can be deleted at the Claim Level or not.

False = Note cannot be deleted.
True = Note can be deleted.

False = Note cannot be deleted.

Allow Deleting of Notes at Claim Trans (Transaction) Level

Determines if Notes can be deleted at the Claim Transaction Level  or not.

False = Note cannot be deleted.
True = Note can be deleted.

False = Note cannot be deleted.

Allow Deleting of Notes at Claimant Level

Determines if Notes can be deleted at the Claimant Level or not.

False = Note cannot be deleted.
True = Note can be deleted.

False = Note cannot be deleted.

Allow Deleting of Notes at Client Level

Determines if Notes can be deleted at the Client Level or not.

False = Note cannot be deleted.
True = Note can be deleted.

False = Note cannot be deleted.

Allow Deleting of Notes at Coverage Feature Level

Determines if Notes can be deleted at the Coverage Feature Level or not.

False = Note cannot be deleted.
True = Note can be deleted.

False = Note cannot be deleted.

Allow Deleting of Notes at Policy Level.

Determines if Notes can be deleted at the Policy Level or not.

False = Note cannot be deleted.
True = Note can be deleted.

True = Note can be deleted.

Sticky Notes

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Loading and Saving for Sticky Notes at the Agency Level

Determines if users are allowed to load and save Sticky Notes at the Agency Level.

False = Note cannot be loaded and saved at Agency Level.
True = Note can be loaded and saved at Agency Level.

True = Sticky Note can be loaded and saved.

Allow Loading and Saving for Sticky Notes at the Claim Level

Determines if users are allowed to load and save Sticky Notes at the Claim Level.

False = Note cannot be loaded and saved at the Claim Level.
True = Note can be loaded and saved at the Claim Level.

True = Sticky Note can be loaded and saved.

Allow Loading and Saving for Sticky Notes at the Claim Trans (Transaction) Level

Determines if users are allowed to load and save Sticky Notes at the Claim Transaction Level.

False = Note cannot be loaded and saved at Claim Transaction Level.
True = Note can be loaded and saved at the Claim Transaction Level.

True = Sticky Note can be loaded and saved.

Allow Loading and Saving for Sticky Notes at the Claimant Level

Determines if users are allowed to load and save Sticky Notes at the Claimant Level.

False = Note cannot be loaded and saved at the Claimant Level.
True = Note can be loaded and saved at the Claimant Level.

True = Sticky Note can be loaded and saved.

Allow Loading and Saving for Sticky Notes at the Client Level

Determines if users are allowed to load and save Sticky Notes at the Client Level.

False = Note cannot be loaded and saved at the Client Level.
True = Note can be loaded and saved at the Client Level.

True = Sticky Note can be loaded and saved.

Allow Loading and Saving for Sticky Notes at the Coverage Feature Level

Determines if users are allowed to load and save Sticky Notes at the Coverage Feature Level.

False = Note cannot be loaded and saved at the Coverage Feature Level.
True = Note can be loaded and saved at the Coverage Feature Level.

True = Sticky Note can be loaded and saved.

Allow Loading and Saving for Sticky Notes at Policy Level

Determines if users are allowed to load and save Sticky Notes at the Policy Level.

False = Note cannot be loaded and saved at the Policy Level.
True = Note can be loaded and saved at the Policy Level.

True = Sticky Note can be loaded and saved.

OFAC (Office of Foreign Assets Control)

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Claims Enabled (Note: This was formerly called "Enabled;" changed in Version 531.003.)

Used to determine if the system should attempt to call a configured OFAC interface when a claim payee is added to the system.

False = No call is made.
True = The system will call a configured OFAC interface when a claim payee is added to the system.
False = No call is made.
Compliance Workflow Queue Unique identifier for the Workflow Queue that receives Diary Items for the OFAC matches. 0 = N/A
2 = Underwriting Exceptions

3 = New Loss
0 = N/A

Disable Real Time Claim Payee Processing

Determines if the system should prevent the call to a configured OFAC interface when a claim payee is added to the system.

False = Do not prevent the call to a configured OFAC interface when a claim payee is added to the system.

True = Prevent the call to a configured OFAC interface when a claim payee is added to the system.

False = Do not prevent the call to a configured OFAC interface when a claim payee is added to the system.

Policy Enabled

Used to determine if the system should attempt to call a configured OFAC interface at policy issuance.

False = No call is made.
True = The system will call a configured OFAC interface at policy issuance.

False = No call is made.

Prelude

PayFlag

File Based Adapter

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled Determines if the system is using the file based interface (or adapter) to the Prelude PayFlag product. False =  The system is not using the file based interface.
True = The system uses the file based interface (adapter) to the Prelude PayFlag product.
False = The system is not using the file based interface.
Read Path Directory name of where the XML files will be placed by the PayFlag product for Diamond to process. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Thread Count Number of worker threads to use when scanning and processing files in the output path. Implementation Specific; user defined. 5
Write Path Directory name of where the XML files will be placed for the PayFlag product to process. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank

People Soft

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Active

Determines if the People Soft Interface is being used in Diamond Administration.

0 = Disable.
1 = Enable. The People Soft function is displayed in the Diamond Administration Tree View and is available for use.

0 = Disable.

Policy

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Agency Change at Renewal

Allows / disallows a user to change an agency when a policy is renewed. It has also been modified to allow agency changes on renewal underwriting images.

False = Do not allow an agency to be changed at renewal and on renewal underwriting changes.
True = Allow an agency to be changed at renewal and on renewal underwriting changes.

True = Allow an agency to be changed at renewal and on renewal underwriting changes.

Allow Agency Change on Endorsement

Allows / disallows agents / producers to be changed on endorsements.

False = Do not allow agents / producers to be changed on endorsements.
True = Allow agents / producers to be changed on endorsements.

True = Allow agents / producers to be changed on endorsements.

Allow Resizeable Policy Splitter Control

Determines if users can resize the Policy Control screen.

False = Do not allow the Policy Control screen to be resized.
True = Enable. Allow the Policy Control screen to be resized.

False = Do not allow the Policy Control screen to be resized.

Allow User To Automatically Acquire Pending Images

This determines if a user will be asked if they want to acquire a policy when they open one that is "Pending" by another user.

False = Disable.

True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Allow User To Automatically Acquire Pending Quotes

Allows a user (who is not the owner) of a "Pending" quote to open the quote. A message box pops up and asks: "Do you wish to acquire this quote?" If the answer is "Yes," the user can acquire the quote.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.

True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Always Display Policy After Issuance

This determines if, when a policy is issued, it will remain open for the user to view.

True = An issued policy will remain open for viewing.
False = The issued policy will not remain open unless the Policy Issue Action (set up via Agency Administration) for the agency on the policy is set to "Leave Policy Open."

False = The issued policy will not remain open unless the Policy Issue Action (set up via Agency Administration) for the agency on the policy is set to "Leave Policy Open."

ALWAYS ENABLE CREDIT CARD

Disables or enables the Credit Card button for "Pending" New Business policies and quotes regardless of the pay plan selected.

False = Disable the Credit Card button.
True = Enable the Credit Card button.

False = Disable the Credit Card button.

ALWAYS ENABLE EFT

Disables or enables the EFT button for "Pending" New Business policies and quotes regardless of the pay plan selected.

False = Disable the EFT button.
True = Enable the EFT button.

 False = Disable the EFT button.

Default Summary Tab to Policy Billing View

Determines if the Summary tab on the Policy Control screen loads with the Policy and Bill check boxes selected which displays a view of billing similar to what is on the Billing Statement Display screen but with policy transactions included.

False = Disable.

True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Delete Client with Policy

This determines whether or not the system will delete a client's record when the last policy image associated with that client is deleted from the system.
Some special notes include:

The client will not be deleted if any of the following conditions are true:

  • If the client has other policy / quote records in the system.

  • If the client has any Choice Point NCF Batch records in the system.

  • If the client has any People Soft Check records in the system.

  • If the client has any Contact records in the system.

  • If the client has any Prior Policy records in the system.

  • If the client has a linked user in the system.

  • If the client has any Attachment records in the system.

False = The client record will not be deleted when the last policy image is deleted.  
True = The client record will be deleted when the last policy image is deleted.

False = The client record will not be deleted when the last policy image is deleted.

Display Agency ASR and Underwriter User Email Address

This is used to determine if the Email Address (if present) for the underwriter and / or ASR user is displayed (if present) or not.

False = No address is displayed.

True = The ASR / or underwriter user’s Email Address is displayed, the associated policy has a valid ASR and / or Underwriter user assigned to it and the ASR and / or Underwriter user has an email address setup. The Email Address will display on the Policy Information and Policy Transaction Control.

False = No address is displayed.

 

Display Policy Fees in Premium Totals

This is used to determine if the premium fields on the UI will include coverages that are marked as Policy Fees (e.g., Surcharges) in the totals.

False = Coverages marked as Policy Fees are not included.
True = Anywhere the total policy premium is displayed, the coverages that are marked as Policy Fees are included.

False = Coverages marked as Policy Fees are not included.

Display ODEN Cancel Date

Determines if the message, "Display ODEN Cancel Date" is shown at the top of the Policy Control Screen.

False = Disable; only show message "Policy Cancelled Effective Date MM/DD/YYYY."

True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Display Trans Date Time for Policy History

This is used to determine if the system time for a transaction is displayed or not on the Policy History screen in the Windows UI.

False = No transaction date or time is displayed.

True = The system will display the date / time Trans Date on the Policy History screen in the Windows UI.

False = No transaction date or time is displayed.

Disallow Bill To Change Except on Pending New Bus and Renewals

Determines if the "Bill To" is disabled and users are only allowed to process payor changes using the billing transaction, "Change Payor."

False = Disable; the system allows bill to changes on endorsements.

True = Enable, the "Bill To" is disabled and users are only allowed to process payor changes using the billing transaction, "Change Payor."

False = Disable; the system allows bill to changes on endorsements.

DISALLOW PAY PLAN CHANGE EXCEPT ON PENDING NEWBUS AND RENEWALS

Determines if the Pay Plan fields on the Policy Control screen on all pending transactions except: New Business or Renewals are protected or not.

False = Disables the Pay Plan fields. If enabled, user may change pay plan on policy.
True = Enables the Pay Plan fields.

False = Disable the Pay Plan fields on the Policy Control screen.

Generate Stats Record

Determines if statistical records are generated or not

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Generate statistical records.

Minimize Reports for Citrix

For Citrix users. This determines if the Calculation screen is maximized or minimized when viewing the calculations for Preferred Homeowner additional coverages. If this setting is enabled, users can view additional pages without moving the Windows Task Bar at the bottom of the screen.  

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

No Save Message At Close On Non Pending Policies

The system triggers this message for ALL users and ALL issued policies: “No Save Message At Close On Non Pending Policies

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Policy Enabled

Determines if the Policy Processing System is being used or not.

False = Disable. Any functionality in Diamond that is not related to Claims processing is disabled.
True = Enable. The Policy Processing System is "Active" and in use.

True = Enable. The Policy Processing System is "Active" and in use.

Policy Number Suffix Stored Separately

Indicates if the policy number is saved in the database separate from a suffix normally attached to the policy number (i.e., APV10001-01 is saved in the database in separate fields as APV10001 and 01.

False = Policy number is not saved in the database separate from a suffix.
True =Policy number is saved in the database separate from a suffix.  

False = Policy number is not saved in the database separate from a suffix.

Pure New Business Enabled

This is used to determine whether the Pure New Business check box is displayed on the Policy Control screen or not.

False = Disable. Do not display the Pure New Business check box.
True = Enable. Display the Pure New Business check box.  

True = Enable. Display the Pure New Business check box.  

Remove Dash when Doing Policy Number Lookups

Determines if the system will remove the dash plus anything after it before looking up a policy number.

False = The system will work as it always has and will look up the policy number given the way it is in any policy look up such as Quick Policy Lookup or under Advanced Search Policy Number Lookup.
True = The system will remove the dash and anything after it before it tries to do a policy number lookup. This will allow users to enter a policy number such as APV 10001-00, and it will find policies that have a policy number of APV 10001.

False = The system will work as it always has and will look up the policy number given the way it is in any policy look up such as Quick Policy Lookup or under Advanced Search Policy Number Lookup.

Require Rating When Printing Quotes

Requires or does not require rating a quote when printing.

False = Do not require rating.
True = Require rating.

True = Require rating.

 

Save without Validations on Web

Used to determine if the system will validate data or not before it is saved when closing a policy.

False = The system will validate the data before allowing it to be saved just like it always has.

True = The system will save the data without validating it on the Employee Web. This will allow users to save partial information and not have to fill in all information correctly for it to be saved. The Save button has not changed and will validate; however, if the Close button or the tab is closed and the user wants to “Save,” the system will save the data that exists without validating it.

False = The system will validate the data before allowing it to be saved just like it always has.

Stats Export Path

For statistical reporting, this is the location where the stats export text file is written to.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Stats_Data.

Stats Output Template Path

For statistical reporting, this is used to hold the AAIS Excel spreadsheet totals.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\Stats_Template

Auto

Vehicle

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Default Garaged Address to Policy Holder Address

Used to determine when a new vehicle is added, its garaging address will default to the address of the Policyholder. 

False = Disable; do not default garaged address to the Policy Holder Address.
True = Enable. When a new vehicle is added, its garaging address will default to the address of the Policyholder. All subsequent vehicles' Garaging Address will default to that of the first vehicle. If a change is made to the policy holder's address, then all vehicle garages that match that address will be automatically updated.

False = Disable.

Fraud Prevention

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled Used to determine if the Fraud Prevention Entity Search is in use or not. False =Fraud Prevention Entity Search is not in use.
True = Fraud Prevention Entity Search is in use.
False =Fraud Prevention Entity Search is not in use.

Package

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Multiple Threads

This allows the Commercial Package Policy line of business to process "X" amount of postings on separate threads, reducing the time it takes to process Commercial Package policies.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

False.

Number of Threads

For Commercial Package Policies, this is the number of threads that run the Commercial Package Policy line of business in a multi-processor environment on the business server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Persistence

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Selective Loading / Saving

Used to determine if the System will do "Small Saves" (i.e., only policy data that has changed) when saving and loading data.

False = Disable; the system will use the current functionality for saving policy data (i.e., it will load all policy data including data that has not been changed).
True = Enable; the system will only load and save policy data that has changed (called a "Small" Save) when saving, rating and issuing a policy.

True = Enable; the system will load and save only policy data that has changed (called a "Small" Save) when saving, rating and issuing a policy.

Promote

Duplicate VIN Check

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Command Timeout Determines the command timeout used for executing the stored procedure (Vehicle) Check for Duplicate VIN. Implementation Specific; user defined. 3600
Enabled This is used to determine if the system will look for vehicles with the same VIN as the quote being that is being promoted. False = No query for duplicate VIN Numbers will be done.
True = Diamond will be queried for any matching (duplicate) VIN Numbers.
False = No query for duplicate VIN Numbers will be done.
Number of Days for Historical Policies Used to determine the number of days to subtract from the current system date for cancelled and / or policies that have expired. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Number of Days for Quote Policies Used to determine the number of days to subtract from the current system date for new business, quote policies. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0

Queued Policy Export

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Number of Threads

Determines the number of threads to use for processing.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

5

FTP

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Domain

Name of the user's domain for connecting to the target FTP server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<user domain>

Password

User's password for connecting to the target FTP server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<user password>

Proxy Domain

This is the user's domain for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy user domain>

Proxy Enabled

Determines if a proxy server is being used to forward calls through.

0 = Disable. No calls are forwarded through a proxy server.
1 = Enable. Calls are forwarded through a proxy server.

0 = Disable.

Proxy Name

This is the proxy server's name / IP address.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy server>

Proxy Password

This is the user's password for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy user password>

Proxy User Name

This is the user's user name for connection to the proxy server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<proxy user name>

 

Upload Files

Used to determine if your implementation will upload the files from the Error Log Export.

0 = Disable. The FTP upload is inactive.
1 = Enable. The FTP upload is active.

0 = Disable.

URL

This is the URL to the target FTP and subfolders.

Implementation specific; user defined.

ftp://ftp1.mywebaddress.com/
SubfolderA/SubfolderB.

User Name

User's user name for connecting to the target FTP server.

Implementation specific; user defined.

<user name>

Policy Archiving

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Archive Policy Months

This is used to define the number of months policies are archived. This archives policies with the most recent policy image expiration date and accounting date less than or equal to the current system date minus the number of "Archive Policy Months."

Implementation Specific; user defined.

12

Archive Quote Months

This is used to define the number of months quotes are archived. This archives quotes with the most recent quote image expiration date and accounting date less than or equal to the current system date minus the number of "Archive Quote Months."

Implementation Specific; user defined.

6

Policy Batch Size

This archives policies in batches of a defined size in order to help minimize the size of the transaction log. The default is "100." 

Implementation Specific; user defined.

100

Policy Process Count

This determines the number of policies that can be processed at a time during the Policy Archive Process.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

10

Policy Purging

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Delete Archived Quote Days

This determines if archived images will be deleted or not from Diamond.

-1 = No archived images will be deleted from the database when it is set to this value. If it is set to something greater than 0, the system will add together the Purge New Business Quote Days and the Delete Archived Quote Days and if the archived image trans_date is more than that many days from the system date, the system will remove the archived image from the database.
Implementation Specific; user defined.

-1

Purge Endt Quote Days

This determines the number of days to automatically purge endorsement quotes in End of Day Processing when the Purge Quote Days Process is selected. Quotes are completely deleted from Diamond.

-1 = If this is set to minus (-) 1, Endorsement quotes will not be deleted.
Implementation Specific; user defined.

60

Purge New Business Quote Days

This is the number of days to automatically purge new business quotes in End of Day Processing when the Purge Quote Days Process is selected. Quotes are completely deleted from Diamond.

-1 = If this is set to minus (-) 1, it will not purge new business quotes. Implementation Specific; user defined.

60

Purge Policies Allowed

This is used to determine if policies can be purged in a Production environment or not.

0 = Disable. Users are not allowed to purge policies in a Production environment. A validation message is returned to the user indicating that policy purging is disabled.
1 = Enable. Allow policies to be purged in a Production environment.

1 = Enable. Allow policies to be purged in a Production environment.

Purge Policy Months

Number of months to automatically purge policies in End of Day Processing when Purge Policy Months Process is selected. Once this process completes, all policies are completely deleted from the system.

Numeric value. Implementation Specific; user defined.

12

Purge Reinstatement Quote Days

This is used to determine the number of days for the deletion of Reinstatement Quotes.

Numeric value. Implementation Specific; user defined.

-1 = This indicates that no Reinstatement Quote will be deleted.
If it is set to 0 or higher, the system will delete Reinstatement Quotes after that many days have passed. This is similar to what is currently done for New Business and Endorsement Quotes.   

Printing

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Agency Administration Default Print Locations to Home Office

This is used to determine if Insured and Memo / Third Party copies will default to the Home Office or not.

False = The Insured and Memo / Third Party copies will not default to the Home Office. They will default to the Agency Office.
True = The Insured and Memo / Third Party copies will default to the Home Office.

False = The Insured and Memo / Third Party copies will not default to the Home Office. They will default to the Agency Office.

Always Add Non Renewal to Future Events

Determines if Non Renewals are always added to Future Events or added based on the Transaction Reason.

False = Disable; Non Renewal Notices are added to Future Events based on the Transaction Reason.
True = Enable; No Renewal Notices are always added to Future Events.

False = Disable; Non Renewal Notices are added to Future Events based on the Transaction Reason.

Attach Static Data

Used to define the static data values in the XML.

False = Disable. Static Data values are not defined.
True = Enable. Define the Static Data values in the XML. For example, Sex Id 1 will be defined (as an attribute off the node) as "Male."

True = Enable. Define the Static Data values in the XML. For example, Sex Id 1 will be defined (as an attribute off the node) as "Male."

Batch Export Thread Count

Allows the Batch Print Process in End of Day to run in a multi-thread environment; used to determine the number of threads.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

12

Bill To Recipient Ignore Existing

Determines if the same Bill To recipient (if they already exist) is added a second time so they will receive an additional copy of a form, such as an Invoice, etc.

False = Disable. The system does not add an already existing recipient if they are the "Bill To."
True = Enable. The system will add the same Bill To recipient again (if they already exist) a second time so they will receive an additional copy of a form, such as an Invoice, etc.

False = Disable. The system does not add an already existing recipient if they are the "Bill To."

Create OOS Cancellation Print

Determines if forms and print are generated for OOS Cancellations.

False =  Forms and print are not generated for OOS Cancellations.

True = Forms and print are generated for OOS Cancellations.

False =  Forms and print are not generated for OOS Cancellations.

Default for Print Agent Copies

Determines if the Print Agent Copies field defaults with a check mark in Diamond Administration: Agency Setup when adding a new agency.

False = Disable; Print Agent field defaults unchecked.
True = Enable; Print Agent field defaults checked.

False = Disable; Print Agent field defaults unchecked.

Default View Form Category

Determines how the Print History screen is loaded: Form Category View or Standard View.

False = The Print History screen is loaded in Standard View.
True = The Print History screen defaults a check mark in the Form Category View field and automatically loads the Print History screen in Form Category View.

False = The Print History screen is loaded in Standard View.

Directory Timeout

The number of milliseconds the reprint functionality will wait for a .PDF to be created before timing out.

100000 milliseconds = 1 second

100000

Disable Print Solution

Allows clients to disable the Base Solution Print function while performing performance testing.

False = Process Print normally.
True = Disable the Base Print Solution. This allows clients to temporarily turn off Base Print when doing performance testing

False = Process Print normally.

Disable Print All

Disables / enables the Print All selection.

False = Enable the Print All button.

True = Disable the Print All button.

False = Enable the Print All button.

Distinct AIs Only for Policy Level Attachment

Attaches only unique additional interest copies for Policy Level forms with AI recipients / ELIOS copies enabled.

False = Attach all AI nums on policy.

True = Only generate one attachment per AI (Name / address).

False = Do not attach copies.

ELIOS File Path

This is the path / directory that holds the file generated in End of Day Processing when the process "Generate ELIOS File" contains a check mark. The system checks any information in the ELIOS table that is not processed and sets a flag to "True" (Process). It writes the information to the path / directory specified.

User defined. Any network share or logical drive. Do not use a mapped drive.

C:\temp

Enable Reprint Tracking

When a reprint is issued, this determines if users can view who requested the reprint, what was reprinted and where the information was reprinted. This is accessed from the Print History tab / Reprints menu / Reprints All. Users must have the authority, "Reprint History," in the Policy Processing group.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Enable Print History on Quotes

Determines if quote events are allowed to be reprinted.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Enable Reprint History

When a reprint is issued, this allows users to view who requested the reprint, what was reprinted and where the information was reprinted. (This is accessed from the Print History tab / Reprints menu / Reprints All.)  

Implementation Specific.
False.
True.
(Note: Users must have the authority, "Reprint History," in the Policy Processing group.)

False.

Export Path

The directory path to which the batch print XMLs will be written.

Implementation Specific. Any network share or logical drive. Do not use a mapped drive.

C:\Temp

Export Real Time XML In Post Transaction Issuance

Determines whether or not a Print XML containing all forms of print type real time are exported in the post issuance process as opposed to waiting for a service.

False = Disable; do not export Print XML containing real time forms in post issuance.
True = Enable; export Print XML containing real time forms in post issuance.

False = Disable; do not export Print XML containing real time forms in post issuance.

Export Web Service Address

This is the name of the address for the Web Service to contact for delivering Print XMLs.

Implementation Specific; user defined

Blank

Export Web Service Class

The class of the Web Service to call.

Implementation Specific; user defined

Blank

 

Export Web Service Method

The function to call on the Web Service to save the Print XML.

Implementation Specific; user defined

Blank

Generate Print on Renewal Underwriting

Determines if print XMLS are generated for Renewal Underwriting images.

False = Disable. XMLS are not generated for Renewal Underwriting images.
True = Enable. XMLS are generated for Renewal Underwriting images.

True = Enable. XMLS are generated for Renewal Underwriting images.

Generate Real Time Forms In Rating

Enables or disables generation of all real time policy forms during the rating process

False = Disables generation of real time policy forms during rating.
True = Enables generation of real time policy forms during rating.

1 = Enable.

Include Single Account Image

For Account Bill Policies. Determines if the Print XML contains all account policy images or just one that has the form on it.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Include Third Party Data

Determines if the third party data (e.g., MVR, CLUE, etc.) will be included in the print XML output.


False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False

Insert Existing Account Links

Determines if all of the XMLs within the package are "packaged" into a single XML.

False = Do not package all of the XMLs within the package into a single XML.
True = Package all of the XMLs within the package into a single XML.

True = Package all of the XMLs within the package into a single XML.

Load Billing Previews for NB Renewal

Controls if the preview options will display in the Print XMLs with New Business. Renewals, Renewal Underwriting and Renewal Offers.

False = The preview options are not displayed.
True = Preview options are displayed.

False = The preview options are not displayed.

Load Claims Information

Determines whether Claims information is loaded into the Print XML or not.

False = Disable. Claims information is not loaded into the Print XML.
True = Enable. Claims information is loaded into the Print XML.

True = Enable. Claims information is loaded into the Print XML.

Load Notes

Determines if Notes for the policy will be loaded into the Print XML or not.

False = Notes are not loaded into the Print XML.
True = Notes for the policy are loaded into the Print XML.

True = Notes for the policy are loaded into the Print XML.

Load Print Process For Billing ID

Determines where Print Processing Loads from: Policy ID or Billing ID.

False = Load Print Processing from Policy ID.
True = Load Print Processing from Billing ID.

False = Load Print Processing from Policy ID.

Print Location (Note: Customers will need code added to use this functionality.)

Allows customers to specify where forms print at the policy level.

False = Will not print at the policy level.
True = Will print at the policy level; dependent on when code changes have been added.

False = Will not print at the policy level.

Print Current Billing Activity Only

Determines the type of printing for billing activity.

False = Disable; print all billing activity.
True = Enable; only print the activity since the last print process that called the function to add billing activity (i.e., only print billing activity that has occurred since the last time something was printed).

False = Disable; print all billing activity.

Print Interface Type

Used to determine the method of export. There are two methods of export: Directory or Stored Procedure. If set to Directory, a 3rd party vendor polls it in this location for XML files. If set to stored procedure, the 3rd party print vendor calls a stored procedure to return an XML stream with a collection of Print XMLs in it.

1 = Directory; write print XMLs out to a network file share.
2 = Stored procedure; pulled by the print vendor via stored procedure (no longer supported).

1 = Directory; write print XMLs out to a network file share.

Print Only For Latest OOS Image

Determines if the system should print all out of sequence images or just the latest OOS image.

False = Print only the latest image.
True = Print all images. (Note: If there are two or more reapplied images on a policy and that system setting was previously set, you should only get print for the latest reapply and the OOS image. For example:
1 = NB
2 = OOS Endt
3 = Endt
4 = Endt
5 = Reapply Endt
6 = Reapply Endt
If a user processes #2 (OOS), images #5 (Reapply Endt) and #6 (Reapply Endt) will be created if this is disabled. If the system setting is enabled, you will only get print on image #2 and image #6.

False = Print only the latest image.

Process ELIOS Records

This determines if a company is using the ELIOS (Electronic Lien holder Notification Service) functionality. When a policy is rated, information is written to the ELIOS table.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Real Time Export Path

The directory path to which real time print XMLs will be written.

Implementation Specific; do not use a mapped drive.

C:\Temp

Reprint Export Path

This system setting allows 3rd Party print vendors and users to poll reprints from the Print History screen.

Implementation Specific. Any network share or logical drive; do not use a mapped drive.

C:\Temp

Return PDF to Client

This setting determines if the Base Print Solution returns the .PDF to the client on a reprint and displays it to the client using the default .PDF viewer.

False = Disable; write out the XML file but do not attempt to open the resulting PDF file on the client machine.
True = Enable; write out the XML file and attempt to open the resulting PDF file on the client machine.

False = Disable

Show Archived Quotes in Print History

Used to determine if the system displays the archived quote print on the Print History screen.

False = Disable; archived quote print is not displayed on the Print History screen.
True = Enable;  archived quote print is displayed on the Print History screen.

False = Disable; archived quote print is not displayed on the Print History screen.

Suppress Batch on Agency Wizard

This suppresses the insured copy when agency packet is viewed.

False = The insured copy is not suppressed when agency packet is viewed.
True =  The insured copy is suppressed when agency packet is viewed.  

False = The insured copy is not suppressed when agency packet is viewed.

Update Billing Activities for Zero Balance

When End of Day Processing runs and an invoice is created with an outstanding amount = zero, this determines if all billing activity will be marked as "Processed" or not.

False = Disable; use current system functionality.
True = Enable. At End of Day when an invoice is being created and the current outstanding amount = "0.00," all billing activity will be marked as "Processed." 

False = Disable.

Use Async Web Service Methods

Used to determine which Print Web Service to call for Print XML compression.

False = Disable. The existing Print Web Service is called.
True = Enable. This will call the DiamondPrint
Service.Send
FileCompressed
Async service.

False = Disable.
 

Verify AI (Additional Interest) Address for ELIOS

Determines how AI (Additional Interest) records are processed in ELIOS.

False = The system does not check to see if the AI address is verified.
True = Only process ELIOS for an AI if the address is verified.

False = The system does not check to see if the AI address is verified.

Rating

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Continue Rating

This determines if the out of sequence functionality works the same way it always has in the past, which means if rating fails, a user will have to try and change the pending image to make sure rating no longer fails or if an out of sequence transaction has an image that fails rating, the system will stop on that image and allow the user to make changes to the out of sequence Q image and then be able to select the Continue Rating button. This  will then continue rating the policy from that image on. This gives the user the ability to correct items like driver assignment and other changes that can cause problems with out of sequence transactions.

False = Disable.
True = Enable. A user will need the authority, "Continue Rating," in the Policy Processing list of authorities if this is set to "1."

False = Disable.

Evaluate Change Flag Before Save

This is used to determine if the system evaluates the change flag by comparing previous / current copies of the image at rate or not. This can be used to increase system performance at rating.

False = The system does not use / evaluate the change flag.
True = The system uses / evaluate the change flag.

True = The system uses / evaluate the change flag.

Form Book Exceptions to Log

Determines if Form Book exceptions are logged to the Error Log or not.

False = Exceptions are not written to the Error Log.
True = Exceptions are written to the Error Log.

False = Exceptions are not written to the Error Log.

Process Automated Underwriting

This setting has been created to implement an interface with Blaze, which is an outside vendor that a company may use to automate the underwriting process during rating. The system interacts with an interface that is implemented by a Diamond customer to automatically underwrite policies.

False = Disable. Diamond customers' systems rate as they previously have been rating.
True = Enable. The Diamond system will call the interface whose location is being stored in the Version table to underwrite the policy.

False = Disable.

 

Rate Book Exceptions to Log

Determines if Rate Book exceptions are logged to the Error Log or not.

False = Exceptions are not written to the Error Log.
True = Exceptions are written to the Error Log.

False = Exceptions are not written to the Error Log.

Save With Rating Failure

Determines if rating fails for some reason, rating will continue and pick up any changes made.

Implementation Specific.
False = The policy skips the Save / Load function and does not include any changes made on the policy.
True = Rating continues and picks up any changes made.

False = The policy skips the Save / Load function and does not include any changes made on the policy.

Underwriting Book Exceptions to Log

Determines if Underwriting Book exceptions are logged to the Error Log or not.

False = Exceptions are not written to the Error Log.
True = Exceptions are written to the Error Log.

False = Exceptions are not written to the Error Log.

Use Leap Year Pro Rate Factor

Determines if Leap year pro rate factor is applied.

False = Do not use.
True = Use Leap Year Pro Rate Factor

False = Do not use.

Web Rating Use Limit Bag for Auto Checkbox Coverages

Determines how coverages for auto are processed in the Web Service.

False = Disable; the system will process personal auto check box coverages by using the coverage Limit_id instead of the Limit Bag check box field.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Renewals

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enable Renewal Underwriting

Displays the Renewal Underwriting Tab on the Policy Control screen when a Renewal Underwriting Transaction has been made.

False = Do not display the Renewal Underwriting Tab when a Renewal Underwriting Transaction has been made.
True = Display the Renewal Underwriting Tab when a Renewal Underwriting Transaction has been made.

True = Display the Renewal Underwriting Tab when a Renewal Underwriting Transaction has been made.

Reports

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Auto-Default Report Parameters

This is used to determine if parameters automatically default to the value specified

in the Default Parameter Value field on each report.

False =The Default Parameter field defaults to “No.” User must select the parameters and execute the report manually.   
True = The Default Parameter field defaults to “Yes.” This returns all the report parameters with their default values and then automatically executes the report.

False =The Default Parameter field defaults to “No.” User must select the parameters and execute the report manually.  

Base Report Folder

The name of the common folder where the reports exist at your implementation's site.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C0

On-Line Reports Location

This is used to specify the location of the Reports server.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Report Format

Used to determine the report format, or what the Diamond client sees when a report is chosen from the On-Line button on the Diamond Main menu.

1 = .HTML
2 = .PDF

1 = .HTML

Subfolder Report Path

Used to specify where Diamond Reports are stored.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Rules Engine

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Bypass on OOS

Determines if the Rules Engine is called on Out of Sequence Transaction.

False = Rules Engine is called on out of Sequence Transactions.

True = Rules Engine is not called on out of Sequence Transactions.

False = Rules Engine is called on out of Sequence Transactions.

Claim Form Triggers Enabled

Determines if Rules Engine is called for claims triggers.

False = Rules Engine is not called for claims triggers.
True = Rules Engine is called for claims triggers.

False = Rules Engine is not called for claims triggers.

Claim Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine is called during Claims.

False = Do not call the Rules Engine during Claims.

True = Call the Rules Engine during claims.

True = Call the Rules Engine during claims.

Default Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine makes calls to Diamond Common Rules for Modifier, Dwelling, Driver, Vehicle, Filing Info, Accident Violation, Garaged Address, Policy Modification, Prior Carrier, Loss History, Policy Level, Operator, Personal Injury Protection, Applicant, Acreage, Barn Building, Inland Marine and RV/ Watercraft

False = Rules Engine is called

True = Rules Engine is not called.

False = Rules Engine is called.

Design Enabled

Determines if the function, Rules (Diamond Administration) can be accessed.

False = Disable. Users receive a warning message: "The Rules Engine has not been enabled. Please contact the system administrator."
True = Enable.

True = Enabled.

 

Domain Name

This is the Domain Name to be used for UW Approvals done through the Rules Engine in Diamond Administration.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Insuresoft

Endorsement Issue Prior Data Rules Enabled

This is used to determine if a policy's image data should be passed with the current image data on issuance of a non Out of Sequence Endorsement.

False = At issuance of a non Out of Sequence Endorsement, the prior image data will be not be passed along with the current image data to the Rules Engine.
True = At issuance of a non Out of Sequence Endorsement, the prior image data will be passed along with the current image data to the Rules Engine.

False = At issuance of a non Out of Sequence Endorsement, the prior image data will be not be passed along with the current image data to the Rules Engine.

Issue Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine is called during issuance.

False = The Rules Engine is not called during issuance.   
True = When "Execution Enabled” is set to “True” and “Issue Rules Enabled,” is also set to “True” (Enable), the Rules Engine is called during issuance.

True = The Rules Engine is called during issuance.

Load Choice Point Transmission Data

Used to determine if Choice Point Transmission data is loaded for the Rules Engine.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Load Pre-Process Renewal Trigger

Indicates whether to load pre-process renewal trigger into Rules Engine as an option.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Logging Enabled

Used to determine if the Rules Engine logging is turned on.

False = Disabled;
Rules Engine Logging is not turned on.
True = Enabled; Rules Engine Logging is turned on.

False = Disabled;
Rules Engine Logging is not turned on.

Navigation Rules Enabled

Determines if Rules Engine is called during Web Workflow navigation.

False = Rules Engine is called not during Web Workflow navigation.
True = Rules Engine is called during Web Workflow navigation.

False = Rules Engine is called not during Web Workflow navigation.

Post Issue Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine is called after a policy's issuance.

False = The Rules engine is not checked at all.

True = The Rules Engine is fired after policy issuance; does not prevent policy from being issued.

False = The Rules engine is not checked at all.

Post Rate Rules Enabled

This determines if the Rules Engine is called after rating is complete. This allows for Rules to be written against data that is set or manipulated in rating, such as FTP, Credits or Surcharges.

False = The Rules Engine is not called after rating completes.

True = The Rules Engine is called after rating completes.

False = The Rules Engine is not called after rating completes.

Process Client Rules

This function determines whether or not to invoke the Rules Engine for client data.

False = Rules cannot be written at the Client Level.

True = The Rules Engine is invoked so users may write rules at the Client Level.

False = Rules cannot be written at the Client Level.

Promote Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine is called during promote.

False = The Rules Engine is not called during promote.   
True = When "Execution Enabled” is set to “True” and “Promote Rules Enabled,” is also set to “True” (Enable), the Rules Engine is called during promote.

True = The Rules Engine is called during promote.

Rate Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine is called during rating.

False = The Rules Engine is not called during rating.   
True = When "Execution Enabled” is set to “True” and “Rate Rules Enabled,” is also set to “True” (Enable), the Rules Engine is called during rating.

True = The Rules Engine is called during rating.

Record Diagnostic Info

Determines whether or not to store debug information.

False = Do not store debug information.

True = Store debug information.

False = Do not store debug information.

Renewal Issue Prior Data Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine processes prior data rules on Renewal issue or not.

False = The Rules Engine does not process prior data rules on a Renewal issue.
True = The Rules Engine processes prior data rules on a Renewal issue.

False = The Rules Engine does not process prior data rules on a Renewal issue.

Small Save Validation Rules Enabled

Used to determine if small save validations for Driver, Vehicle and Location are made or not.

False = Disable. Small save validations are turned off.
True = Enable. Small save validations for Driver, Vehicle and Location are made.

False = Disable. Small save validations are turned off.

Submit Rules Enabled

Determines if the Rules Engine is called during submission.

False = The Rules Engine is not called during submission.   
True = When "Execution Enabled” is set to “True” and “Submit Rules Enabled,” is also set to “True” (Enable), the Rules Engine is called during submission.

True = The Rules Engine is called during submission.

Use Database

Determines the source for loading information in the Rules Engine.

False = The information will load form the XML files.
True = The information will load from the database.

False = The information will load form the XML files.

User Name

This is the User Account Name to be used for UW Approvals done through the Rules Engine in Diamond Administration.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Rule Engine

Use WF

Determines if the Windows Workflow is used for the Rules Engine or not.

False = The Windows Workflow is not being used for the Rules Engine.

True = The Windows Workflow is used for the Rules Engine.

False = The Windows Workflow is not being used for the Rules Engine.

Diagnostics

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Send Diagnostic Information to UI

This is used to determine if diagnostic information is sent / not sent to the Rules Engine that indicates why a rule did not generate a message.

False = Information is not sent.

True = Information is sent to the Rules Engine indicating why a rule did not generate a message.

False = Information is not sent.  

Logging

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Determines if the system attempts to create log records for each rule that is executed.

False = Do not create records.

True = Create log records for each rule that is executed.

True = Create log records for each rule that is executed.

Overwrite Records

Determines if the system overwrites existing log records for each rule that is executed.

False = Do not overwrite existing log records for each rule that is executed.

True = Overwrite existing log records for each rule that is executed.

True = Overwrite existing log records for each rule that is executed.

Tracing

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Level

Determines the level of tracing used for executing rules.

1 = Normal

2 = Verbose

1 = Normal

Tracking

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Determines if enhancing tracking is used for executing rules.

False = Enhanced tracking is not used.

True = Enhanced Tracking is used.

True = Enhanced Tracking is used.

Execution

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Mode

Determines the mode for executing rules.

1 = Synchronous

2 = Asynchronous

3 = Parallel

2 = Asynchronous

Caching

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Determines if caching is used for executing rules.

False = Caching is not used.
True = Caching is used.

True = Caching is used.

Load Additional Data

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Enabled

Used to determine if additional data is loaded for the Rules Engine.

False = No additional data is loaded for the Rules Engine.

True = Additional data is loaded for the Rules Engine.

False = No additional data is loaded for the Rules Engine.

Choice Point

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

All Credit Reports for Clients

Used to determine if all Credit Reports for the client are returned or not.

False = Only credit reports for the policy are returned

True = All credit reports for the client are returned.

False = Only credit reports for the policy are returned

Enabled

Determines if Choice Point Transmission Data should be loaded for the Rules Engine.

False = Choice Point Transmission Data is not loaded for the Rules Engine.

True = Choice Point Transmission Data is loaded for the Rules Engine.

True = Choice Point Transmission Data is loaded for the Rules Engine.

Max Number of Years for Report

This is used to determine the number of years from the policy effective date that a report will be returned. If set to “0,” every report is returned regardless of age.

Implementation specific; user defined.

3 (Years)

Sales Center

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Contact Import Control Name

This identifies the class name from the "Sales Center / Sales Center Plugin Assembly Name" .NET assembly that contains the control to be displayed for the Contact Import Process in Diamond Processes.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Contact Import Control

Enable Sales Center Control

Determines if the Sales Center button is enabled or not on the Diamond Main Menu.

False = Disable
True = Enable

0 = Disable

Purge Contacts Control Name

This setting holds the name of the Control contained in the Sales Center Plugin Assembly used for the Purge Contacts process. (The Sales Center Plugin Assembly is identified by the "Sales Center / Sales Center Plugin Assembly Name" system setting.)

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Purge Contacts Control

Purge Contacts Lead Days

This setting holds the number of days that should be subtracted from the current Diamond System date. The result will be displayed as the default value in the Purge Contacts process found in Diamond Processes.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

180 (Days)

Purge Contacts Timeout

Used to determine the number of milliseconds to wait before the Purge Contacts Process times out.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

7200

Sales Center Agency Producer ID

Determines the default Agency Producer ID when a policy is submitted from the Sales

Center Module.

 Implementation specific; user defined.

0 (Note: Unless it is set to a valid producer ID, all Sales Center submissions will default "Agency Producer" to blank.)

Sales Center Application Form Class Name

This identifies the class name from the "Sales Center / Sales Center Plugin Assembly Name" .NET assembly that contains the form to be displayed for the Sales Center Module in the Diamond application.

Implementation specific; user defined.

SalesCenterApplicationMdiForm

Sales Center Plugin Assembly Name

This setting identifies the .NET assembly name that implements the Diamond.UI.Interfaces.Plugins.ISalesCenterPlugin interface. This control is used to display the Sales Center Module in the Diamond application.

Implementation specific; user defined.

Diamond.UI.SalesCenterPlugin.dll

Security

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Guest Access

Allows a "Guest User" to login to the Agency Web Portal (Diamond.)

False = Does not allow a "Guest User" to login to Diamond access.
True = Allows a "Guest User" to login to Diamond access.

False = Disable; do not allow "Guest User" access.

Enable Encryption
(Important Note! Code changes are required to be made before using the Encryption functionality!)

This determines if Encryption functionality is being used or not. Depending on this value being enabled and a user's authority to view credit card numbers, bank account numbers, social security numbers, etc., Diamond will or will not display the full numbers to secure identity. Encryption is based on the client not on the policy.

False = Disable. Encryption is disabled for new clients. If there are existing clients with encrypted data, the data for those existing clients is still decrypted and displayed properly. When creating a policy that is linked to an existing client having encrypted data, this causes the new policy's data to be encrypted even if the setting is disabled. Encryption is based on the client...not the policy.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

 

Enable Encryption for User Security Questions

Determines if the system will encrypt the answers to the user's security questions before saving them to the database.  The system will also decrypt the answers when loading from the database.

False = Disable. The system will not encrypt the answers to the user's security questions before saving them to the database.
True = Enable. The system will encrypt the answers to the user's security questions before saving them to the database.  The system will also decrypt the answers when loading from the database.

False = Disable.

 

Use Agency Groups

Determines if Agency Groups will be used or not.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable; do not use Agency Groups

Use Lexis Nexis Masking Group

Determines if the system will mask sensitive data according to Lexis Nexis masking standards.

False = Do not mask using Lexis Nexis standards.

True =mask using Lexis Nexis standards.

False = Do not mask using Lexis Nexis standards.

Email Notification

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Change Password Subject

Determines the reset password's email subject line. If a value is not specified, the text: "Next Web Login / Password Information - PLEASE DO NOT REPLY" is used.

Blank

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Company or Site Name

This is your company's / site name that is substituted in the body of the email.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Insuresoft Agency Web

Contact Info Message

This is the information that displays at the bottom of the mail message explaining what to do if you (the user) were not the one to request the new password (e.g., "If you, or another authorized user did not request this change, please go to our web site here: http: <Your company's web site.>")

Implementation Specific; user defined.

If you, or another authorized user, did not request this change, please go to our Web Site here:\n\nhttp://localhost/
DiamondAccess/home.aspx

Force Password Change Next Login

This determines if the user is required to change their password the next time they log in to the web.

False = Do not require the user to change their password on the next login attempt.
True = Require the user to change their password on the next login attempt.

False = Do not require the user to change their password on the next login attempt.

From User Name

This is the user's name that displays in the email's "From" address (e.g., tsmith@insuresoft.com.)

Implementation Specific; user defined.

webapp@insuresoft.com

 

Mail Server

This is the name of your company's email server (e.g., Exchange).

Implementation Specific; user defined.

 

AL-EXCHANGE.Insuresoft.com

Send Email to Agency

This determines if an email is sent to the agency email address who the user belongs to.

False = Do not send an email.
True = Send an email.

False = Do not send an email.

Send Email to User

This determines if an email is sent to the specific user whose password was changed.

False = Do not send an email.
True = Send an email.

True = Send an email.  

 

Submission

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Linked Name Edit

From Application Submission screen, allow / disallow editing of client linked name.  

False = Disable; disallow edit function.
True = Enable; allow edit function.

True = Enable; allow edit function of client linked name.

Allow Manual Policy Number Text Entry

Allow / disallow manual entry of policy numbers on Application Submission screen.

False = Disable; disallow manual entry of policy number.
True = Enable; allow manual entry of policy number.

True = Enable; allow manual entry of policy number.

Allow Out of Seq Before Converted Image

Allows / disallows an out of sequence endorsement that occurs before a converted image to be issued.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

Allow Out Of Seq On Future Cancel

Allows / disallows submission on policies with a future cancel image.

False = Disable; disallow submission.
True = Enable; allow submission.

True = Enable; allow submission on policies with a future cancel image.

Allow Reinstates on Cancel Rewrite

Enable / disable reinstatement transaction on a canceled policy created from a cancel / rewrite transaction.

False = Disable reinstatement on cancel / rewrite policies
True = Enable reinstatement on cancel / rewrite policies

False = Disable reinstatement on cancel / rewrite policies.

Allow Renewal Offers Effective in the Past

Used to determine if the system will allow Renewal Offers that are effective in the past.

False = Do not allow Renewal Offers effective in the past.
True = Allow Renewal Offers effective in the past.

True = Allow Renewal Offers effective in the past.

Allow Submit App With EOD

Determines if users are allowed to submit policy applications while End of Day Processing is running.

False = Disable.
True = Enable. users are allowed to submit applications while End of Day is processing; no warning is returned. Users can only submit applications. They cannot rate & issue transactions.

False = Disable.

Allow Submit Quote With EOD

Determines if users are allowed to submit quotes while End of Day Processing is running.

False = Disable. Users are not allowed to submit quotes.
True = Enable. Users are allowed to submit quotes while End of Day Processing is running.

False = Disable.

 

Automatically Check Go To Policy

Enables / disables the Policy Control screen to be automatically launched from the Application Submission screen when the Submit button is used.

True = Go directly to the Policy Control screen on Submit.
False = Return the Application Submission screen on Submit.

True = Go directly to the Policy Control screen on Submit.

Automatically Issue Cancels and Reinstates

Enable / disable the automatic issuance of cancel / reinstate policies on Transaction Submission screen.

False = Disable automatic issuance of cancel  / reinstate policies. Displays edit for issuance.
True = Enable automatic issuance of cancel / reinstate policies.

False = Disable automatic issuance of cancel  / reinstate policies. Displays edit for issuance.

Automatically Transfer Credit Balances on Cancel Rewrites

Allows / disallows credit balances to be transferred from a cancelled policy to the rewritten policy at submission for Cancel-Rewrite transaction.

False = Disallow credit balances. to be transferred
True = Allow credit balances to be transferred.

False = Disallow credit balances to be transferred.

Automatically Transfer Credit Balance on Rewrites

Allows / disallows credit balances to be transferred from a cancelled policy to the rewritten policy at submission for Rewrite transactions.

False = Disallow credit balances to be transferred.
True = Allow credit balances to be transferred.

False = Disallow credit balances to be transferred.

DISABLE PAYMENT INFO GROUP  

Disables / enables all fields in Payment Information frame on Application / Quote Submission screens (Note: Disables the Cash With App feature.)

False = Enable Payment Information fields.
True = Disable Payment Information fields.

True = Enable Payment Information fields.

Disable Transaction Quote

When processing an Endorsement, this setting is used to determine if the transaction is processed as a "Pending" endorsement or if it is processed as a "Quote" endorsement.

True = Process Endorsement as Quote.
False = Process as Pending Endorsement.

True = Process as Pending Endorsement.

Display ASR

Determines if the ASR field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

False = Disable. The ASR field is not displayed.
True = Enable. The ASR field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

True = Enable. The ASR field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

Display Billing Location

Determines if the Billing Location section is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

False = Disable. The Billing Location section is not displayed.
True = Enable. The Billing Location section is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

True = Enable. The Billing Location section is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

Display Guaranteed Rate Period Section

Determines if the Guaranteed Rate section is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

False = Disable. The Guaranteed Rate section is not displayed.
True = Enable. The Guaranteed Rate section is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

True = Enable. The Guaranteed Rate section is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

Display Producer

Determines if the Producer field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

False = Do not display.

True = Display Producer field on Application Submission screen.

True = Display Producer field on Application Submission screen.

Display Referred By

Determines if the Referred By field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

False = Disable. The Referred By field is not displayed.
True = Enable. The Referred By field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

True = Enable. The Referred By field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

Display Target Premium

Determines if the Target Premium field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

False = Disable. The Target Premium field is not displayed.
True = Enable. The Target Premium field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

True = Enable. The Target Premium field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

Display Underwriter

Determines if the Underwriter field is displayed on the Application Submission screen.

False = Do not display.

True = Display Underwriter field on Application Submission screen.

True = Display Underwriter field on Application Submission screen.

Enable Submit New Business App Screen  

Disable / enable the New Business Application screen.

False = Disable the New Business Application screen.
True = Enable the New Business Application screen.

True = Enable the New Business Application screen.

Enable Submit New Business Quote Screen  

Disable / enable the New Business Quote screen.

False = Disable the New Business Quote screen
True = Enable the New Business Quote screen.

True = Enable the New Business Quote screen.

Max Months Future For Cancel Reinstate Trans

If this is set to any number but zero (0), the system will not allow cancellation or reinstatement transactions to occur however many months in the future the setting is set to from the system date.

User specified number of months.

0 (Months)

Max Months Future For Endorsement Trans

The value entered here represents the number of months in the future a user can enter an endorsement from the system date. For example, if this is set to “3” and the system date is 09/01/2006, an endorsement can be entered as far back as 12/01/2006.

User specified number of months.

0 (Months)

 

Max Months Future For Trans    

Number of months from system date to allow for future "New Business" transactions only. The system presents an invalid date message and a new image is not created if it fails the new business entry point from the system date.

Numeric; user defined. Implementation Specific.

6 (Months)

Max Months Past For Cancel Reinstate Trans

If this is set to any number but zero (0), the system will not allow cancellation or reinstatement transactions to occur however many months in the past the setting is set to from the system date.

User specified number of months.

 

0 (Months)

Max Months Past For Endorsement Trans

The value entered here represents the number of months in the past a user can enter an endorsement from the system date. For example, if this is set to “3” and the system date is 12/01/2006, an endorsement can be entered as far back as 09/01/2006.

User specified number of months.

0 (Months)

Max Months Past For Trans   

Number of months from system date to allow for past "New Business" transactions only. The system presents an invalid date message and a new image is not created if it fails the new business entry point from the system date.

Numeric; user defined. Implementation Specific.

24

Require Policy Entry On UI

Determines if the Policy Number button and the policy number test box are enabled or disabled on the Application Submission screen.

False = Disable.
True = Enable. If enabled, the business checks to make sure a policy number is entered before the policy can be submitted.

True = Enable. The business checks to make sure a policy number is entered before the policy can be submitted.

Resolve Additional Interest List Entries

This is used to determine if the system checks the Additional Interest List entries for matching names / addresses when a new application or quote is submitted.

False = Disable. The system will not check the AI List entries by matching names / addresses when  a new app or quote is submitted.
True = Enable. The system will resolve Additional Interest List entries by matching names and / or addresses when a new application or quote is submitted into the system.

False = Disable.

Show Policy Number on Employee Web

This determines if policy information is shown and can be used for entry on the Application Submission screen on the Employee Web.

False = The New Policy Number button and the manual entry field are not displayed.

True = Either the New Policy Number button will display along with a manual entry field, or, if the policy number is not required, only the manual Policy Number entry field will display. (Note: This is determined by the existing system setting, "Allow Manual Policy Number Text Entry" in the Submission folder.)

False = The New Policy Number button and the manual entry field are not displayed.

Transaction Remark Length

This defines the number of characters that can be entered in the Transaction Remarks text box when issuing a Renewal Underwriting transaction. The text entered here is then printed in the appropriate area on the Renewal Underwriting Notice. Code has been added call to implementation printing when issuing Renewal Underwriting transactions if suppress printing is equal to "False."

Implementation Specific; user defined.

255
(Note: The maximum value that can be entered is "1100" characters. If more than 1100 characters are entered, Diamond does not save the additional characters.)

Verify Bill Method On Rewrites Before Transfer

 This setting works together with the “Automatically Transfer Credit Balance On Cancel Rewrites” and / or “Automatically Transfer Credit Balance On Rewrites" system settings (Submission folder). If either of these two (2) settings are set to "1" (Enabled) and if the "Verify Bill Method On Rewrites Before Transfer" is set to "1" (Enable), the system returns a validation asking if the new policy will be an "Agency Bill" on Cancel-Rewrites and Rewrites.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Verify Producer License Dates

This determines whether or not the producer license dates are verified when new applications or quotes are submitted. If the license is no longer valid, a warning is displayed; however, the application can still be submitted.

False = False = The producer’s license is not verified and no warning is shown.

True = The system verifies the validity of a producer’s license. If it is no longer valid a warning message will display and the application or quote can still be submitted.

False = False = The producer’s license is not verified and no warning is shown.

Testing

Transactions

Fields

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Employee user to issue transactions on closed agency

Determines if employee users can issue transactions on policies that are tied to a closed agency.

False - Employee users cannot issue transactions on a closed agency.

True = Employee users can issue transactions on a closed agency.

False - Employee users cannot issue transactions on a closed agency.

Allow Users to Process Rewrites and Cancel / Rewrites on Policies With an Outstanding Balance

This is used to determine if all users are allowed to issue policies on Rewrite and Cancel Rewrite transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policy.

False = This prevents agency users from issuing policies on Rewrite and Cancel Rewrite transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policy. Employee users will still be allowed to issue.

True = All users can issue policies on Rewrite and Cancel Rewrite transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policy.  

True = All users can issue policies on Rewrite and Cancel Rewrite transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policy.

Allow OOS Cancel Or Reinstate On Mort Policies No Bill To Set

This setting determines if the Bill To validation for a mortgagee is returned on an out of sequence cancellation.

False = Disable; system works the same as before and requires there to be a mortgagee set up as the "Bill To" on an out of sequence cancellation of mortgagee policies.

True = The system allows an out of sequence cancellation to go through without the validation.

False = Disable.

Allow Tiering at Renewal (For companies using the Tiering functionality.)

Determines if the Tiering button displays on the Policy Control screen toolbar for "Pending" renewal or quote images so that the policy can be rated on another company / state / line of business.

False = Disable.

True = Enable. This allows the Tiering button to display on "Pending" renewal or quote images so that the policy can be rated on another company / state / line of business. Quotes will not be allowed to be issued. If a user wants to issue the policy with the new company / state / line of business, they will need to Cancel-Rewrite the policy and move it to the new company / state / line of business on the rewritten policy.

False = Disable.

Allow Users to Process Rewrites / Cancel Rewrites on Policies with an Outstanding Balance

This is used to determine if all users are allowed to issue policies on Rewrite and Cancel Rewrite transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policy.

False = This prevents users agency users from issuing policies on Cancel Rewrite and Rewrite policies transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policies.

True = ALL users can issue policies on Cancel Rewrite and Rewrite policies transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policies.

True = ALL users can issue policies on Cancel Rewrite and Rewrite policies transactions that have an outstanding balance on the original policies.

Always Generate Un-Auto Man Cancel Print Event

Determines if print events are triggered for Legal and Final Notices on Automatic Manual Cancellation transactions.

False = Disable; print event is only issued if the notice has been sent.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Always Generate Un Non Renew Print Event

Un-Nonrenew Renewal Accepted Billing Notice. Allows the user the opportunity to view when an Un-Nonrenew occurs on the Billing screen.

False = Do not allow viewing.
True = Allow viewing.

False = Do not allow viewing.

Archive Pending on Deletion

When a “Pending” image is deleted, this is used to determine if the system will archive the image instead of deleting it.

False = The image is deleted.

True = When a "Pending" image is deleted from Open Tasks, the image will be archived instead of deleted.

False = The image is deleted.

Archive Pending on Deletion if Third Party Report Exists

When a “Pending” image is deleted and it has 3rd Party reports attached, this setting determines if the system will archive the image instead of deleting it.

False = The system will delete the image as it always has.

True = The "Pending" image will be archived instead of deleted.

True = The "Pending" image will be archived instead of deleted.

Archive Quote w/ attachments on Deletion

Determines when a quote is deleted with attachments if the system will archive the quote instead of denying it.

False = When a quote is deleted with attachments, the system will deny the quote.

True = When a quote is deleted with attachments, the system will archive the quote instead of denying it.

False = When a quote is deleted with attachments, the system will deny the quote.

Archive Quote on Deletion

When deleting a quote using the Delete button on the Policy Control toolbar, this determines if the quote is deleted or it is archived.

Implementation Specific.

False = Disable; delete quote.
True = Enable; archive quote. Archived quotes have their policy status code id changed from a "12" ("Active") to "13" ("Archived") in the Diamond_CX.dbo Policy Image table.

True = Enable.

Archive Quote on Deletion if Third Party Report Exists (Note: Used with the "Archive Quote on Deletion" system setting.)

This determines if quotes having 3rd Party Reports attached are archived...not deleted.

False = Quotes having 3rd Party Reports attached are deleted.
True = Quotes having 3rd Party Reports are archived; not deleted.

True = Enable

AutoMan Cancel Extend Notice Days

Determines if the AutoMan cancel notice date falls on a weekend or a configured holiday if the notice and cancellation will be extended to a non-weekend / non-holiday date.

False = When the AutoMan cancel notice date falls on a weekend or a configured holiday the notice and cancellation will not be extended to a non-weekend / non-holiday date.  

True = When the AutoMan cancel notice date falls on a weekend or a configured holiday the notice and cancellation will be extended to a non-weekend / non-holiday date.  

False = When the AutoMan cancel notice date falls on a weekend or a configured holiday the notice and cancellation will not be extended to a non-weekend / non-holiday date.

Call Process Renewal Criteria on ABT Renewal

For ABT Renewals this determines when regular Renewals are issued, ABT Renewals will be issued as well.

False = ABTs are not included / issued.

True = The ABT Renewal Process calls the Process Policy Renewal Criteria function to decide if the ABT policy should be issued. This would include any other logic that currently exists in this function for the normal Automatic Renewal Process.

False = ABTs are not included / issued.

Check Agency Appointed Date

Determines if policies are allowed to be issued without verifying the date entered in the Date Appointed field in DiamUI Administration: Agency Setup.

Implementation Specific
False = Disable; policies may be issued without verifying the Date Appointed field.
True = Enable; policies will not be allowed to issue without verifying the date entered in the Date Appointed field.

True = Enable.

Company Specific Message

Company specific message appearing on the header in Diamond.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

False = Disable.

Default Transaction Effective Time

When the system automatically sets the time at issuance of a transaction, it will use the time entered here as the time of transactions that are not happening on the current date.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

12:01 AM

Disallow Cancel Rewrites on Policies With Future Non Renew

Used to determine if the system checks if a cancel -  rewrite transaction has a future non-renew on it. If it does, an error message is generated that prompts the user to delete the non-renew before entering the cancel - rewrite.

False = Disable; do not check a cancel-rewrite for a future non-renew.
True = Enable; the system checks if a Cancel -  Rewrite transaction has a future non-renew. If it does, an error message is generated that prompts the user to delete the non-renew before entering the cancel - rewrite.

False = Disable.

Disallow Cancels on Policies With Future Auto Man Cancel

Implementation Specific. Determines if the system does not allow cancellations when there is a future event associated with a policy.

Implementation Specific.
False = Disable; do not allow cancellations when there is a future event associated with a policy.
True = Enable; allow cancellations when there is a future event associated with a policy.

False = Disable.

Disallow Non Reverse Premium Endorsements on Policies in Legal Notice  

Determines if the system will let policies in Legal Notice still be endorsed for no charge or additional premium endorsements or not.

True = Only allow return premium endorsements to be processed.
False = Policies in Legal Notice can still be endorsed for no charge or additional premium endorsements.

False = Policies in Legal Notice can still be endorsed for no charge or additional premium endorsements.

Disallow Renewals on Policies in Legal Notice

Determines if the system will allow policies in Legal Notice to renew or not.

True =  Do not allow policies in Legal Notice to renew.
False = Allow policies in Legal Notice to renew.

True =  Do not allow policies in Legal Notice to renew.

Do Carry Date Non-Pay Cancellations

Determines if a policy will cancel on its Carry Date and not the date it is supposed to cancel on.

False = Do not cancel a policy using Carry Date.
True = Policy will cancel on the Carry Date; not the actual date of cancellation.

False = Do not cancel a policy using Carry Date.

Do Due Date Non Pay Cancellations

Determines if a policy will be cancelled back to the due date of the current invoice and not the transaction date of cancellation.

False  = Disable. A policy will be cancelled effective on its date of cancellation.
True = Enable. A policy will be cancelled back to the due date of the current invoice and not the transaction date of cancellation.

False  = Disable.

Existing Quote Error Message

User defined error message that is displayed when a quote submission is attempted and there is already an existing quote on a policy.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

"Policy already has quote image. Use copy quote button instead."

Expired Renewal Offer Trans Reason

Determines the trans reason id a company wants the system to use for the cancel when a renewal offer expires and the policy is cancelled through the expired Renewal Offer process.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

9

Get New Policy Number for ABT (Agency Bill Transfer policies)

Determines if a new policy number will / will not be generated on an ABT Cancel - Rewrite transaction.

False = Do not generate a new policy number on an ABT Cancel-Rewrite transaction.
True = Generate a new policy number on an ABT Cancel-Rewrite transaction.

False = Do not generate a new policy number on an ABT Cancel-Rewrite transaction.

Get New Policy Number for Rewrite Full

Determines if a new policy number is assigned on the policy transaction Rewrite Full or the policy retains its original number.

False = The system does not assign a new policy number when a Rewrite Full transaction is done.
True =  The system will assign a new policy number when a Rewrite Full transaction is done.

True =  The system will assign a new policy number when a Rewrite Full transaction is done.

Get New Policy Number for Rewrite Pro Rata

On a policy transaction Reinstatement, whose transaction reason is "Reinstatement With Lapse," this setting determines if the policy maintains its original policy number when reinstated or has a new policy number assigned on the reinstated policy.

False = Disable; do not assign a new policy number on the reinstated policy.
True = Enable; assign a new policy number on the reinstated policy.

False = Disable; do not assign a new policy number on the reinstated policy.

Issue Policy Confirmation Box

Determines if the system prompts a user for confirmation when trying to issue a policy.

False = No confirmation is returned.

True = A confirmation is returned that the policy has successfully been issued.

False = No confirmation is returned.

New Business Trans Reason ID

This is the trans reason id that will be used when doing a rewrite or cancel / rewrite for the new business image. When set to "0," then this setting will not be used.

0

0

Populate Interface Table

If this is set to "True," then the stored procedure sp_Trans_Issue_Populate Interface table is called. This populates the interface table with the policy_id and policyimage_number and sets other fields to "1." It will not put anything in to the table.

True = Call the interface table and populate it with the policy_id and policyimage_num.
False = Do not call the Interface Table.

False = Do not call the Interface Table.

Require Producer for Issuance

Determines if a producer is required for issuing a policy or not.

False = Do not require a producer.
True = Require a producer.

False = Do not require a producer.

RU Diary With Deleted Exposure

This determines if a Diary item is created that indicates that an exposure has been deleted on a Renewal Underwriting transaction.

False = No Diary item is created.
True = A Diary item is created that indicates that an exposure has been deleted on a Renewal Underwriting transaction.

True = A Diary item is created that indicates that an exposure has been deleted on a Renewal Underwriting transaction.

Set Rewrite First Written Date To New Policy Eff Date

Resets the first written date of a Rewrite Full transaction to the new effective date instead of copying the first written date from the old policy.

False = Do not reset the first written date of a Rewrite Full transaction.
True = Reset the first written date of a Rewrite Full transaction.

False = Do not reset the first written date of a Rewrite Full transaction.

Set Transaction Date

This determines if the Transaction Date is set at issuance. This should only be set to "False" for "Stand Alone" billing purposes.

False = This allows your company to set the Transaction Date field in the policy image based  on your system and Diamond will not set it.

True = The Transaction Date field will not be set in the policy image.

True = The Transaction Date field will not be set in the policy image.

Show Policy Transaction Messages

This determines if messages are displayed when issuing Policy Transactions.

False = Do not display messages on transactions. (For example, on a Cancellation, the only message displayed is "Policy Cancelled Successfully.")
True = Display all messages on transactions. (For example, on a Cancellation, users will see "Rating Successful." When clicking OK, the message is then displayed that the "Policy Cancelled Successfully.")

False  = Do not display messages on transactions. (For example, on a Cancellation, the only message displayed is "Policy Cancelled Successfully.")

Show Policy Validation Before Submission

For Policy Transactions...Not New Business. Determines if a validation is shown to the user but still allows the user to continue on with processing the transaction.

False = Disable. No validation error is displayed.
True = Enable. the system shows a message box containing the validation error (on Policy Transactions...not New Business policies) and gives the user a choice to continue or not if any validation errors are present before submission.

False = Disable. No validation error is displayed.

Show Update Client at Issuance

This determines if the Update Client Issuance screen is displayed on the Web when the client and policyholder information is different.

False = The screen is not displayed.

True = The Update Client Issuance screen is displayed on the Web when the client and policyholder information is different when issuing a policy.

False = The screen is not displayed.

Suppress Printing on ABTs (Agency Bill Transfer policies)

Used to determine whether or not all printing is suppressed at the Base Level. It prevents all printing except for invoices on an "Anniversary" or "Renewal" transaction.

False = Do not suppress printing.
True = Suppress printing.

False = Do not suppress printing.

Use ABT Plan with Selected Policies

Determines if users can or cannot "selectively" choose policies they wish to include in the transfer using the Edit Agency Book Transfer Policies New Form (screen) in Agency Setup.

False = Use the current functionality; transfer all policies from one agency to another.

True = Using the  Edit Agency Book Transfer Policies New Form (screen) in Agency Setup, allow users to "selectively" pick and choose those policies to be included in the ABT Transfer.

False = Use the current functionality; transfer all policies from one agency to another.

Use Automatic Manual Cancellations for Binder Transaction

For binders, create an automatic manual cancellation future event rather than a future cancel.  

True = Create an automatic manual cancellation future event.
False = Do not  create an automatic manual cancellation future event.

True = Create an automatic manual cancellation future event.

Use Effective Time

Capture time as part of the effective date and expiration date for all policy transactions, except Renewals and Renewal Offers.

0 = Disable; do not capture time.
1 = Enable; manually capture / enter the time as part of the Effective Date on all policy transactions except Renewals and Renewal Offers. Defaults to the current time.

2: Automatic; the actual time will be automatically used if the transaction date is the same date as the system date unless overridden when submitting the transaction. A new authority, “Override Effective Time,” has been added to the Policy Processing group. A user must have this authority when Option 2 (Automatic) is set in the “Use Effective Time” system setting. With this authority, the user will be able to override the time that will be used for the Transaction Effective Time.

0 = Disable; time would be blank which is 12:00a.m.

Use Single Transaction Link

Used to determine if the system will only show one (1) transaction link instead of separate links for each transaction available.

False = Employee Web will show separate links for each transaction type available.
True = Employee Web will only show a single transaction link instead of separate links for each transaction type available.

False = Employee Web will show separate links for each transaction type available.

Using Implementation Validations to Stop Issuance when Premium Less Than or Equal to Zero

Used to determine if the system uses a Base validation to prevent issuance on policies with zero premium or not.

False = A Base validation is displayed indicating a policy cannot be issued with zero premium.

True = No Base validation is shown for policies with zero premium.

False = A Base validation is displayed indicating a policy cannot

Verify Producer License Dates at Issuance

Determines whether or not producer license dates are verified when new business and renewal transactions are issued.

True = The system verifies the validity of a producer’s license. If it is no longer valid a warning message will display and the transaction can still be issued.
False = The producer’s license is not verified and no warning is shown.

False = The producer’s license is not verified and no warning is shown.

Trans Union

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Assign Policy to Workflow when Mismatch

This assigns a policy to a workflow to be reviewed when there is a mismatch.

False = Do not assign a policy to a workflow to be reviewed when there is a mismatch.

True = Assign a policy to a workflow to be reviewed when there is a mismatch.

True = Assign a policy to a workflow to be reviewed when there is a mismatch.

Credit Score Lookup Enabled This determines if Diamond will convert the Trans Union score to a custom score. False = No conversion is done in Diamond.
True = Diamond converts the Trans Union Credit Score to a custom Credit Score.
True = Diamond converts the Trans Union Credit Score to a custom Credit Score.

Live Car Fax Vendor License Key

This is the Car Fax assigned license to order Car Fax with the Vehicle History Score in the Production Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live Subscriber Code Credit Determines the Subscriber Code to the Live environment when ordering Credit Scores. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank

Live Subscriber Code VHS

Determines the Subscriber Code to the Live Environment when ordering Vehicle History Score.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Live Subscriber Password Credit This is the Subscriber Password to the “Live” environment when ordering a Credit Score. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live Subscriber Password VHS This is the Subscriber Password to the “Live” environment when ordering a Vehicle History Score. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live URL Determines the name of the address where the “Live” environment is located. Implementation Specific; user defined. https://netaccess.transunion.com.
Proxy Domain Name of the domain to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Host Name of the Proxy Host. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy Port The Proxy Port Number. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Proxy User Name The user name to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Proxy User Password The user password to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank

Save Credit Score to Policy Level

Determines if Diamond will save policyholder Credit Score at the Policy Level.

False = Diamond will not save policyholder Credit Score at the Policy Level.

True = Diamond will save policyholder Credit Score at the Policy Level.

False = Diamond will not save policyholder Credit Score at the Policy Level.

Test Car Fax Vendor License Key

This is the Car Fax assigned license to order Car Fax with the Vehicle History Score in the Test Environment.

Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Testing Determines if the Test System settings are used or not. False = The Test System settings are not used.
True = The Test System settings are used.
True = The Test System settings are used.
Test Subscriber Code Credit Determines the Subscriber Code to the “Test” environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0622P6473289

Test Subscriber VHS

Determines the Subscriber Code to the test environment when ordering the Vehicle History Score.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Test Subscriber Password Credit Determines the Subscriber Password to the “Test” environment when ordering a Credit Score. Implementation Specific; user defined. BZFE

Test Subscriber Password VHS

Determines the Subscriber Password to the test environment when ordering the Vehicle History Score.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

Blank

Test URL The name of the address where the “Test” environment is located. Implementation Specific; user defined. https://netaccess-test.transunion.com
Trans Union Enabled Determines if Diamond will order Credit Score Reports through Trans Union or not. False = Credit Scores are not ordered through Trans Union.
True = Credit Scores are ordered through Trans Union.
True = Credit Scores are ordered through Trans Union.

Test Union Vehicle History Score Enabled

Determines if the system will order the Vehicle Score Report Insurance Score through Trans Union.

False = the system will not order the Vehicle Score Report Insurance Score through Trans Union.

True = The system will order the Vehicle Score Report Insurance Score through Trans Union.

False = the system will not order the Vehicle Score Report Insurance Score through Trans Union.

Validations

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

City State Zip County

Used to determine how addresses are validated.

0 = The validation is bypassed entirely.

1 = The city / state / zip and county must all exist and be spelled correctly and be a valid combination.

2 =  Only the city / state / Zip code are validated.
(Note: The specified city must be in the specified state / county and the five digit zip code must be valid for that city / state before the address can be saved.)

0 = The validation is bypassed entirely.

Enable Validation for Preventing Rate without Successful DHI

Determines if the system tells Diamond to validate whether the user can issue a policy that has a DHI ordered but did not receive a successful response

False = No validation is done.

True = Diamond validates the user can issue a policy that has a DHI ordered, but has not received a successful response.

False = No validation is done.

Enable Validation for Preventing Rate without Successful MVR

Tells Diamond to validate whether the user can rate a policy that has an MVR ordered whose result is a “No Hit.”

False = No validation is done.

True = Diamond validates the user can rate a policy that has an MVR ordered, but whose result is a “No Hit.”

False = No validation is done.

Enable Validation for Preventing Rate without Violation Report

Tells Diamond to validate whether the user can rate a policy that has no orders for DHI or MVR.

False = No validation is done.

True = Diamond validates the user can rate a policy that has neither orders for a DHI or an MVR.

False = No validation is done.

Save Validations

This is used to determine if Save, Rate & Issue Validations are saved to the Validation Log table when triggered at the Business Level.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

0 = Disable.

UI Validation for Issue

This determines if the Issue validation is triggered from the UI.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

 

UI Validation for Rate

This determines if the Rate validation is triggered from the UI.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

UI Validation for Save

This determines if the Save validations are triggered from the UI.

False = Disable.
True = Enable.

True = Enable.

VIN

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

ISO Year Start  

Determines beginning model year on the ISO Make / Model Lookup screen.

User defined; value should be set to YYYY.

1975

Return Partial VIN Matches

This determines if vehicles will be returned with an exact match or will be returned on partially matched VIN numbers.

False = Return vehicles with exact match on VIN Numbers.
True = Return vehicles with a partial match on VIN Numbers.

True = Return vehicles with a partial match.

ISO Import

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Exception
Log Path

This is the directory where a log file will be written to that will contain any problems encountered during the ISO import.  An exception log will be created for each file that contains errors.  The exception log will have the same name as the file but with a different extension (.log).  If no errors were found, then nothing will be written to the directory.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

C:\DiamondPaths\
VINISOImport

Number of Records in Batch

This provides the number of records that will be imported for each batch required to process a complete file.  For example, if the file contains 3,000 records and this setting is set to 1,000 (which is the default), then the file will be processed in three batches. The system calculates the number of batches needed based on this value.  (Note: This was added in order to make the system more responsive while processing large files.)

Implementation Specific; user defined.

1000

VINtelligence

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Live Password Determines the password that must accompany each Web Service Request in the "Live" environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
Live User Id Determines the identifier that must accompany each Web Service Request in the "Live" environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Live Web Service Used to determine the path name of the "Live" Web Service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Perform Automatic Lookup Determines if a VIN Lookup will happen automatically or not when a vehicle is edited and a lookup has not been previously done. False = A VIN Lookup will not occur automatically when a vehicle is edited and a lookup has not been previously done.
True =  A VIN Lookup will happen automatically when a vehicle is edited and a lookup has not been previously done.
False = A VIN Lookup will not occur automatically when a vehicle is edited and a lookup has not been previously done.
Proxy Domain The name of the Domain to be used with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Proxy Host This is the name of the Proxy Host. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Proxy Port The Proxy Port number. Implementation Specific; user defined. 0
Proxy User Name This is the User Name to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Proxy User Password Determines the User Password to be used for authentication with the Proxy Server. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Testing Determines whether to use the Test System Settings instead of the "Live" System Settings. False = Use the "Live" Environment.
True = Use the "Test" Environment.
 
True = Use the "Test" Environment.
Test Password Determines the password that must accompany each Web Service Request in the "Test" environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Test User Id Determines the identifier that must accompany each Web Service Request in the "Test" environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 
Test Web Service Used to determine the path name of the "Test" Web Service environment. Implementation Specific; user defined. Blank
 

Visual Tree

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Allow Client Delete   

Allows a client to be deleted from the Visual Tree as long as there is no policy under the client. The stipulation in code is that the client node that is being deleted cannot have more than one (1) "child" node.

False = Disable; prevents a user from deleting clients from the Visual Tree.
True = Enable; allows user to delete client from the Visual Tree.

True = Enable; allows user to delete client from the Visual Tree.

Allow Fuzzy Lookup

This is used to determine if the Visual Tree Lookup returns a more accurate listing of clients than the "standard" search method.

False = Disable. The "standard" search for Client Lookup by Name is used.
True = Enable. The Client Lookup by Name will return a more accurate listing of clients than the "standard" search. This Search Method lists the more likely matches at the top. The search takes longer, but this is a trade off for the increased accuracy.

False = Disable.

Allow Policy Change Client

Allows policies to be moved from one (1) client to another either by cutting and pasting or by dragging and dropping.

False = Disable; prevents a user from transferring policies between clients.
True = Enable; allows user to transfer a policy between clients.

True = Enable; allows user to transfer a policy between clients.

Go To Policy

Defaults check mark in the Go To Policy field. When checked, loads policy for selected client automatically. (Note: Policy Number, Policy ID Lookup only.)

False = Disables check mark.
True = Enable check mark.

True = Enable.

Search Results Max Records

Limits the Visual Tree Search Results based on the value. (Note: If this is set to "0," then it defaults in the code to 1000.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

0

Update Billing Refund Option During Transfer

When transferring a policy from one (1) client to another, this is used to determine if the Refund Option assumes the new client's Refund Option.

False = The Refund Option does not assume the new client's Refund Option.
True = Upon transfer, the Refund Option assumes the new client's Refund Option.

False = The Refund Option does not assume the new client's Refund Option.

Workflow

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Consider the individual agency underwriter for task assignment

Causes the system to select the agency underwriter user (if available) when routing policies to underwriting.

True = The system selects the agency underwriter (if available) when routing policies to underwriting.  
False = No agency underwriter user is selected.

False = No agency underwriter user is selected.

Create Policy Transfer Notes as System Generated

Determines if Notes created during the Policy Transfer process are flagged as system generated or not.

True = Notes that are created during the Policy Transfer process are flagged as system generated.
False = Notes that are created during the Policy Transfer process are not flagged as system generated.

True = Notes that are created during the Policy Transfer process are flagged as system generated.

Create Private Policy Diary Notes

Used to determine if Notes are created as "Public" or "Private" on transferred tasks.

True = Enable. Notes are created as "Private" on transferred tasks.
False = Disable. Notes are created as "Public" on transferred tasks.

True = Enable. Notes are created as "Private" on transferred tasks.

Default Value for the Belonging to Queue Combo for the Windows Client Only

Determines the default selection for the Belonging to Queue combo on the Open Tasks List screen for the Windows client only.

Any Queue = 0
No Queue = -1
My Queues = -2

-1 = No Queue

Load For User and Date Range Timeout Value

This sets the time out value in seconds for the call to the stored procedure Workflow_Load For User and Date Range.

Implementation Specific; user defined.

120

Make Payment Redirect URL

Used for the Agency Web Portal (Diamond). This is the name of the URL users are redirected to when making payments through a different Web Site. (Note: This is used when the "Transfer After Finalize" system setting is set to "1.")

Implementation Specific; user defined.

~/home.aspx

Max Workflow Tasks

This allows the user to set the number of items to be returned from Workflow Load Tasks (Open Tasks screen).

Implementation Specific; user defined.

1000

Num Days Added To System Date For End Date

 

Sets the end date on the Open Tasks screen. It adds the value to the system date to get the end date.

Implementation Specific;user defined.

30

Num Days Subtracted From System Date For Start Date

Determines the default start date for loading Workflow Tasks by subtracting the number of days from the system date.

Implementation Specific;user defined.

1000

Sort By Last Name

Determines how users can sort the Insured column on the Open Tasks List. Sort by the insured's last name or first name.

Implementation Specific.
False = Sort by insured's first name.
True = Sort by insured's last name.

True = Sort by insured's last name.

 

Transfer After Finalize

Used for the Agency Web Portal. Determines if the "Finalize Workflow" loads and users finish promoting & issuing a quote through Diamond OR redirects to a different URL so that a payment can be applied. (Note: This is also used with the setting, "Make Payment redirect URL.)

False = The "Finalize Workflow" loads and users finish promoting & issuing a quote through Diamond.
True = When the user clicks the Submit button on the Agency Portal, the system looks at the "Make Payment After Redirect URL" setting, which defaults to an implementation specific site, to see if we need to redirect to a different URL so that the user can make a payment through a different Web Site.

False = The "Finalize Workflow" loads and users finish promoting & issuing a quote through Diamond.

Use Outlook

Allows email to be launched from the Open Task screen.

False = Disable.
True = Enable email to be launched from Open Task screen.

True = Enable email to be launched from Open Task screen.

Dashboard

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Hide Milestone Metric KPI% on My Task List (Milestone)

Indicates whether Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will show on the My Task List (Milestone) screen.

False = Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will not show on the My Task List (Milestone) screen.

True = Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will show on the My Task List (Milestone) screen.

False = Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will not show on the My Task List (Milestone) screen.

Hide Milestone Metric KPI% on Team Task List (Milestone)

Indicates whether Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will show on the Team Task List (Milestone) screen.

False = Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will not show on the Team Task List (Milestone) screen.
True = Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will show on the Team Task List (Milestone) screen.

False = Milestone Metric Key Performance indicator percentages will not show on the Team Task List (Milestone) screen.

Workflow Queue Default My Task List

Determines the queues that are returned with the Dashboard Task List (Individual).

0 = Any queue.
-1 = No queue.
-2 = My queue.

-2 = My queue.

Workflow Queue Default My Team Task List

Determines the queues that are returned with the Dashboard Task List (Team).

0 = Any queue.
-1 = No queue.
-2 = My queue.

-2 = My queue.

XML

Field

Function / Value

Options

Default

Emit Default Values for Comparative Rater

Determines if default values for simple data types will be serialized into the output Comparative Rater XML.

False = Default values for simple data types will not be serialized.

True = Default values for simple data types will be serialized.

False = Default values for simple data types will not be serialized.

Emit Default Values for Download

Used to control if default values for Download are sent in the XMLs.

False = Do not include default values for Download.

True = Default values for Download are sent in the XMLs.

True = Default values for Download are sent in the XMLs.

Emit Default Values for Print

Used to control if default values for Print are sent in the XMLs.

False = Do not include default values for Print.

True = Default values for Print are sent in the XMLs.

True = Default values for Print are sent in the XMLs.

Number of Billing Activity Records   

Maximum number of billing records used in XML.

User defined

20

Save Output XML

Not currently functional.

None

1